AUTODESK REVIT BUILDING 8.

1
®

Metric Tutorial

August 2005

Copyright © 2005 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved
This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF PURCHASE OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state cation, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3D Props, 3D Studio, 3D Studio MAX, 3D Studio VIZ, 3DSurfer, ActiveShapes, ActiveShapes (logo), Actrix, ADI, AEC Authority (logo), AEC-X, Animator Pro, Animator Studio, ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Map, Autodesk, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk (logo), Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk University (logo), Autodesk View, Autodesk WalkThrough, Autodesk World, AutoLISP, AutoSketch, Biped, bringing information down to earth, CAD Overlay, Character Studio, Cinepak, Cinepak (logo), Codec Central, Combustion, Design Your World, Design Your World (logo), Discreet, EditDV, Education by Design, gmax, Heidi, HOOPS, Hyperwire, i-drop, Inside Track, Kinetix, MaterialSpec, Mechanical Desktop, NAAUG, ObjectARX, PeopleTracker, Physique, Planix, Powered with Autodesk Technology (logo), RadioRay, Revit, Softdesk, Texture Universe, The AEC Authority, The Auto Architect, VISION, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual TugBoat, Visual LISP, Volo, WHIP!, and WHIP! (logo). The following are trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and/or other countries: 3ds max, AutoCAD Architectural Desktop, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT Learning Assistance, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk Map, Autodesk Streamline, AutoSnap, AutoTrack, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, Buzzsaw.com, Cinestream, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Content Explorer, Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignProf, DesignServer, Design Web Format, DWF, DWG Linking, DXF, Extending the Design Team, GDX Driver, gmax (logo), gmax ready (logo),Heads-up Design, IntroDV, jobnet, ObjectDBX, onscreen onair online, Plans & Specs, Plasma, PolarSnap, ProjectPoint, Reactor, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Visual Bridge, Visual Syllabus, and Where Design Connects.

Autodesk Canada Inc. Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc. in the USA and/or Canada, and/or other countries: discreet, fire, flame, flint, flint RT, frost, glass, inferno, MountStone, riot, river, smoke, sparks, stone, stream, vapour, wire. The following are trademarks of Autodesk Canada Inc., in the USA, Canada, and/or other countries: backburner, backdraft, Multi-Master Editing.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright © 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright © 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright © 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. International CorrectSpell ™ Spelling Correction System © 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield ™ 3.0. Copyright © 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE ® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE ® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc. © Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright © 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC © RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin." Typefaces from the Bitstream ® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust © 1996. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts ............................................................................................... 1
Understanding the Basics ................................................................................................................................. 2 Navigating the Revit Building User Interface ............................................................................................. 4

Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .................................................................................. 11
Creating Your First Building Model ............................................................................................................... 12 Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing ................................................................ 12 Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing ............................................................................................ 24 Dimensioning the Building Model ........................................................................................................... 32 Adding Doors and Windows ..................................................................................................................... 41 Adding Floors and Floor Openings ........................................................................................................... 58 Adding a Roof and Ceiling ........................................................................................................................ 74 Adding Multi-Level Stairs .......................................................................................................................... 80 Creating the East Wing and Passageway .................................................................................................. 87 Scheduling the Building Model .............................................................................................................. 100 Rendering the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 104 Documenting the Building Model .......................................................................................................... 106

Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .......................................................................... 113
Modifying System Settings ........................................................................................................................... 114 Modifying General System Options ........................................................................................................ 114 Specifying File Locations ......................................................................................................................... 115 Specifying Spelling Options .................................................................................................................... 117 Modifying Snap Settings ......................................................................................................................... 118 Modifying Project Settings ........................................................................................................................... 120 Creating and Applying Materials ............................................................................................................ 120 Creating and Applying Fill Patterns ........................................................................................................ 123 Controlling Object Styles ........................................................................................................................ 125 Modifying Line Patterns and Styles ........................................................................................................ 128 Modifying Annotations ........................................................................................................................... 131 Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options ........................ 133 Modifying Project Browser Organization ............................................................................................... 134 Creating an Office Template ........................................................................................................................ 136 Choosing the Base Template ................................................................................................................... 137 Modifying Project Settings ...................................................................................................................... 137 Loading and Modifying Families and Groups ........................................................................................ 142 Modifying Views and View Templates ................................................................................................... 144 Modifying Render Scene Settings ........................................................................................................... 147 Modifying Import/Export Settings .......................................................................................................... 148 Setting up Shared and Project Parameters .............................................................................................. 149 Creating Named Print Settings ............................................................................................................... 151

Chapter 4 Ceilings ............................................................................................................................... 153
Creating Ceilings .......................................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Automatic Ceilings ................................................................................................................... 154 Creating Compound Ceilings ................................................................................................................. 156

Chapter 5 Openings ............................................................................................................................ 159
Cutting Roof Openings ................................................................................................................................ 160 Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof ..................................................................................................... 160 Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening ................................................................................................. 164

Contents | i

Creating a Vertical Roof Opening ........................................................................................................... 167 Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings ................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Floor ............................................................................................................... 170 Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling ............................................................................................................ 173 Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool .............................................................................................. 174

Chapter 6 Railings ............................................................................................................................... 177
Creating Railings .......................................................................................................................................... 178 Creating the Railing Layout .................................................................................................................... 178 Adjusting Railing Parameters .................................................................................................................. 180

Chapter 7 Roofs ................................................................................................................................... 185
Creating Roofs .............................................................................................................................................. 186 Creating an Extruded Roof ...................................................................................................................... 186 Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................. 190 Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint ............................................................... 192 Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint .................................................................................................... 194 Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint ................................................................................................... 197 Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof ...................................................................................................... 199 Aligning Roof Eaves ................................................................................................................................ 201 Creating a Mansard Roof ........................................................................................................................ 202 Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits ............................................................................................................ 204 Creating Roof Fascia ................................................................................................................................ 204 Creating Gutters ...................................................................................................................................... 205 Creating Soffits ........................................................................................................................................ 206

Chapter 8 Stairs .................................................................................................................................. 209
Creating Stairs .............................................................................................................................................. 210 Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run ........................................................................................................ 210 Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run ..................................................................................................... 215 Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs .......................................................................................... 221 Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings .................................................................................................... 224 Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run .................................................................................................. 231 Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run ............................................................................................ 236 Working with the Stair Calculator .......................................................................................................... 241

Chapter 9 Walls .................................................................................................................................. 247
Creating Walls .............................................................................................................................................. 248 Sketching Walls ....................................................................................................................................... 248 Working with Compound Walls ............................................................................................................ 258 Working with Vertically Compound Walls ............................................................................................ 266 Joining Walls to Floors ............................................................................................................................ 276 Working with Foundation Walls ............................................................................................................ 278 Working with Wall Wraps ...................................................................................................................... 281 Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments ....................................................................................... 283

Chapter 10 Curtain Systems ................................................................................................................ 287
Flat Curtain System ...................................................................................................................................... 288 Creating an Entrance .............................................................................................................................. 288 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System  ................................................................................................ 296 Curved Curtain System ................................................................................................................................ 299 Adding a Curved Curtain System  .......................................................................................................... 299 Adding a Custom Curtain Panel ............................................................................................................. 301 Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel  ...................................................................................... 304 Additional Curtain Systems ......................................................................................................................... 307 Sloped Glazings  ...................................................................................................................................... 307 Storefront System  ................................................................................................................................... 308 Curtain System by Lines  ........................................................................................................................ 311

Chapter 11 Creating Drawings ............................................................................................................ 315
Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project ........................................................................................................... 316 Creating a Drawing Sheet ....................................................................................................................... 316 Adding a Sheet to the Project .................................................................................................................. 323 Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet .......................................................................................... 324

ii | Contents

Creating New Views to Add to Sheets ..................................................................................................... 326 Using Legends .............................................................................................................................................. 333 Creating a Symbol Legend ...................................................................................................................... 333 Creating a Wall Type Legend .................................................................................................................. 335 Using a Legend View to Match Types ..................................................................................................... 337 Using Revision Tracking ............................................................................................................................... 339 Setting Up a Revision Table .................................................................................................................... 339 Sketching Revision Clouds ...................................................................................................................... 340 Tagging Revision Clouds ......................................................................................................................... 341 Working with Revisions .......................................................................................................................... 342

Chapter 12 Detailing ............................................................................................................................. 345
Creating a Detail from a Building Model ..................................................................................................... 346 Creating a Callout View .......................................................................................................................... 346 Detailing the View .................................................................................................................................. 350 Adding Detail Lines ................................................................................................................................. 356 Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation ................................................................................................... 359 Adding Break Lines ................................................................................................................................. 360 Adding Text Notes ................................................................................................................................... 363 Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views ......................................................... 364 Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View ............................................................................ 364 Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View ........................................................................................ 366 Creating a Drafted Detail ............................................................................................................................. 369 Creating a Drafting View ........................................................................................................................ 369 Creating a Detail in the Drafting View ................................................................................................... 369 Importing a Detail into a Drafting View ................................................................................................. 376 Creating a Reference Callout .................................................................................................................. 379

Chapter 13 Scheduling ......................................................................................................................... 381
Creating Type and Instance Schedules ........................................................................................................ 382 Creating a Window Schedule .................................................................................................................. 382 Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams ..................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Schedule ...................................................................................................................... 385 Creating a Room Color Diagram ............................................................................................................ 394 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes ....................................................................................................... 396 Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions ..................................................................... 396 Scheduling Shared Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 401 Creating a Multi-Category Schedule ....................................................................................................... 401 Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules ...................................................................................................... 406 Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter ............................................................................... 406 Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula ............................................................................ 408 Scheduling Project Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 409 Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters ............................................................................... 410 Exporting Project Information with ODBC ................................................................................................. 411 Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access ............................................................................ 411

Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning ......................................................................................... 413
Setting the Base Elevation of a Project ......................................................................................................... 414 Setting the Base Elevation of a House ..................................................................................................... 414 Dimensioning ............................................................................................................................................... 416 Creating Dimensions .............................................................................................................................. 417 Controlling Witness Line Location ........................................................................................................ 422 Modifying Dimension Properties ............................................................................................................ 425 Working with Alignments and Constraints ........................................................................................... 426 Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions ......................................................................................... 432 Annotating ................................................................................................................................................... 434 Creating Angular Dimensions ................................................................................................................. 434 Sequentially Tagging Rooms ................................................................................................................... 435 Tagging Doors and Windows .................................................................................................................. 437

Chapter 15 Viewing .............................................................................................................................. 441
Viewing a Building Model ............................................................................................................................ 442 Exploring the Building Model ................................................................................................................ 442 Creating a Perspective View with a Camera ........................................................................................... 445

Contents | iii

Creating a Section View .......................................................................................................................... 451 Creating Elevation Views ........................................................................................................................ 453 Controlling Fill Pattern Colors ..................................................................................................................... 455 Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material ..................................................................................... 455 Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type ................................................................... 457 Creating a View Plan Region ........................................................................................................................ 459 Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan ................................................................................................... 459

Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .............................................................. 463
Rendering an Exterior View ......................................................................................................................... 464 Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model ....................................................................... 464 Adding Trees to the Site .......................................................................................................................... 468 Creating a Perspective View .................................................................................................................... 470 Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View ............................................................................................. 473 Rendering an Interior View .......................................................................................................................... 476 Adding RPC People ................................................................................................................................. 476 Creating the Interior Perspective View ................................................................................................... 478 Creating a New Render Scene ................................................................................................................. 481 Defining Daylights and Rendering the View .......................................................................................... 482 Creating and Recording Walkthroughs ....................................................................................................... 484 Creating a Walkthrough ......................................................................................................................... 484 Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position ........................................................................ 487 Recording the Walkthrough ................................................................................................................... 489

Chapter 17 Presentation Views ........................................................................................................... 491
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique ............................................................................................... 492 Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique .............................................................................................. 492 Using Advanced Model Graphics ............................................................................................................ 494 Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet ............................................................................................................ 496 Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique .............................................................................................. 499 Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique ................................................................................... 500 Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet .......................................................... 502 Adding Section Views to the Analytique ..................................................................................................... 504 Preparing a Section View for the Analytique .......................................................................................... 505 Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View ............................................................................... 509 Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique ............................................................................... 510 Working with a Presentation View Template ......................................................................................... 514 Working in a Callout Analytique ............................................................................................................ 517 Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes .................................................................................................. 524 Creating Cutaway Isometric Views ......................................................................................................... 525 Creating Cutaway Perspective Views ...................................................................................................... 531 Annotating the Analytique ..................................................................................................................... 536

Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor ........................................................................... 539
Using Families and the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to Families ......................................................................................................................... 540 Introduction to the Family Editor .......................................................................................................... 542

Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .................................................................. 545
Creating a Door Family ................................................................................................................................ 546 Drawing the Door Plan View Components ............................................................................................ 546 Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry ................................................................................................. 550 Assigning Materials to the Door Components ....................................................................................... 553 Defining New Door Types ....................................................................................................................... 556 Creating a Window Family .......................................................................................................................... 558 Specifying the New Window Parameters ................................................................................................ 559 Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry ........................................................................................ 560 Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry ........................................................................................... 566 Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry .......................................................................................... 569 Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 574 Assigning Materials to the Window Components ................................................................................. 584 Defining New Window Types ................................................................................................................. 587 Creating a Furniture Family ......................................................................................................................... 591 Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters ......................................................................................... 592

iv | Contents

Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 597 Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry ..................................................................................... 600 Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry ..................................................................................................... 609 Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry .................................................................................................... 614 Defining New Furniture Types ................................................................................................................ 617 Creating a Baluster Family ........................................................................................................................... 619 Drawing a Baluster .................................................................................................................................. 619 Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run .............................................................................................. 621 Creating Profile Families .............................................................................................................................. 623 Drawing a Sweep Profile .......................................................................................................................... 623 Drawing a Rail Profile ............................................................................................................................. 624 Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile ................................................................................................................ 624 Drawing a Reveal Profile ......................................................................................................................... 625 Drawing a Host Sweep Profile ................................................................................................................. 626 Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path ................................................................................................... 627 Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls .................................................................................................. 629 Creating a Room Tag .................................................................................................................................... 631 Specifying Room Tag Parameters ............................................................................................................ 631 Creating an Annotation Symbol .................................................................................................................. 633 Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol ............................................................................ 633 Adding the New North Arrow to a Project ............................................................................................. 636 Creating a Titleblock Family ........................................................................................................................ 636 Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet ............................................................................................... 637 Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock .............................................................................................. 640 Adding the Titleblock to a New Project .................................................................................................. 649 Creating In-Place Families ............................................................................................................................ 650 Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family ............................................................................................... 651 Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family .......................................................................................... 658

Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques ................................................................. 661
Planning a Parametric Component Family .................................................................................................. 662 Determining Component Needs ............................................................................................................. 662 Selecting the Family Template ................................................................................................................ 663 Creating the Component Skeleton .............................................................................................................. 665 Adding Reference Planes ......................................................................................................................... 666 Adding Dimensions and Constraints ...................................................................................................... 671 Creating New Length Parameters ........................................................................................................... 674 Flexing the Component Model ............................................................................................................... 678 Adding Solid Geometry ................................................................................................................................ 680 Creating Solid Extrusions ........................................................................................................................ 680 Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry ............................................................................................ 682 Creating Additional Solid Geometry ...................................................................................................... 685 Testing the Family in a Project ..................................................................................................................... 693 Loading a Family into a Project .............................................................................................................. 693 Testing a Family Instance in a Project .................................................................................................... 694 Working with Nested Subcomponents ........................................................................................................ 697 Adding a Nested Component ................................................................................................................. 698 Creating Formula-controlled Parameters ................................................................................................ 702 Arraying Nested Subcomponents ............................................................................................................ 706 Reloading a Family into a Project ........................................................................................................... 711 Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters ..................................................................................... 712 Creating and Applying Subcategories ..................................................................................................... 713 Creating Material Parameters .................................................................................................................. 717 Controlling Component Visibility ............................................................................................................... 719 Assigning Detail Level and View Controls .............................................................................................. 719 Creating Component Types ......................................................................................................................... 722 Creating Multiple Component Types ..................................................................................................... 722 Creating Conditional Formulas .............................................................................................................. 723

Chapter 21 Area Analysis ..................................................................................................................... 725
Using Area Analysis Tools ............................................................................................................................ 726 Creating Area Schemes and Plans ........................................................................................................... 726 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans ................................................................................. 732

Contents | v

Chapter 22 Massing ............................................................................................................................... 735
Using Massing Tools ..................................................................................................................................... 736 Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model ...................................................................................... 736 Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model .......................................................... 741 Using Mass Family Files in a Project  ........................................................................................................... 743 Creating New Mass Family Types  .......................................................................................................... 743 Loading and Placing New Mass Families ................................................................................................ 744 Joining Mass Elements ............................................................................................................................ 747 Using Mass Elements with Design Options ................................................................................................. 750 Mass Elements in Design Options .......................................................................................................... 750 Creating Building Components from Mass Elements ................................................................................. 752 Creating Walls by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 753 Creating Floors by Picking Faces ............................................................................................................. 755 Creating Roofs by Picking Faces .............................................................................................................. 759 Creating Curtain Systems  ...................................................................................................................... 761 Editing Elements Created from Massings ............................................................................................... 763 Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility ............................................................................................................ 768

Chapter 23 Site ..................................................................................................................................... 771
Using Site Tools ............................................................................................................................................ 772 Creating a Toposurface ........................................................................................................................... 772 Adding Property Lines ............................................................................................................................. 777 Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings ...................................................................................... 781 Creating Topographic Subregions ........................................................................................................... 783 Grading the Toposurface ......................................................................................................................... 788 Adding a Building Pad ............................................................................................................................ 793 Adding Site Components ........................................................................................................................ 795 Tagging Site and Parking Components .................................................................................................. 798 Creating Parking Space Schedules ........................................................................................................... 799

Chapter 24 Grouping ............................................................................................................................ 801
Creating Groups ........................................................................................................................................... 802 Creating a Group ..................................................................................................................................... 802 Placing a Group ....................................................................................................................................... 803 Modifying a Group .................................................................................................................................. 804 Creating Nested Groups ............................................................................................................................... 805 Creating a Nested Group ......................................................................................................................... 806 Modifying a Nested Group ...................................................................................................................... 807 Working with Groups .................................................................................................................................. 809 Duplicating a Group ............................................................................................................................... 809 Creating a Detail Group .......................................................................................................................... 812 Using Attached Detail Groups ................................................................................................................ 813 Saving and Loading Groups .................................................................................................................... 815 Automatically Creating a Group ............................................................................................................. 816

Chapter 25 Structural .......................................................................................................................... 819
Adding Structural Walls ............................................................................................................................... 820 Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay .............................................................................................. 820 Sketching Structural Walls ...................................................................................................................... 821 Dimensioning and Modifying Walls ...................................................................................................... 830 Adding Structural Columns and Beams ....................................................................................................... 833 Adding Structural Columns .................................................................................................................... 834 Adding Structural Beams and Girders ..................................................................................................... 838 Adding Joists and Purlins ........................................................................................................................ 848 Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels .................................................................................................. 854 Defining New Levels ............................................................................................................................... 855 Duplicating the Existing Design ............................................................................................................. 856 Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation ......................................................................................................... 858 Creating a Framing Elevation ................................................................................................................. 858 Adding Structural Braces ......................................................................................................................... 860

Chapter 26 Sharing Projects ................................................................................................................ 865
Overview ....................................................................................................................................................... 866

vi | Contents

Using Worksharing in a Project ................................................................................................................... 866 Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals .......................................................................................... 866 Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets ................................................................................... 869 Working Individually with Worksets ..................................................................................................... 873 Using Worksets with Multiple Users ....................................................................................................... 876 Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users ......................................................................... 881

Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options .................................................................................. 885
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project ............................................................................................ 886 Creating the Structural Design Options ................................................................................................. 886 Creating the Roof System Design Options ............................................................................................. 896 Managing Design Options ...................................................................................................................... 903

Chapter 28 Project Phasing ................................................................................................................. 909
Using Phasing ............................................................................................................................................... 910 Phasing Your Model ................................................................................................................................ 910 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags ............................................................................................................. 915

Chapter 29 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates ....................................................... 919
Linking Building Models .............................................................................................................................. 920 Linking Building Models from Different Project Files ............................................................................ 920 Repositioning Linked Building Models ................................................................................................... 928 Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility ........................................................................................ 931 Managing Linked Building Models ......................................................................................................... 933 Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models ........................................................................................... 935 Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates ................................................................................................... 935 Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates ........................................................................................ 937 Scheduling Components of Linked Files ................................................................................................ 941 Working with a Linked Building Model ................................................................................................. 943 Managing Shared Locations .................................................................................................................... 944

Contents | vii

viii | Contents

Understanding the Concepts

1

In this tutorial, you learn the fundamental concepts of Revit Building. You learn how Revit Building works, the terms used when working with the product, and how to navigate the user interface.

In the lesson that follows, you learn many of the important features in Revit Building that contribute to a user-friendly design environment, enhanced productivity, and faster construction documents. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Building is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, and how to navigate the user interface.

1

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Building is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

What is Autodesk Revit Building?
The Revit Building platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Building model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Building collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Building parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Building provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Building: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Building coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Autodesk Revit Building keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Building immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Building uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Building uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum. This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Building elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Building. Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings. Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce your documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together. In Revit Building, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Autodesk Revit Building terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Building are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Building, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Building. The first term you need to know is "project." In Revit Building, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design,

2 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Building makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Another important term to understand is "level". Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

When creating your project, you add Revit Building parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Building classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements. A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model. Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Most families are component family files, which means you can load them into your project and create them from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Other families are called system families. These families, which include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Revit Building predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects. Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Understanding the Basics | 3

Autodesk Revit Building terms

Navigating the Revit Building User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Building is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Building window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Building uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Building is much easier. In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

4 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

The Title Bar
2 Place your cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template that the project is based on.

The Menu Bar
3 On the View menu, click Zoom.

The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File, Edit, and View. You can choose commands by placing the cursor over the menu name and clicking. You then click the command name to run the command. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. TIP For example, the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit is ZX. While working in the drawing area, you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected.

The Toolbar
4 On the Window menu, click Toolbar.

There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar.

The Options Bar
5 On the Modelling menu, click Wall. Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options.

Understanding the Basics | 5

The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. 6 On the Modelling menu, click Door. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. On the left side of the Options Bar, notice a door type is specified.

The Type Selector
7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors.

The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. If you select the Door tool, the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

8 On the Modelling menu, click Wall.

6 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

9 In the Type Selector, notice the list of walls that are available. You use the Type Selector in two ways. First, you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. For example, if you intend to add a door, the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Within the drawing area, you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector.

The Design Bar
10 On the Window menu, click Design Bars. The Show Design Bars dialog box is displayed.

The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface, immediately below the Type Selector. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar, containing buttons grouped by function. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog box. 11 Click OK. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu.
■ ■ ■ ■

Basics tab—includes commands for creating most basic building model components. View tab—commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab—all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab—commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab—commands for creating rendered 3D images Site tab—commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab—commands for executing conceptual massing commands Area Analysis tab—commands for making area schemes and plans Structural tab—commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab—includes commands for creating construction industry information

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

To access the commands within a tab, click the tab, and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu.

Understanding the Basics | 7

The Project Browser
12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. In the Project Browser, select Views (all).

You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views, schedules, sheets, reports, families, and groups of your current project. You can right-click in the browser to add, delete, and rename views, families, and groups. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans, elevations, 3D), family category (doors, walls, windows), and group name. You can expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. To open a view, double-click the name. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area, making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. The browser is also dockable, so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. 13 In the Type Selector, scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser.

8 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts

14 On the Settings menu, click Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. After you create a browser organization scheme, you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog box, click Cancel.

The Status Bar
16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. 17 Place your cursor near the center of the drawing area. Do not click.

Understanding the Basics | 9

20 Press TAB. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. It highlights when the cursor is over it. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Building Help window. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. In this case. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. click . use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. Windows: From any window. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. in conjunction with Tooltips. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. click Autodesk Revit Help. find a keyword on the Index tab. Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. 10 | Chapter 1 Understanding the Concepts . search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. In the Status Bar. click Modify. Autodesk Revit Building Help 21 On the Help menu. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab.In the bottom left corner of the window. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Building session. You can also press SHIFT+F1. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. You can use this tri-pane. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. When you place the cursor over a component. If there is no Help button displayed. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. The Status Bar also provides information. 18 On the Design Bar. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. You can select a topic on the Contents tab." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol. regarding selected components within a view. Click the Help button. There are several tools that help you find information.

If you have not already done so. and a roof . Understanding the Concepts. stairs. floors. the design process might differ in a real-world scenario. you can normally use various means to accomplish identical tasks. this tutorial uses a diversity of methods whenever possible. all views and schedules instantly update.including all windows. doors. and then add the passageway between them. While creating your first building information model. As you make design changes throughout this tutorial.Creating Your First Building Model 2 This tutorial is designed to familiarize you with the basic concepts and methods of creating a building model using Autodesk Revit Building. This tutorial is designed to teach concepts as well as methods. you learn about the Revit Building parametric capabilities and ease of use. For learning purposes. you create the shell of the west wing . 11 . review the tutorial. before proceeding further. and fundamental concepts before creating your first building model. For training purposes. You should understand the user interface. The building model you create consists of an east wing and a west wing joined by a curtain wall passageway. common terms.mirror it to create the east wing. Because the design process in Revit Building is extremely flexible. Therefore.

click Level. you render the model and document the project by adding schedules and views to sheets. When you create walls. Open m_First_Project. Creating and Modifying the Exterior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. Using the mirror tool. modify. you create a new wall type with multiple wall sweeps and reveals. Minor modifications have been made for training purposes. Finally. expand Views (all). As you design the walls. In this exercise. Add new levels 1 In the Project Browser. You then sketch the exterior and interior walls of the west wing. and a roof. expand Elevations. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. you begin with a project file based on a simple template to which you add several new levels.rvt located in the Metric folder. ceilings. you create.Creating Your First Building Model In this lesson. at a later time. you sketch the exterior walls of the west wing. After adding dimensions. Notice that Level 1 and Level 2 are already defined. and then add the passageway between them. and apply new wall types. you can. and double-click North. you add and modify doors and windows. After sketching the walls. you define the levels first so that you can set the top constraint when you first create the walls. NOTE The dataset for this tutorial was created using the default template. stairs. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. You can add and modify levels at any time during the design process. reassign the top constraint to a specific level. you can assign the wall height to a level or a specific value. you use the west wing to create the east wing. You then apply the new wall type to the existing walls. You then add sketched components such as floors. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you sketch the walls with the top constraint specifying a height. 12 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click the Training Files icon.

5 Click Level 2 to create level 3 at the designated offset above it. When you select Level 4. this indicates that you can select and edit the values. provided those datums also have the 3D model extent control. 9 Click directly on the Level 4 text. When you click Modify. the datum is in model extent mode. the level name and height value displays with the color blue. ■ Select . ■ ■ Enter 4000 mm for Offset. This means that if you move the extents of one level line. In this view.3 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ 6 Click Level 3 to add Level 4. notice that a floor plan and ceiling plan have been created for Level 3. This means that if you drag the control to resize the datum extent. click Modify. 8 Select Level 4. This allows you to create a new level by picking an existing line and applying an offset. With the 3D designation. The left and right extents of the new level are aligned and locked to the levels below. This means that changes to the extents are applied only to the active view. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. it terminates the command in progress. notice the following: ■ There is a control titled 3D that displays at the ends of the datum. Verify that Make Plan View is selected 4 Move the cursor over Level 2 and notice the prospective new level displays above it. You can also use the ESC key to accomplish this. If you click the 3D control. it toggles to 2D. it changes the extent of that datum in all other parallel views. Creating Your First Building Model | 13 . the extents of the other level lines adopt the same change. In the Project Browser.

This process reduces the amount of repetitive work and ensures consistency between each wing. notice that the name of the Level 4 floor plan is changed to Roof. and a curtain glass passageway connecting the two wings. North. West. You can use the zoom tools located on the View menu. tool on the toolbar. double-click Level 1. a west wing. you could begin the model by simply sketching the exterior walls and then continuing the design process from that point.TIP You may need to zoom in to accomplish this. Sketch the exterior walls 13 This building model consists of an east wing. you create the exterior walls of only the west wing. 12 In the Project Browser. TIP The Level 4 ceiling plan view has also been renamed to Roof. and South elevation views. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and then designing the passageway to connect the two. However. mirroring it to create the east wing. 14 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Theoretically. because the east wing is a mirror image of the west wing. which define the East. In this view. there are four elevation symbols. you can take advantage of the parametric capabilities of Revit Building by designing the majority of the west wing. the floor plan would resemble the following illustration. use the wheel on your mouse. 11 Click Yes to rename corresponding views. or scroll the 10 Enter Roof and press ENTER. In the steps that follow. In such a case. right-click in the drawing area and use the zoom tools on the context menu.

do not turn on the far clip planes at this time. You can activate the far clip plane in the element properties dialog box of each respective view. This means that each view is infinite. Creating Your First Building Model | 15 . you use this command to modify the view. West. Make sure you click the arrow and not the round part of the symbol. 16 In the drawing area. and South elevation views are inactive. select Basic Wall: Exterior . A solid line with two drag handles displays on the West elevation symbol. NOTE The far clip plane for the East. The drag handles control the left and right clip planes of the elevation view. Do not click the symbol. click the Elevation: West symbol. TIP You can turn off the visibility of the elevation symbols by using the Visibility/Graphics command found on the View menu. North. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Later in this tutorial. The name of the elevation view is displayed in a tooltip or in the status bar at the bottom of the drawing window.15 Move the cursor over the left elevation symbol and then over the elevation arrow. 18 In the Type Selector. click Wall. For training purposes.Brick on CMU.

click Modify. you can flip the wall orientation. TIP If necessary. Click the arrows a second time to return the exterior face to the outside of the rectangle. and click to complete the rectangle. Move the cursor down and to the right until the rectangle is 12. select the four walls by dragging a selection box around them. Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line.000 mm long. and use the directional arrows on your keyboard to move them into position as shown above. Also notice the dimension that displays. make sure you sketch the rectangle just to the right of the west elevation symbol. 24 On the View toolbar. You can click the temporary dimension value and modify it. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . ■ 20 Sketch the rectangle by clicking the upper left corner to specify the rectangle starting point. Because the west wing is later mirrored to the right. The selected wall is red. Temporary dimensions are primarily sketching aids.000 mm wide and 24. . as shown. you can control the default witness line location for temporary dimensions and save the settings to the project. By clicking the arrows. 22 Select the left. This is a temporary dimension. vertical wall of the rectangle. and flip arrows display on the exterior face of the wall. TIP From the Settings ➤ Temporary Dimensions menu. 16 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . specify the following options: ■ ■ Specify Roof for Height. Select the drawing tool.19 In the Options Bar. 23 Click the arrows once to set the exterior face of the wall on the inside of the rectangle.

You do not need to enter 12000 mm. you can use these handles to modify the height or depth of the wall. notice the shape handles (arrows) on top and bottom of the wall. TIP When entering a value. Notice that temporary dimensions also display in 3D views. 26 Drag the wall to the right as shown and release the mouse button when the width of the rectangle is approximately double the original size.25 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right. In addition. For example. you do not need to type the metric suffix. Creating Your First Building Model | 17 . 27 Click the temporary dimension value and reset the rectangle width to 12000 mm. The blue dots at the base of the wall are drag handles that allow you to modify the length of the wall. you can enter 12000 and press ENTER.

Notice that the brick surface pattern becomes solid fill after you zoom to fit. enter ZF. click Modify. The brick surface pattern displays. 32 On the keyboard. and click Hidden Line. click the Model Graphics Style control. When a surface pattern becomes too dense. 31 On the View Control Bar located at the bottom-left corner of the frame. it is displayed as solid fill. Notice the wall remains selected. and click Shading with Edges. This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. 33 On the View Control Bar. including the brick surface pattern displays. 18 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice the material settings. as shown. click the Model Graphics Style control.28 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area and. click Zoom in Region. 30 On the Design Bar. 29 Draw a region around the corner.

modify it. you should click Duplicate to create a new component type. If you change an instance parameter. it has no effect on components that are not selected. However. and then apply it to the remaining walls. only the wall that you selected would change. which control all components of the same type. you can see the list of type parameters. you add horizontal sweeps of soldier course brick to the wall structure. If your intent is to modify only the structure of the selected component. Creating Your First Building Model | 19 . which control the selected component or components. 35 On the Options Bar. you create a new wall type. To accomplish this. any changes made to the type parameters would be applied to all components of the same type. if you changed the Top Offset of the wall. For example. click . You could then make changes to the wall structure as needed. you cannot modify them within this dialog box. if you wanted to modify the wall structure. The Element Properties dialog box displays the parameters of the selected component. For example. In the upper half of the dialog box. The lower half of the dialog box contains the instance parameters. You can then make changes to the type parameters without inadvertently modifying the components of the original type.Create and apply new wall type 34 Select the 24000 mm wall on the right as shown. you would click Edit/New to access the type parameters. Although you can scroll through the list of type parameters. In the steps that follow.

36 In the Element Properties dialog box. Exterior . You can specify the sample height to any value you want. but you should specify a value high enough to allow you to create the desired wall structure. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. 41 In the lower left corner of the Edit Assembly dialog box. The sample height does not determine the height of any walls in the project. click Edit/New. under the Value column for Structure. 38 In the Name dialog box. 20 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 40 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. enter the new wall name. click Preview. Therefore. you must create a new wall type before altering the wall structure. click Edit. and click OK. click Duplicate.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. For training purposes. The sample height is the height of the wall in the preview pane. enter 13500 for Sample Height. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. the original wall type must remain unchanged.

under Name.Brick Soldier Course. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. click Sweeps. Notice the vertical structure tools are now active. 43 Under Modify Vertical Structure. This is because the preview is displaying a plan view. Make sure the offset is a negative number. select Masonry .Notice that the vertical structure tools are inactive. Click inside the Material field. When you select a layer. select layer 9. the corresponding layer is highlighted in the preview area. and click OK. select Section: Modify type attributes. ■ ■ ■ ■ 46 Click OK. In the Materials dialog box. 42 Under the preview pane. 49 Under Layers.0 mm for Offset. 48 Draw a region around the soldier course. 44 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. This should be the interior finish layer. make the following modifications: ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 47 Right-click in the preview area and click Zoom in Region from the context menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 21 . Verify that Base is selected for From. for View. click Add. Enter -50. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. 45 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box.

53 Click OK. under Modify Vertical Structure. 58 Click Add. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Select Masonry . click Add.Add a second sweep 50 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. 51 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box. 22 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . modify the settings as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Wall Sweep-Brick Soldier Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 56 Specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. Make sure it is a negative number. click Sweeps. Enter 4000 mm for Distance. 52 For the second wall sweep.Brick Soldier Course for Material. Verify that the Offset is zero. Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. and click OK. Verify that Base is selected for From. Select Flip. Add reveals 54 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Add. click Reveals. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. 57 Click Apply. Enter -50 mm for Offset. 55 In the Reveals dialog box. Verify that Base is selected for From.

Verify that the Offset is zero. click OK. 65 On the View menu. 63 In the Element Properties dialog box. 60 Click OK. 66 On the View toolbar. Notice some of the line weights in this view are rather heavy. Creating Your First Building Model | 23 . Verify that Exterior is selected for Side. Verify that Base is selected for From. Select Flip. click OK. Enter 8000 mm for Distance. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and draw a zoom region around the corner that includes one of the sweeps and a reveal.59 Specify the parameters for the second reveal: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select M_Reveal-Brick Course: 2 Bricks for Profile. 62 In the Type Properties dialog box. 64 On the Design Bar. click . This can be affected by the view scale for this particular view. click OK. click Modify. You can also use the thin lines tool to temporarily apply thin lines globally to all views.

This is the shortcut key for Zoom to Fit. click Save As. after the new wall type is applied. 72 On the Design Bar.Notice thin lines are applied to all the linework in this view. Also notice the button remains activated. choose Basic Wall: Exterior . 69 On the View toolbar. 67 On the View Control Bar.rvt. 71 In the Type Selector. 70 Select the three walls that are still the original wall type. click . 75 Proceed to the next exercise.Brick on CMU with Soldier Course. click the Model Graphics Style control. This indicates that thin lines will continue to be applied globally to the project. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing. click Modify. Exterior . the corners of the sweeps and reveals wrap automatically. Notice that. Adding the Interior Walls of the West Wing In this exercise. When finished. and click Save. 73 On the File menu. This turns off thin lines globally. 24 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you add the interior walls of the west wing. 74 Navigate to your preferred directory. and click Shading with Edges. 68 Enter ZF.Brick on CMU. TIP To select multiple components. press and hold the CTRL key while you select each component. They do not have sweeps or reveals. the interior walls resemble the following illustration. name the file m_First_Project-in_progress.

under Floor Plans. Creating Your First Building Model | 25 .rvt. specify the following: ■ ■ Verify that Level 2 is selected for Height. under Views (all). 6 Move the cursor down. place the cursor over the north wall.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.135mm Partition (2-hr). Select the Line sketching tool. double-click Level 1. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. select Basic Wall: Interior . Verify that Wall Centerline is selected for Loc Line. 3 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Options Bar. ■ 5 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Wall. and click. Sketch the main corridor 1 In the Project Browser. . m_First_Project-in_progress. 5000 mm from the centerline of the west exterior wall.

Draw a crossing pick from the upper-right to the lower-left that crosses both interior walls. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you zoom into the model.7 Move the cursor over the north exterior wall and 2500 mm to the right of the wall you added in the previous step. 8 Move the cursor down. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . TIP The temporary dimension snap values are dependent on your zoom settings. Click to specify the wall start point. 10 Select both interior walls using one of the following three methods: ■ ■ Select one of the interior walls. the snap values decrease. and select the second interior wall. and click when it intersects the centerline of the south exterior wall. ■ Draw a pick box from the upper-left to lower-right that includes both interior walls in their entirety. click Modify. press and hold CTRL.

click Wall. select Options. click Activate Dimensions. specify the selection color. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. TIP You can change the selection color by modifying the system settings. 11 On the Options Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior . Notice that temporary dimensions do not display automatically when multiple components are selected.79mm Partition (1-hr). 15 In the Type Selector. 12 Using the following illustration as a guide. and enter 4750 mm. click a temporary dimension value. This places both interior walls 4750 mm from the centerline of the closest exterior wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 27 . Add remaining interior walls 14 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. they display as red. Each wall should be 4800 mm from the previous wall. The temporary dimensions are displayed for both walls. click the Graphics tab. as shown. and under Colors. click Modify.After the walls are selected. On the Settings menu. 16 Add four horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the left exterior wall to the centerline of the left wall of the corridor. This allows you to analyze their location in relationship to each other and modify the location of both walls at the same time.

If necessary.17 Add five horizontal interior walls stretching from the centerline of the right wall of the corridor to the centerline of the right exterior wall. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . The dimension lines have been provided for training purposes. Use the dimensions shown in the following illustration when adding the walls. Dimension lines have been added for training purposes. as shown. modify temporary dimension values to obtain exact placement. 18 Add the final four interior walls in each corner of the right side of the building model.

This places the view in thin lines mode.Use split tool to modify walls 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When you are finished splitting the walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 29 . As you move the cursor over the wall. 24 Click to split the wall. click Modify. 21 Sketch a zoom region around the upper-right quadrant of the building model. This line represents where the underlying object is to be split. The cursor displays as a cutting tool. click Modify. and you can now split walls and lines. NOTE If the Tools toolbar is not available. click the tool a second time to turn thin lines mode off. there is no immediate and obvious indication of the split location. After splitting the wall. a thin line appears at the tip of the cursor. 23 In the drawing area. In the above illustration and callout. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This is the shortcut key for Zoom in Region. 20 Enter ZR. TIP If the lines within the floor plan display too thick. click . 22 On the Tools toolbar. place the cursor over the intersection of the right wall of the corridor and the short horizontal wall that intersects it as shown. you can activate it by opening the Windows menu and clicking Toolbar  ➤ Tools. you can click on the View toolbar. notice the exact placement of the cursor and the location of the proposed wall split.

and delete the segment.26 Select the short wall segment that you split from the right wall of the corridor. click . 28 Using the same techniques learned in previous steps. split the right corridor wall. 27 On the Standard toolbar. zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 30 Enter ZF. 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This is the shortcut key for Zoom To Fit. click Modify.

33 Using the following illustration as a guide. select Delete Inner Segment. 32 On the Options Bar. 37 Press and hold SHIFT and spin the building model by dragging one of the corners in any direction.There are two remaining splits to make. click . the inner segment is deleted automatically. NOTE Arrows have been added at the location of the two splits. click . Zoom in as necessary. click 36 On the View toolbar. Notice the interior walls that you added and split. . After the second split. This tool allow you to spin the model in any direction. split the right wall of the corridor at the intersection of the two center horizontal interior walls. 34 Press ESC to end the Split command. 31 On the Tools toolbar. 35 On the View toolbar. Creating Your First Building Model | 31 .

select Individual References. click Save. m_First_Project-in_progress. If the geometry referenced by a permanent dimension is not selected for modification. 32 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . You begin by adding a simple dimension between two walls. the dimension value is displayed at its true size and is not selectable for modification. it opens automatically in the Project Browser. Add a dimension line between two walls 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. When you duplicate a view. 5 On the Options Bar.38 On the File menu. Create and rename copy of Level 1 1 In the Project Browser. Dimensioning the Building Model. right-click Level 1. In that case. enter Level 1 . This is the aligned dimension option. options. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. The floor plan. Dimensioning the Building Model In this exercise. you add a multi-segmented dimension string to modify the witness lines. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. right-click Copy of Level 1. and click Duplicate. select Linear Dimension Style: Diagonal . In the final section of this exercise. ■ ■ For Prefer. click Rename. and in the context menu. You create a dimension by selecting the dimension type. When geometry is selected for modification. under Views (all). and click OK. under Floor Plans. the dimension value displays in blue and can be modified directly by clicking the value. For Pick. 2 In the Project Browser. and components that require dimensioning. select Wall centerlines.5mm Arial.rvt. under Floor Plans. should be open. Level 1 .2.Dimensioned and Annotated. you constrain the building model using equality and locking constraints. A permanent dimension is considered modifiable when one or more of the components that it references is selected for modification. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. 6 In the Type Selector. you add dimension lines to the building model.Dimensioned and Annotated. both permanent dimensions and temporary dimensions display. click Dimension. ready for modification. specify the following dimension parameters: ■ Click . Permanent dimensions can appear in two different states: modifiable and non-modifiable. Next. The dimension styles available in the Type Selector are dependent on the type of dimension selected on the Options Bar.

Click in the empty space of the drawing area to place the dimension line. click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar.7 In the drawing area. click to select it. 8 Move the cursor over the right exterior wall as shown. click to select it. Creating Your First Building Model | 33 . When a dashed line displays on the wall centerline. move the cursor over the left exterior wall as shown. 9 Move the cursor just above the north wall. When a dashed line is displayed on the wall centerline.

change it to 15000. the dimension value displays as modifiable. or in the status bar of the drawing window. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 17 Click the temporary dimension value. 16 Click the permanent dimension value. and a blue padlock displays. change it to 4750. Click the control a second time and the witness line moves to the exterior face. 15 Select the vertical exterior wall on the left. and press ENTER. Notice that the dimension value is not blue. Notice that the dimension line and value displays as red. on each witness line. and press ENTER. Click it a third time to return the witness line to the wall centerline. Notice that a temporary dimension also displays. and draw a zoom region around the north exterior wall and dimension line. This means you can modify the value by clicking it. the value is not available for modification. This behavior is similar to the witness line control on temporary dimensions. 14 Click the control once and the witness line moves to the interior face of the wall. The control at the bottom of each witness line controls the gap between the end of the witness line and the component it references. In its current state. Notice the dimension value turns blue. 12 Select the dimension line. These controls allow you to modify and constrain the dimension.11 Enter the keyboard shortcut ZR for Zoom In Region. This is one of the ways in which a permanent dimension differs from a temporary dimension. indicating that the control moves the witness line. Controls display on the value. When you select a component referenced by a dimension witness line. 13 Place the cursor over the blue control in the center of the left witness line. Information is displayed in a tooltip. Notice the selected wall moved to the left.

vertical. and click to place the dimension as shown. select Intersecting Walls.18 Place the cursor over the dimension symbol located beneath the temporary dimension value. 23 Select the left. click Modify. Creating Your First Building Model | 35 . In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. and click OK. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Entire Walls. zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Add a multi-segmented dimension 20 Using one of the zoom methods learned previously. 21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. exterior wall. move the cursor to the left. Click Options. select Wall centerlines. For Pick. Click the symbol to make the temporary dimension permanent. click Dimension.

NOTE Make sure you right-click the blue control and not the dimension line. Modify witness lines 25 Select the multi-segmented dimension you added in the previous steps. click Modify. 26 Using the following illustration as a guide.24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Delete Witness Line. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . right-click the blue control on the witness line second from the top.

28 Select the centerline of the interior wall where you previously deleted the witness line. it provides a different set of options on the context menu.27 Right-click the dimension line. and in the context menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 37 . click Edit Witness Lines. WARNING Do not right-click a witness line.

NOTE There are two alternative ways of ending the dimension edit process: You can click Modify on the Design Bar. Create constraints 30 Select the second interior wall from the top to the left of the corridor.29 After selecting the wall. click in the empty space of the drawing area to complete the editing process. or press ESC on the keyboard. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

31 Drag the wall downward until the distance between it and the wall below it is approximately 2400 mm. Creating Your First Building Model | 39 .Notice that the dimension values become modifiable on each side of the witness line that refers to the selected wall.

if you move one component. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This dimension does not need to be precise. Lock symbols offer the opportunity to constrain the building model by locking a dimension value or an alignment. 36 Click the lock symbol on the 2400 mm segment to remove the constraint between the two walls. the other moves with it and maintains the locked dimension value. Notice that the dimension value for the locked segment remains unchanged as you move the wall.32 Select the multi-segmented dimension line. 34 Select the same wall you moved previously and drag it upward approximately 1200 mm as shown. The relationship between these components is constrained. 33 Click the lock on the 2400 mm segment of the dimension. You can turn the lock on and off by clicking the lock symbol. Notice a lock displays for each segment. 35 Select the multi-segmented dimension.

You then add windows and use the mirror and array tools to save time and ensure consistency. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating Your First Building Model | 41 . 41 On the File menu. Notice that each segment is now equally spaced and the dimension values display EQ. 40 In the Project Browser. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Doors and Windows In this exercise. You begin by adding single flush doors. select Value for Equality Display. you load multiple new door types and add them to the building model.Notice an EQ symbol displays with a slash through it. and click OK. you add doors and windows to the building model. Adding Doors and Windows. 37 Click the equality constraint to activate it. This is an equality constraint that makes all dimension segments equal. under Other. Notice that each segment displays an equal value. double-click Level 1. Next. select Save. click . 38 On the Options Bar. In the final section of the exercise. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. you use the Paste Aligned tool to copy the Level 1 windows to Levels 2 and 3.

2 In the Type Selector. A door symbol displays when the cursor is over the wall. place the cursor over the right corridor for the room shown in the following illustration. In addition. m_First_Project-in_progress. Add single flush doors to the building model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Approach the same corridor wall from inside the room. You can offset the door from the level. however. Do not click at this time. Doors are wall-hosted families and can only be added to a wall.rvt. the door resides on a level line. This is most evident when you add a door in an elevation or 3D view. 3 In the north side of the building model. click Door. you can flip the door opening immediately after placing it.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Regardless of the initial placement. This is the mechanical room. the initial opening is based on the wall face from which the cursor approaches. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. doors snap automatically to the closest available level. When you add a door. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

When you are finished. specify a value of 600 mm. return the door to the position shown in the following illustration.5 Press the Spacebar once to flip the door hand. Notice the blue controls that display. Creating Your First Building Model | 43 . 9 Add an additional door of the same type to the small room above door number 1 as shown. 6 Click to add the door with the opening inside the room. These control the door opening direction and the hand of the door (left or right). 7 Click each control to familiarize yourself with how the door controls work. The precise dimensions are not important. and modify temporary dimensions as shown. use the flip controls to adjust the opening. Do not be concerned with exact placement. 8 Click the temporary dimension value between the door centerline and the lower horizontal wall. and press ENTER. After you add door number 2. Press the Spacebar a second time. You can use this to flip from left to right hand opening.

17 Press and hold CTRL. Flip the door.10 Zoom in to the bottom right corner of the building model and add a door of the same type to the room as shown.rfa extension. and select M_Double-Flush. 16 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Doors folder. as shown. click Modify. 12 Enter the keyboard shortcut. All Revit Building families have an .rfa. click Training Files. Notice that a preview image of the selected door displays in the upper right corner of the dialog box. to zoom to fit. and set the temporary dimensions. 14 On the Options Bar.rfa. 15 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Load and apply new door types 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 11 On the Design Bar. click Load. and select M_Double-Glass 2. ZF. click Door.

20 In the Type Selector. add a door to each of the five rooms to the left of the corridor. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm. Each door should open into the room. a preview image does not display. 18 Press and hold CTRL. 21 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. These door families are now available in the Type Selector drop-down list.You can load multiple families at the same time. Creating Your First Building Model | 45 . When more than one family is selected. The distance between the door centerline and nearest wall centerline should be 600mm. TIP Zoom in and out as necessary. 19 Click Open to load all three door families into the project. select M_Single-Flush Vision: 0864 x 2032mm. and select M_Single-Flush Vision.rfa. 22 In the Type Selector. as shown.

26 In the Type Selector. This is door number 14 in the following illustration. 25 Add the final M_Single-Flush Vision: 0915 x 2134mm door in the center of the building model and to the right of the corridor as shown. 24 Zoom in around the lower-right corner of the building model and add doors 11 and 12 as shown. The arrow has been added for training purposes. This is door number 13 in the following illustration. 27 Add a door to the right exterior wall opposite of door number 1.23 Zoom in around the upper-right corner of the building model and add doors 9 and 10 as shown. select M_Double-Flush: 1730 x 2134mm. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

If your view displays solid fill. 30 On the View menu. double-click North. zoom in until the brick pattern displays. 32 Expand the Walls category. under Views (all). NOTE The display of a surface pattern is zoom dependent. select Visibility/Graphics. Creating Your First Building Model | 47 . 29 Zoom around the building model and level heads. under Elevations. it would be easier if the visibility of the wall surface pattern was turned off. and scroll down to Walls. and clear Surface Pattern.Add a door in elevation view 28 In the Project Browser. Notice that the brick surface pattern displays as you zoom into this view. Although there is no technical reason you cannot add a door in this view. 31 Click the Model Categories tab.

double-click Level 1. Tag a door in plan view 38 In the Project Browser. it has two basic requirements: it must be hosted by a wall and it must be associated with a level. When adding a door. select M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm. You can apply an offset if required.33 Click OK. then Level 2. 34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the double doors on the north wall display without a tag. under Floor Plans. In this case. Changes to Visibility/Graphics are applied only to the open view. 37 Add a double-glass door centered on Level 1. and down to Level 1. as shown. click Door. NOTE The temporary dimensions refer to interior walls. the wall surface pattern will remain visible in all other views. Notice the door snaps to each level. 35 In the Type Selector. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 36 Move the cursor over the wall at Level 3.

TIP For each component type. 44 In the Type Selector. 45 Add the final door centered on the lower exterior wall. NOTE Because the default door tag was not designed to display in an elevation view. click Door. 40 On the Options Bar. 39 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 42 Zoom in to the lower exterior wall. click the double doors to add a tag. a tag did not display when you added the door in the North elevation view. the Type Selector and Options Bar remember the last settings used for that component. as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 49 . clear Leader. 43 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. This should be door number 15.Components are tagged in the view in which they are placed. 41 On the upper exterior wall. click Tag. verify that M_Double-Glass 2: 1830 x 2134mm is selected.

and notice the doors you added. under Floor Plans. click Window.46 On the Design Bar. click . double-click Level 1. Like doors. select M_Andersen 400 C35: C35. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 50 On the File menu. the window displays at the cursor. you can flip the window after placement. The window exterior is placed on the wall face closest to the cursor. 49 Spin the model. 54 In the Type Selector. As you move the cursor over a wall. Windows are wall-hosted components. click Save. click 48 On the View toolbar. 47 On the View toolbar. 52 Zoom in on the upper exterior wall. 53 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Add windows to the building model 51 In the Project Browser. . click Modify. just like doors.

You can load and assign tags that display the specific information you need in the format you prefer. In the family editor. and reload it into the project. and visibility. 58 On the View toolbar. In this project. 63 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Cancel. click . IMPORTANT  If necessary. The list of parameters can vary depending on the window family design. When you add a window in a plan view. 66 Add two C35 windows to the right of the exterior double door. 62 In the Element Properties dialog box. you can edit the family in place or open the window in the family editor. 59 Zoom around the window. 61 On the Options Bar. 57 On the Design Bar. click . the designer creates the instance and type parameters that control geometry. elevation. and 3D views. materials. click the temporary dimension value and specify the correct distance. 60 Make sure the distance between the window centerline and the left wall centerline is 1400 mm. go to Help. The designer can also create a window with few modifiable parameters.You can add windows in plan. Creating Your First Building Model | 51 . the window is using a type tag that displays the window type number rather than the window mark. click to place it as shown. If you want to modify a window in a specific way but an instance or type parameter is not available to accomplish the task. For more information on creating and loading annotation tags. click Modify. There should be a 1950 mm distance between the centerlines of the two windows. 55 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the left side of the upper exterior wall. 56 When the window displays at the tip of the cursor. click Window. Notice the list of instance parameters available for modification. 64 Add a window to the right of the existing window as shown. as shown. modify it. and select it. 65 Zoom out so you can see the right side of the upper exterior wall. the default head or sill height is used to set the initial height of the window.

you can pick or draw the mirror axis. 72 Place the cursor over the middle of the exterior face of the right exterior wall. click Mirror. press and hold CTRL. indicating that the midpoint of that component is ready to be selected. and make sure Copy is selected. the selected windows are to be mirrored across a horizontal axis residing on the midpoint of the east exterior wall. 69 Select one of the windows on the upper exterior wall. click to select it. You also have the option to mirror a copy rather than the selected component(s). Mirror the windows 68 Zoom out until the building model fits within the view.67 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . click Modify. 70 On the Edit menu. and click to set the mirror axis. The copy option is selected by default. and select the three remaining windows. A tooltip is displayed. When you mirror a component or components. 74 Move the cursor to the left. 71 On the Options Bar. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 73 When the triangular midpoint symbol displays on the exterior face of the wall. In this case.

at the dimensions shown. You tag the windows later in the exercise. 77 Add two windows to the left exterior wall. Creating Your First Building Model | 53 . Add and array windows 75 Zoom in to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. click Window.The windows are mirrored immediately after you specify the mirror axis. 76 On the Design Bar. Notice that the mirrored windows are not tagged.

81 On the Edit menu. Clear Group And Associate. you can use the array tool to finish the job. 82 On the Options Bar. Select Constrain. 79 Zoom out in the upper left corner so you can see the two rooms with doors 4 and 5. Rather than manually add the rest of the windows on the left exterior wall. and click to set the array start point. click Modify. Creating an array is a three-step process. 80 Select the two windows that you just added on the left exterior wall.78 On the Design Bar. 54 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . You then move the array to the second or last location. click Array. it is an ideal situation to use an array. select 2nd. For Move To. Enter 5 for Number. and click to set the array end point. Because all of the rooms on this side of the building model are equally spaced. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that is selected for a linear array. 83 Move the cursor over the intersection of the left exterior wall and the intersecting interior wall shown below. You first click a point to specify the array start point.

Notice the arrayed windows are not tagged. Because the rooms on the left side of the building model are of equal size. If you make a mistake placing the array. Creating Your First Building Model | 55 . and click the similar intersection shown below to set the array end point. add the final window to the right exterior wall and centered in the second room from the bottom. any misplacement has a multiplier effect as the array continues down the wall. 86 On the bottom-right side of the building model. as shown. click Window. undo the step and try again. NOTE It is extremely important to make sure the new array is centered between the walls of the next room.84 Move the cursor down until the arrayed window group is centered in the room below the starting point. Add remaining level 1 window 85 On the Design Bar.

56 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 92 In the 3D Drawing area. click . you can use the paste-align tool to accomplish the same goal significantly faster. and notice the windows you added. . Paste align windows to Levels 2 and 3 91 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. turn it off by clicking 88 On the View toolbar. click 89 On the View toolbar. click Modify. Rather than use the same methods to add similar windows to levels 2 and 3. 90 Spin the model.87 If you are still using Thin Lines mode. drag a selection box around the entire building model. on the View toolbar.

99 In the Project Browser. select Level 2. clear Tag on Placement. Don’t be concerned with precise placement or spacing between the windows and doors. 101 On the Options Bar. 96 On the Edit menu. the window snaps to the default sill height which displays as a green dashed line. The spacing will be modified in a later dataset. The spacing can be manipulated using some of the dimensioning tools you learned earlier. This leaves only the windows selected within the 3D view. and click OK. under Elevations. select Level 3. This is because the changes you made to the Visibility/Graphics of the North elevation view were applied only to that view. click Copy to Clipboard. 104 On the Design Bar. 95 On the Edit menu. notice the wall surface pattern displays. 103 In the Project Browser. 97 In the Select Levels dialog box. In this view. such as equality constraints. clear walls and doors from the selection. click Window. 102 Add a C35 window in the center of Level 2 and Level 3 as shown below. 93 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 100 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that when you add a window in elevation view. double-click South. and click OK. under Elevations. After the windows are added to Level 2 and Level 3. click . click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. double-click North. click Window. Creating Your First Building Model | 57 . press and hold CTRL. 98 On the Design Bar. notice that windows need to be added above the double doors on the north and south walls.This selects every component in the building model. 105 Add C35 windows to the center of Levels 2 and 3 as you did in the previous steps. 94 In the Filter dialog box.

Add a floor slab to Level 1 1 On the View toolbar. m_First_Project-in_progress. You can also select or draw lines. 109 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. click . In this exercise. You add a more complex floor type to levels 2 and 3. Like walls. click Save. double-click Level 1. the respective layers interact according to the functional assignment within the Edit Assembly dialog box. Notice that all the windows in the view are tagged. click 2 On the View toolbar. 107 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. and ceilings are examples of sketched components. When walls intersect a floor. 108 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. roof.rvt. you add floors and floor openings to the building model. 3 Spin the model and observe that floors are needed throughout the building model. where three openings are required for the stairs and elevators. you can select walls to define the border of the component. click Tag All Not Tagged. When sketching these components. or ceiling. Adding Floors and Floor Openings In this exercise. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . you begin by adding a floor slab Level 1. . 110 On the File menu. 111 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Floors and Floor Openings. roofs. select Window Tags. You also add elevators and plumbing components to the building model. under Floor Plans. each of these components can have a compound structure. Floors.106 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click OK. and all require their borders to be sketched.

the building model becomes unavailable for modification until you finish the floor sketch. 14 On the View toolbar. Notice the floor on Level 1 that extends to the exterior face of the walls. The Design Bar now has only one tab. clear Extend into wall (to core). 6 On the Design Bar.4 In the Project Browser. 12 Select Concrete . under Floor Plans. 11 On the Design Bar. you must either finish or quit in order to access other design modes. You are in sketch mode. 10 Select the three remaining exterior walls. Creating Your First Building Model | 59 . Sketch. A magenta line displays with flip arrows. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. 7 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 9 If the magenta line is not on the exterior face of the north exterior wall. 8 Click the upper exterior wall. click the flip arrows to flip the line. click Floor Properties. click Floor. When in sketch mode. In addition. click . You can click the flip arrows to move the floor boundary to either the interior or exterior face of a wall. verify that Pick Walls is selected. and click OK. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.300mm for Type.

press TAB. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice the location of the magenta line. 60 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . when it highlights under the cursor. The windows are not tagged because you did not add them within this view. When the chain of walls highlights. click Floor. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected.Add a floor to Level 2 15 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. the interior walls on Level 1 display as an underlay. You can use TAB to select a chain of walls or lines at any time. In this view. 19 Zoom in to the upper exterior wall. 17 On the Options Bar. click to select it. 18 Place the cursor over the upper exterior wall and. double-click Level 2.

A message displays asking if you want to join geometry and cut the overlapping volume out of the walls. indicating that they are not attached to the floor. you add elevators and plumbing components on Level 1. 23 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type. These elevators are wall-hosted components. Next. 22 On the Design Bar. the walls remain attached. 29 Spin the model and observe the new floor on Level 2. and click OK. 33 Add two elevators in the center room on the right side of the building model. 32 In the Type Selector. Creating Your First Building Model | 61 . 25 Click Yes to attach the wall tops to the floor. and click to place it. The interior walls of the building model are displayed in red. 21 Use the flip arrows to place the magenta line on the exterior face of the core. select M_Elevator Center: 2032mm x 1295mm. The line chain flips to each face of the core rather than the interior and exterior wall face. under Floor Plans. click 28 On the View toolbar. 31 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. A message displays asking if you want the walls that go up to this floor to attach to it. To do this. Add elevators and bathroom components 30 In the Project Browser. This occurs because the structural layers of the floor must cut through the interior finish layer of the wall in order to extend to the wall core. position the cursor on the wall. double-click Level 1. 26 Click Yes to join geometry and cut out the overlapping volume. 27 On the View toolbar. move the elevator into position. Attaching the walls ensures that if you change the floor elevation.20 Click the flip arrows. After you add these components. . click Component. click Floor Properties. as shown. 24 Click Finish Sketch. click . you paste-align the level 1 interior walls and components to level 2 before adding the level 3 floor.

34 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. as shown. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .TIP After adding the elevators. toggle the temporary dimension witness line to the interior face of the adjacent wall. 38 Add the sink to the center of the room. 36 On the Design Bar. click Component. and specify the dimension 1150 mm as shown above. 35 Zoom in to the upper right corner of the building model. select each one. select M_Pedestal Sink-3D: Pedestal Sink. 37 In the Type Selector.

Creating Your First Building Model | 63 . 43 Move the cursor 90 degrees to the left and click to set the rotation end point. In this case. 41 On the Edit menu. you can type the wall length and press Enter rather than setting the wall end point. when you sketch a wall. For example. The component will rotate to the value. When rotating. Listening dimensions react to cursor movements and keyboard entries. when rotating the component. The first click specifies the rotation start point. TIP Although you can manually rotate the component. an angular value displays that responds to keyboard entries. click Rotate. you can use the listening dimension to accurately rotate the component. 40 Select the sink. the second click specifies the rotation end point.39 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Rotating an object requires two clicks. establish the direction of the rotation. 42 Place the cursor directly above the sink and click to set the rotation start point as shown. enter 90 on the keyboard and press Enter.

47 Add the toilet on the right wall. 46 In the Type Selector. as shown.44 Drag the sink until it snaps to the center of the left wall face. 48 Use the same procedure to add a toilet and sink in the similar room at the lower right corner of the building model. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select M_Toilet-Commercial-Wall-3D: 480mm Seat Height. click Component. 45 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. and components. doors. doors. clear Door Tags. and plumbing fixtures can be paste aligned to Levels 2 and 3. In addition. a message might be displayed stating that the new walls conflict with an existing insert. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 65 . 51 Draw a crossing pick box beginning inside the upper-right corner of the building model and extending to the inside of the lower-left corner. and click OK.) This captures all the internal walls. click . you must add the openings for the stairwells and the elevators. Depending on the exact placement of the windows you added in the north and south elevation views. and click Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 54 On the Edit menu. elevators. click Copy to Clipboard. 52 On the Options Bar. and click OK. (Do not include the exterior walls in the selection.Before adding the final floor. 53 In the Filter dialog box. Paste align interior walls 49 In an empty space within the drawing area. 56 Select Level 2. right-click. 55 On the Edit menu. the interior walls.

If you received this error. . 60 Check the lower exterior wall for the same problem and correct it. Ignore the warning and proceed with the next step. or ceiling in which you want the opening.These conflict warnings alert you to problems in your layout. If you know the source of the problem. it is often a good idea to create a view that makes the selection process more precise. under Floor Plans. 57 In the Project Browser. For more information regarding the warning. 58 If you received the conflict message. 61 On the View toolbar. Therefore. click 62 On the View toolbar. The message disappears once you click in the drawing area. it is most likely because the center window intersects the corridor wall on Levels 2 and 3. double-click Level 2. zoom in to the upper exterior wall and notice that the center window conflicts with the left wall of the corridor. you add floor openings to accommodate the elevators and stairs. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 59 Correct the problem by moving the window away from the corridor wall. click . In the steps that follow. When you add a model opening. You can drag the window or use the arrow keys on your keyboard to nudge the window to a location that does not conflict with the interior wall. 63 Spin the model so you can see the interior walls and components on level 2. you can click the controls on the side of the dialog box. roof. you can continue working and the warning dialog box closes automatically. if necessary. you are prompted to select the floor.

double-click Level 1. and click Zoom To Fit. as shown. 69 Click the flip arrows to change the direction of the view towards the interior. click to set the start point. The first click specifies the section head. 66 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 70 Using the shape handles. 67 Place the cursor over the upper right corner of the building model. Adding a section is a two-click process. under Floor Plans. drag the clip planes of the view so that you capture only the building model and set the depth just past the bathroom wall. 68 Click the section line. 65 Right-click in the empty space of the drawing area.Create a section view 64 In the Project Browser. click Section. move the cursor down and click just below the south exterior wall. After you add the section. Creating Your First Building Model | 67 . you can flip the view direction and modify the extents of the view. and the second click specifies the section tail.

when it highlights. This view offers easy accessibility to all floors as well as the stairwells on the left and right. select Pick a roof. 72 Double-click the section head. the referenced view opens. just as the level heads do in an elevation view. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 75 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. or ceiling and cut vertically. click Opening. Create a floor opening 73 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.71 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 74 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. Similarly. select it. The section head is displayed in blue. and click OK. floor. the section heads are linked directly to the view so when you double-click the section head.

the Go to View dialog box displays and offers you a selection of views to choose from. 76 In the Go to View dialog box. these constraints ensure that the opening adapts to any changes in the associated walls. and click Open View. When locked. click Lines. 77 Zoom around the stairwell in the lower right corner. Notice the locking constraints that display. In the following illustration. the sketch lines have been enhanced for training purposes.Because you must be in a view parallel to the screen in order to edit a sketch. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 79 On the Options Bar. 78 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 69 . 81 Click each of the four padlocks to lock them. select the rectangle drawing tool. 80 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell as shown below.

70 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 91 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the stairwell and lock the lines as shown. click Lines. floor. 88 Zoom to the stairwell in the upper right corner. Add a second opening 84 On the Design Bar. 86 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and when it highlights. 85 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 82 On the Design Bar. select it. click Opening. select Floor Plan: Level 2. and click Open View. 87 In the Go to View dialog box. or ceiling and cut vertically. double-click Section 1. The modification of the opening is done for you in a dataset used later in this tutorial. 92 Click Finish Sketch. 83 In the Project Browser. and click OK.NOTE Although the opening could account for the stair landings at this point. click Finish Sketch. under Sections (Building Section). 90 On the Options Bar. 89 On the Design Bar. select Pick a roof. it is often easier to add the stairs first and then modify the opening precisely to the location of the stairs. select the rectangle drawing tool.

94 On the Design Bar. select the rectangle drawing tool. double-click Section 1. and click Open View. select it. select Floor Plan: Level 2. Creating Your First Building Model | 71 . when it highlights. or ceiling and cut vertically. click Opening. click Lines. floor.Add an opening for the elevators 93 In the Project Browser. select Pick a roof. 99 On the Design Bar. 100 On the Options Bar. 97 In the Go to View dialog box. 96 Place the cursor over the level 2 floor and. under Sections (Building Section). 103 On the View toolbar. click 104 On the View toolbar. 101 Draw a rectangle that snaps to the interior wall faces of the elevator shaft and lock the lines as shown. 98 Zoom in to the elevators. and click OK. 95 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. . you paste align these openings rather than sketch them again. 105 Spin the model so that you can see the vertical penetrations on level 2. After adding a floor to Level 3. 102 Click Finish Sketch. You have completed the three openings required for this level. click .

under Sections (Building Sections). 119 On the Edit menu. and click OK. click to select it. 116 On the Options Bar. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 120 Select Level 3 and click OK. under Views (all). click . when the chain of walls highlights. verify that Extend into wall (to core) is selected. 109 On the Options Bar. and click Zoom To Fit. click Finish Sketch. clear everything except Floors (Floor opening cut). Copy floor openings to Level 3 114 In the Project Browser. double-click Section 1. Make sure you do not select Floors. press TAB. The floor type you assigned to Level 2 is used for Level 3. 117 In the Filter dialog box. double-click Level 3.Add a floor to Level 3 106 In the Project Browser. and. 115 Draw a pick box around Level 2 so that you capture the three openings you created previously. when the wall highlights under the cursor. 110 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls and. 107 Right-click. under Floor Plans. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 108 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 112 Click Yes to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor. click Floor. 113 Click Yes to join geometry and cut volume. 111 On the Design Bar. click Copy to Clipboard. 118 On the Edit menu.

and components to Level 3. 125 Draw a crossing pick box beginning just inside the upper right corner and extending to the lower left corner. 123 Right-click. under Views (all). Do not include the exterior walls. The only remaining task in this exercise is to paste-align the Level 2 interior walls. under Floor Plans. 124 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The vertical penetrations extend through Levels 2 and 3. click . doors. and click Zoom To Fit. Paste-align components to Level 3 122 In the Project Browser.121 On the View toolbar. Creating Your First Building Model | 73 . double-click Level 2. click Modify.

126 On the Options Bar. hold the SHIFT key down and select the component. 130 Select Level 3 and click OK. 133 Proceed to the next exercise. 132 On the File menu. clear Floors and Floors (Floor opening cut). 127 In the Filter dialog box. click Copy to Clipboard. Adding a Roof and Ceiling In this exercise. click . hold the CTRL key down and select it. If you accidently select a component that does not belong in the selection set. 128 On the Edit menu. you add a gable roof and ceiling to the west wing of the building model. click .TIP If you miss a component. Reposition one or both of the windows that may be intersecting the corridor wall. this removes it from the selection set. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. 131 On the View toolbar. and click OK. click OK and go to the Level 3 floor plan. click Save. NOTE If you receive a warning that a conflict exists with an insert. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 129 On the Edit menu. Adding a Roof and Ceiling.

click the flip arrows to move the lines outside of the exterior walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 75 . 4 On the Options Bar. clear Defines slope. Verify that Extend to wall core is clear.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 Select the left exterior wall so that the sketch line is left of the wall. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. select Defines slope. 7 On the Options Bar. Creating a footprint roof is very similar to creating a floor.rvt. Both are sketched components and require you to define the border of the component. 3 On the Design Bar. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. If the sketch lines are on the interior side of the exterior walls. 6 Select the right exterior wall so that the sketch line is right of the wall. double-click Roof. under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 8 Select the upper exterior wall and the lower exterior wall. Add a gable roof to the building model 1 In the Project Browser. m_First_Project-in_progress. click Pick Walls.

select Warm Roof .9 On the Design Bar.Timber for Type. and click OK. Notice the exterior walls are not connected to the roof. click 13 On the View toolbar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. click . 76 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 12 On the View toolbar. 16 Press TAB to preselect the chain of exterior walls. . 14 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 15 Move the cursor over the gable end wall until it is preselected. click Finish Roof.

Modify the roof 22 Select the roof. select Top. 21 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. for Top/Base. select Attach. click Modify. 19 On the Options Bar. for Attach Wall. Notice the drag handle on the roof ridge. 23 Drag the roof ridge control upward to a point where the pitch is approximately doubled. 20 Select the roof.17 Click to select the entire chain of exterior walls. The exterior walls attach to the roof. Creating Your First Building Model | 77 . The exterior wall chain displays as solid red.

TIP Although you can add a ceiling in a floor plan view. 29 In the Type Selector. 26 On the Edit menu. 25 On the Design Bar. click Ceiling. click inside the room to add a ceiling as shown. the ceiling is normally outside the view range and is not visible after you add it. click Undo Move. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 600mm grid. Notice the exterior walls adjust to the new roof pitch. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . under Views (all). you will use the auto ceiling method. you select a ceiling type from the Type Selector. 28 On the Modeling tab of the Design Bar. under Ceiling Plans. you can sketch the perimeter of a ceiling using the same pick and draw techniques learned when you added the floors and roof. There are two methods to create a ceiling: ■ Using Auto Ceiling. double-click Level 3.24 Release the drag handle at the new position. ■ In this case. Add a ceiling to Level 3 27 In the Project Browser. and then click inside highlighted rooms to add a ceiling. click Modify. 30 In the upper-left corner of the building model. This returns the roof to its original position. Using the sketch method.

Creating Your First Building Model | 79 . as shown. 32 In the Type Selector. 33 Click within the main corridor and each stairwell to add a ceiling in each. select Compound Ceiling: 600 x 1200mm grid.31 Add a ceiling of the same type in the remaining rooms on the left side of the corridor and in both bathrooms.

Adding Multi-Level Stairs. 37 In the drawing area. 80 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 41 On the File menu. click Properties. you modify the original stairwell to be a multistory stair and mirror a copy to the other stairwell. under Constraints. and click OK. enter 3900 mm for Height Offset From Level. click Save. 39 Right-click the ceiling over the elevator shaft on Level 3. click the Model Graphics Style control. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click the section head. select Compound Ceiling: Plain. Rather than repetitively creating the same stairs on each level and in each stairwell. you begin by creating a set of stairs from Level 1 to Level 2.34 In the Type Selector. click Modify. Adding Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. and select Shading with Edges. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. and from the context menu. 38 On the View Control Bar. 36 On the Design Bar. 35 Add a ceiling to the three remaining rooms on the right side of the corridor.

4 In the Type Selector. select Wide Lines. Creating Your First Building Model | 81 . click Lines. under Floor Plans. In the image below. the permanent dimension lines have been added as a training aid and the section line has been hidden temporarily. m_First_Project-in_progress. double-click Level 1. In the steps that follow. In order to sketch the stairs accurately. and use the temporary dimensions to specify the values shown in the following image.rvt. 5 Add the three lines as shown. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell in the lower right corner of the building model. you first add temporary model lines that provide an underlay to trace over. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you create a set of U-shaped stairs similar to those in the following illustration. Add stairs between Level 1 and 2 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Views (all).

By default. The dimensions have been predetermined. Click on the temporary dimension witness line control until it moves to the interior face of the wall. 7 Sketch the first half of the run by clicking on the bottom endpoint of the right vertical line. click Stairs. In the steps that follow. and then clicking the bottom endpoint of the same line. for example: 550 mm. not to the centerline.NOTE It is important to dimension the lines to the interior face of the walls. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and then clicking the top endpoint of the same line. You are in sketch mode. and then specify the value. the Run tool is active. you sketch the stair run and trace the run over the two vertical lines. 8 Sketch the second half of the run by clicking on the top endpoint of the left vertical line.

Creating Your First Building Model | 83 . 10 In the Railings Type dialog box. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. click Railings Type. and click OK. Specify railing type 9 On the Design Bar. select 900mm Pipe.The stair run is complete.

Notice that the model lines still display. 16 On the View Control Bar. 13 On the View Control Bar. and select Hide Object. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 15 Delete the three model lines. 12 Select the stairs. click the Hide/Isolate control. 14 Select the three model lines. and select Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. click the Hide/Isolate control. This makes the model lines more apparent.

20 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. under Views (all). 19 On the Options Bar. as needed. click Modify. 21 On the Design Bar. click . double-click Section 1. under Constraints. IMPORTANT Be careful not to select the railings. under Sections (Building Section). Modify stairs 18 Select the stairs. Use TAB or zoom in.17 In the Project Browser. Creating Your First Building Model | 85 . and click OK.

26 Place the cursor over the center of bottom edge of the Level 1 floor. When the midpoint symbol and tooltip displays. and click to set the mirror axis endpoint. 25 Enter the keyboard shortcut. 24 On the Options Bar. as shown.NOTE At this time. SM. The cursor now snaps only to midpoints. 23 On the Edit menu. 27 Move the cursor upward and perpendicular to the floor. click Mirror. click to specify the start point of the mirror axis. Copy west stairs to east stairwell 22 Select the stairs created in the previous steps. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . This is done in the next exercise using a new dataset. Do not select the railings. and select Copy. you could modify the floor openings to accommodate the stair landings. click .

click Close. Creating the East Wing and Passageway In this exercise. click 30 On the File menu. Creating Your First Building Model | 87 . NOTE Beginning with the next exercise. click Save. . click Modify. 29 On the View toolbar. a new dataset is supplied with the building model saved at this point. 31 On the File menu. you create the east wing of the building model by mirroring the west wing. It has been modified slightly for training purposes. Creating the East Wing and Passageway. You add a curtain wall passageway between the wings with a suspended walkway between each of the upper floors.28 On the Design Bar. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.

If necessary. 3 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). Open the m_First_Project-West_Wing. and double-click 3D Southwest Isometric. Additional 3D views were added.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .rvt file located in the Metric folder. expand 3D Views. Floor openings were modified to create stair landings. 4 Draw a pick box around the entire building model. click Ref Plane. Mirror the west wing 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Stair railings on Level 3 were added. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. You use this plane later as the mirror axis. The following modifications have been made: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wall inserts on the north and south walls were evenly spaced. click Open. zoom out before making the selection. This dataset is essentially the same dataset you saved at the end of the last exercise. NOTE It is important to capture every component within this building model. 2 Draw a vertical reference plane 12000 mm from the exterior face of the right exterior wall as shown.

6 Press and hold CTRL.The entire model displays as selected. under Floor Plans. Creating Your First Building Model | 89 . IMPORTANT Components selected in one view remain selected when you switch views. and select the section line to add it to the selection set. 8 On the Options Bar. click Mirror. double-click Level 1. click and verify that Copy is selected. 7 On the Edit menu. 9 Select the vertical reference plane you added previously. 5 In the Project Browser.

10 After the mirrored copy displays. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Edit menu. 14 On the View toolbar. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . select Roof for Height. If necessary. The new components are numbered sequentially. 16 Spin and zoom the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 11 If necessary.After you specify the mirror axis. click Wall. Notice that the new wing is a mirror image of the original. click . . double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. click 15 On the View toolbar. notice that a new section view exists in the Project Browser. click Delete. select Curtain Wall: Exterior Glazing. zoom out to see both wings of the building model. In addition. as shown. 21 Sketch the two curtain walls between the wings. Add the passageway walls between wings 17 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the reference plane. click Modify on the Design Bar. click the flip arrows to ensure the exterior face of the curtain wall is facing the outside. a progress bar displays on the status bar as the mirrored copy is generated.

click Split Walls and Lines.Split and delete exterior wall faces of each wing 22 On the View toolbar. zoom into the intersection and make sure you split the wall where it intersects the exterior face of the elevator shaft wall. 26 Using the same technique. 23 On the Tools menu. click . as shown below. 24 On the Options Bar. split the same exterior wall at the intersection of the exterior face of the wall hosting door 13 as shown. 25 Split the face of the exterior brick wall at the intersection with the curtain wall. select Delete Inner Segment. Creating Your First Building Model | 91 . When splitting the wall.

Notice the segment between the splits has been deleted. TIP If the split does not line up perfectly with the intersecting wall. verify that Delete Inner Segment is selected. click Split Walls and Lines. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 28 Zoom in to the intersection of the passageway and the exterior wall of the right wing.27 Enter ZF to Zoom to Fit. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Tools menu. you can use the Align tool to clean up the intersection.

to turn off thin lines mode. 32 On the Design Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 93 . Add a floor to the Level 1 passageway 36 Adjust your zoom settings until you can see the perimeter of the entire passageway. enter 150 for Offset. and clear Extend into wall (to core). click Modify. 35 In the Project Browser. click 34 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. click . double-click Level 1. 37 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 39 Select both curtain walls so that the floor offset is on the exterior side of each wall. split the face of the exterior brick wall at the similar intersections shown below. click Floor. Arrows refer to each split location. 38 On the Options Bar.31 Using the technique learned previously. 33 On the View toolbar.

In the following illustration. 46 On the Design Bar. 50 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Floor. 53 Sketch a rectangle with the vertical lines attached to the level 2 floor of each wing and each horizontal line 1500 mm from the inner face of the curtain wall. click Lines. click Lines. there are two general rules that must be applied: You must have a closed loop and there cannot be intersecting lines. the sketch line weight has been increased for training purposes. 42 Select the edge of the floor on both the west and east wings. notice the overlapping intersections that must be cleaned up before the sketch can be finished. 47 Select Concrete 300mm for Type. the sketch should be a single closed loop as shown. and click OK. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 45 Continue cleaning up the intersections using this method. and then select the center of the top horizontal line. NOTE In the following image. When finished.40 On the Design Bar. 51 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 2. click and Lock. The general rule is that you should click the section of the line that you wish to keep. 41 On the Options Bar. When sketching. 44 Select the center of the left vertical line. 43 On the Tools menu. In this case. . 48 Click Finish Sketch. click the rectangle drawing tool. dimensions have been added for training purposes. under Floor Plans. click Floor Properties. 52 On the Options Bar. click Trim/Extend. Add walkway to Level 2 49 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. 65 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click . If they do. 62 Draw two short lines to close the gap between the walkway and where it intersects each wing. 64 In the Element Properties dialog box. Add railings to Level 2 walkway 57 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. use the trim tool to make the sketch a single line. 63 On the Design Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. 61 On the Options Bar. Creating Your First Building Model | 95 . click Lines. 59 On the Options Bar. If necessary. TIP Make sure the line intersections do not overlap. click Railing. TIP When sketching. 58 On the Design Bar. as shown. zoom in when selecting the walkway edge to make sure the offset is correct. 60 Select the line at the top edge of the walkway so that the sketch line is offset inside the walkway. click and . 56 Click Finish Sketch. and click OK. 66 Select the railing. 55 Select Beam and Block 200mm for Type.54 On the Design Bar. click Railing Properties. you can use the SPACEBAR to toggle the offset. click Floor Properties. select 1100mm for Type.

as shown. click and Copy. You could create another railing on the other side of the walkway. 74 Double-click the section head you created in the previous step. 69 Enter SM. For the next mouse click. 72 Add a section view to the center of the passageway. and click to set the mirror axis. 75 In the section view. click Modify. 70 Click at the midpoint of the walkway for the mirror axis start point. TIP Press and hold CTRL while making multiple selections. move the cursor to the right. It should be noted that the reason both railings weren’t sketched at the same time is because a railing sketch has to be a single. however. click Section. only midpoints will be snapped to. 68 On the Options Bar. Add a new section view 71 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select both railings and the walkway on Level 2. it is faster to mirror it. and modify the direction and shape handles. click Mirror. continuous line.67 On the Edit menu. 73 On the Design Bar. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model .

82 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 84 Select each curtain wall so that the offset is outside the curtain wall as shown. check Defines slope. under Floor Plans. click Roof  ➤ Roof by Footprint. The only remaining task is to add a roof to the passageway. zoom in until you can see the railings and walkways. and click OK.76 On the Edit menu. adjust the view so you can see the entire passageway. If necessary. 77 On the Edit menu. 79 On the View toolbar. and verify that Overhang is 600 mm. Creating Your First Building Model | 97 . 83 On the Options Bar. select Level 3. click Paste Aligned  ➤ Select Levels by Name. click Copy to Clipboard. 78 In the Select Levels dialog box. double-click Roof. 81 Using the zoom commands. click . Add roof to passageway 80 In the Project Browser.

86 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. 89 Using the techniques you learned earlier. click Lines. 87 Sketch two vertical lines that intersect the horizontal lines. click Trim/Extend. 90 On the Design Bar. 88 On the Tools menu. click the center of each roof line to clean up each corner. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . clear Defines slope. as shown. 91 On the View toolbar. click .85 On the Design Bar. as shown. Exact dimensions are not important.

click Join/Unjoin Roof. Joining a roof is a two-click procedure. you select the edge of the passageway roof. 95 Click the outer edge of the main roof. For training purposes. Creating Your First Building Model | 99 . click the Model Graphics Style control. you click the edge of the roof that you want to join. Second. Join the roofs 92 On the View Control Bar. it is easier to demonstrate the roof joins in hidden line mode. you select the edge of the roof or wall that you want it joined to. and then the outer edge of the corresponding wing roof. In this case.Notice that the passageway roof needs to be joined to each wing. 94 Click the left edge of the passageway roof. and click Hidden Line. The two roofs are joined. First. 93 On the Tools menu.

and change the filtering so each level has a unique door schedule. click the Model Graphics Style control. you modify it to filter by level. Scheduling the Building Model In this exercise. and select Shading with Edges. Scheduling the Building Model. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. After creating the schedule.96 On the View toolbar. 101 On the File menu. 103 Proceed to the next exercise. rename each schedule. 98 On the Tools menu. 97 Spin the model so that you have access to the unjoined end of the passageway roof and the east wing roof. Finally. name the file First Project-Dual Wings-in progress.rvt 100 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 100 On the View Control Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. click . click Save As. and click Save. 102 Navigate to your preferred directory. 99 Join the passageway roof and the roof of the other wing using the same technique learned in the previous steps. click Join/Unjoin Roof. you create and modify a door schedule. The initial schedule contains all doors in the building model. you duplicate the schedule twice.

9 Move Hardware so that it is directly below Family and Type. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. select Doors for category. 5 Click Add Parameter. 8 Under Scheduled fields (in order). 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. add the following as scheduled fields: ■ ■ ■ Level Mark Cost Notice that there is not an available field for Hardware. 4 From the Available Fields list. and click OK. 7 Click OK. and click Add. Under Parameter Data. right-click on the Design Bar and click View. on the Fields tab. TIP You can also double-click an available field to add it to the scheduled fields. Select Other for Group parameter under. select Mark and click Move up until it displays at the top of the list. You can add custom fields and make them either type or instance parameters. enter Hardware for Name. TIP If the View tab is not visible. Select Instance. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. 10 Move Cost below Hardware. Creating Your First Building Model | 101 . Select Common for Discipline.Create a door schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. click Schedule/Quantities. Select Text for Type. select Project parameter. select Family and Type under Available Fields.

14 At the bottom of the tab. 24 Select Bold for Header text. 17 Under Fields. 12 Select Level for Sort by. 20 Select Right for Alignment. select Calculate totals. You can hide this field because you are sorting and grouping by level. select Grand totals and select Itemize every instance. 23 Click the Appearance tab. The door schedule displays. 25 Click OK. 18 Enter Door Type for Heading. select Hidden field. 16 Click the Formatting tab. Door Type will display as the column heading rather than Family and Type. select Level. 26 In the door schedule. On the schedule. select Header and select Footer. 15 Select Mark for Then by. 19 Under Fields. 22 Under Field formatting. the column is redundant. select Cost. Modifications to the schedule appearance display only when the schedule is added to a sheet. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . and under Field Formatting. select Family and Type. Therefore. 13 Under Sort by.11 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 21 Under Fields. select the column grip between Door Type and Hardware and move the grip to the right until the door types display in their entirety.

A message displays indicating that this change must be applied to all elements of the same type. any changes made to column size are not retained when the schedule is added to a sheet. right-click Door Schedule-Level 1. 32 In the Project Browser. 28 Click OK. Duplicate and filter door schedules 30 In the Project Browser. Modify the schedule 27 Click in the Cost field for door mark number 1. 29 Click in the Hardware field for door mark number 1. under Other. You now have a separate schedule for each level. under Schedules/Quantities. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 34 Repeat the process to rename the remaining copies to Door Schedule-Level 2 and Door Schedule-Level 3. enter Brass. specify Level equals Level 1 for Filter by. enter 500. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Creating Your First Building Model | 103 . 33 In the Rename View dialog box. under Schedules/Quantities. This is because for this door type. enter Door Schedule-Level 1. Because you created the hardware parameter as an instance parameter. 35 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. each schedule still lists all the doors for each level. expand Schedules/Quantities. and press ENTER. each door is allowed a different value. However. and click Rename. right-click Door Schedule. click Edit for the Filter value. and click Properties.TIP In this view. 31 Repeat the previous step to create a second copy of the door schedule. Cost is a type parameter. and click OK. and click Duplicate. right-click Door Schedule.

click . 41 On the File menu. After rendering. Enter Exterior Scene for Name. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Under Type. modify the settings. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. select Exterior. 40 In the Project Browser. 4 Click OK.38 In the Element Properties dialog box. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select New. 39 Repeat the previous four steps for Door Schedule Level 2 and Door Schedule Level 3. you create an exterior scene. double-click each door schedule. click OK. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice that the information is now filtered for each level. Rendering the Building Model In this exercise. and then render a 3D view using that scene. you capture the image and save it within the project. under Schedules/Quantities. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Settings. Create the exterior scene 1 On the View toolbar. Rendering the Building Model. Filter each schedule by their respective level. First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. click Save. 42 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt.

A color bar displays. G. and select Blurry Reflections and Blurry Transparency. under Scene Settings. 18 Drag a box around the building model as shown. 15 On the View toolbar. When the rendering process is complete. 16 Spin the building model until it resembles the following illustration. 8 In the Color Picker dialog box. select Solid Color. 11 In the Environment dialog box. click the Bars tab. Creating Your First Building Model | 105 . select Good for Quality. This is a white background color. The raytrace process begins and a progress bar displays on the status bar. under Background Color. 17 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 13 Under Raytrace Settings. click OK. This is the background color for the scene. click Region Raytrace. under Scene Settings. 12 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. and B settings. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. click . 9 Specify a value of 250 for the R. click Environment. 6 In the Environment dialog box. 10 Click OK. 14 Click OK.Specify scene settings 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. the building model should resemble the following illustration. 7 Click the color bar.

First Project-Dual Wings-in progress. This is the captured rendering from the previous steps. On the second sheet. click Display Model.rvt 106 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . click Capture Rendering. 23 Proceed to the final exercise.19 On the Design Bar. Documenting the Building Model In this exercise. and double-click {3D}. expand Renderings. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 21 In the Project Browser. you add a rendered view and an elevation view. 22 On the File menu. An expandable branch called Renderings is added to the Project Browser. Documenting the Building Model. click Save. 20 On the Design Bar. In the next exercise. You add a floor plan and schedule to the first sheet. you add this to a sheet. you add two sheets with titleblocks to the project.

The titleblocks that are listed are loaded into the project. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. The text is not selectable by design. click Load. The blue text is text that you can modify. 8 Select the titleblock and zoom in to the lower right corner. 7 Try to select the logo in the upper right corner. click OK to use the loaded titleblock. 9 Click Owner. You can create a titleblock family and load it into the project or navigate to it from this dialog box. 5 Click Cancel. click Metric Library. Creating Your First Building Model | 107 . click Sheet. The creator of this titleblock family did not want this text to be modifiable in the project environment. Notice that several titleblocks are installed with the software. You are prompted to select a titleblock. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 4 Double-click the Titleblocks folder. enter your name. and press ENTER.Add a sheet and titleblock to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Titleblocks are a family just like any other component.

the label displays As Indicated. Titleblock numbering is sequential and automatic. click Project Information. select Floor Plan: Level 1. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add a view to the titleblock 12 Zoom out until you can see the entire sheet. If you add views of different scales. and click OK. and click Add View to Sheet. The Scale is blank and is filled in when a view is added to the titleblock. 15 Move the cursor to the center of the titleblock and click. 14 In the Views dialog box. click Add View. 11 Enter First Building Model for Project Name. the next sheet and titleblock will be A102. In this case. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice that your name is displayed for Client Name.10 On the Settings menu. referring the reader to the view titles.

You can work on the building model within this view. However. Notice the elevation symbols display. The titleblock becomes an underlay and the view becomes active. 21 Right-click the view. 23 Select the view. Relocate the view title 22 Drag the view title under the view. 20 Under Visibility. Notice drag handles display on the ends of the view title. click Activate View. and on the context menu. click Deactivate View. click Modify. clear Elevations. 24 Adjust the view title length by dragging the shape handles under the extents of the view. 17 Right-click the view. and click OK.16 On the Design Bar. you activated the view specifically to turn off the elevation symbol visibility. 18 On the View menu. 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. and on the context menu. 25 Drag the view to the lower left corner of the titleblock as shown. Creating Your First Building Model | 109 .

110 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . Notice that the scale value has updated. 28 In the Project Browser. drag Door Schedule-Level 1 onto the upper right corner of the titleblock. under Schedules/Quantities. 27 Zoom out until the titleblock fits within the drawing area.26 Zoom in to the lower right corner.

30 Using the column drag handles. 31 Zoom out and move the schedule into the upper right corner of the titleblock.29 Zoom in to the top of the schedule. Creating Your First Building Model | 111 . adjust each column width so no text wrapping occurs.

35 In the Project Browser. Add various views to a second sheet 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. the schedule breaks in half. modify the location and width of the view titles. the Scale label displays As Indicated. You have completed your first building model. If necessary. click Sheet. 37 On the File menu. 34 In the Project Browser. click Close. drag North to the lower left corner of sheet A102. 112 | Chapter 2 Creating Your First Building Model . 36 On the File menu. notice the z symbol in the center edge.TIP When the schedule is selected. under Renderings. under Elevations (Building Elevations). If you click this. click OK to use the default titleblock. click Save. Because these two views have different view scales. You can adjust the lengths of each section after the break. drag {3D} to the upper right corner of the new titleblock. 33 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.

you modify the system environment.Modifying Project and System Settings 3 In this tutorial. 113 . In the second lesson. In the first lesson. you create an office template. you learn how to modify your Autodesk Revit Building working environment. which is independent of the project settings. you modify project settings to control the appearance of the components and subcomponents within that project. and set it as your default template. Finally.

click Options. 19 On the Design Bar. select yellow. When an error occurs. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. 12 Under Colors. 3 In the Options dialog box.Modifying System Settings In this lesson. notification preferences. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. click Training Files. 114 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 15 Under Notifications. Notice that the drawing area is black. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 11 In the Options dialog box. the elements causing the error display using this color. click Modify. click Options. and click OK. click the Graphics tab. 6 In the New Project dialog box. click Browse. journal cleanup options. 14 Click the General tab. 16 Click OK. select Invert background color. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Building working environment. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 13 In the Color dialog box. 17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and select the wall. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. 9 In the New Project dialog box. click Close to close all open projects. click Wall. 8 Select m_Tutorial_Default. you learn how to control the system settings within Revit Building. These settings control the graphics. 10 On the Settings menu. click the value for Selection Color. click OK. Select None for Tooltip Assistance. 4 Under Colors. 2 On the Settings menu. specify the following options: ■ ■ Select One hour for Save Reminder interval. and click Open. 5 On the File menu.rte in the Metric folder. and your username when using worksets. they are not saved to project or template files. under Template file. selection default options. click the Graphics tab. Set graphics settings 1 On the File menu. and click OK. 18 Sketch a simple straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area.

32 On the File menu. click Modify. These settings control location of important Revit Building files such as your default project template. 31 Click OK. click No. 28 On the Settings menu. do not save the changes. 21 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. click Options. the family libraries. you specify your default file locations. 23 On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). select your preferred Save Reminder interval. Under Username. Under Journal File Cleanup. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Building session. Modifying System Settings | 115 . This setting controls only the tooltips that display within the drawing area. click Close. 20 On the Design Bar. Journals can be run in order to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. 22 Place the cursor over any of the icons on the toolbars. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. click the Graphics tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Graphics. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Building sessions. 24 When prompted to save. Select Red for Selection Color.Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 30 Click the General tab and make the following changes: ■ ■ ■ Under Notifications. click Close. 29 In the Options dialog box. 26 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. Specifying File Locations. Notice that a tooltip is displayed even though you set Tooltip Assistance to None. If prompted. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. 25 On the File menu. clear Invert background color. 27 Open the m_Settings. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. as well as the material and rendering libraries. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. These files are used primarily in the software support process. and select Normal for Tooltip Assistance. the family template files. Your login name displays by default.

and click OK. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog box. 12 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and click Browse to select a template. and Import dialog boxes. under Libraries. click Options. 3 Under Default template file. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. 11 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog box. and change the name to My Library. notice the list of library names. When you are opening. click . You can modify the existing library names and path. 7 In the Options dialog box. centralized. saving. click the File Locations tab. and click the arrow that displays on the right side of the field. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. Notice that there are industry-specific templates that you can set as your default template. or loading a Revit Building file. This path is set automatically during the installation process. there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. 10 Under Libraries. 5 Under Default path for user files. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog box. click Browse. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. click Browse. Save. such as in a large. 4 Click Cancel.Set file locations 1 On the Settings menu. On the File menu. select the folder to save your files to by default. In the following illustration. under Default path for family template files. 6 In the Browse for Folder dialog box. choose New  ➤ Project. Each library path points Revit Building to a folder of families or training files. and you can create new libraries. 8 Click Cancel. TIP To view a template. Load. 116 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can start a new project with that template. However. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. click Browse. 2 In the Options dialog box.

click Open. 21 Under Libraries. 17 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. If you want to relocate this path. and click OK. view the current path. 24 Under AccuRender resource location. This path is determined during installation. This path specifies the location of the AccuRender® texture library. Specifying Spelling Options. Modifying System Settings | 117 . Specify rendering settings 23 Click the Rendering tab. click Options. and select it as the library path. Load. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. If you work in a large office. 16 On the File menu. 25 Click OK. click My Library. 18 Click Cancel. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. Notice that Revit Building navigates directly to the library path. select My Library. 14 Under Library Name. 22 Click to delete the library. 20 Click the File Locations tab. click the My Library icon. The library icons display in the order that they are listed in the Options dialog box. 15 Click until My Library is at the top of the list.13 Navigate to C:\My Documents or any other folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Building projects. or families. specify the new location here. Save. and Import dialog boxes. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Building Open. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. templates. and click OK. you may want to set up an office library on a network path in order to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 19 On the Settings menu. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Building.

select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. 18 On the Settings menu. click OK. click Close. 5 In the New Project dialog box. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click Browse. In this exercise. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the File menu. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Training Files. Notice that there is also a building industry dictionary. 21 Under Personal dictionary. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click Save. click Text. 11 In the Options dialog box. 16 On the Tools menu. 20 Under Settings. click to open a new Revit Building project using the default template. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 On the File menu. click Exit. 19 In the Options dialog box. and then click File  ➤ Exit. If prompted. 3 Under Settings. click Save. and click Open. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Spelling tab. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 2 In the New Project dialog box. you modify snap increments. Modify snap increments 1 On the File menu. 22 In the text editor. click Edit. click Options. 17 Click OK. click Options. click Edit. 2 In the Options dialog box. click Spelling. click New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Building project. work with snapping turned off. 4 Select m_Tutorial_Default. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. Modifying Snap Settings. click Modify. click Exit. 118 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Edit. delete sheetmtl-CU.rte in the Metric folder. 24 In the Options dialog box. 23 On the File menu of the text editor. click Restore Defaults. You can turn snap settings on and off. click OK. click OK. 25 On the File menu. under Template file. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. do not save the changes. 12 On the Standard toolbar. 9 In the text editor. click the Spelling tab. you modify snap settings. 6 On the File menu. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 5 In the text editor.Modify spelling settings 1 On the Settings menu. 14 Click in the drawing area. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 4 Under Personal dictionary. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. This resets the spelling settings to their original configuration.

10 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. If you do not have a wheel button. Modifying System Settings | 119 . After you click to place the object at the midpoint. For example. zoom out until it does so. click OK. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 9 In the Snaps dialog box.. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. TIP To zoom while in the act of sketching. 8 Under Object Snaps. 7 Under Dimension Snaps. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments.6 On the Settings menu. If it does not. click Snaps. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. As you zoom in and out within a view. While sketching. and enter 500 . This dimension reacts to the movement of your cursor and numerical keyboard entries. These are shortcut keys that you can use at any time when working on the design. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the context menu. Revit Building uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. This is the increment that you added previously. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys such as ZO to zoom out. enter SM and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. snapping reverts to the system default settings. A listening dimension refers specifically to the dimension that appears while in the act of sketching. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. notice the two-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. and move the cursor to the right. use the wheel button on your mouse. click Wall.

When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. and delete the value 500 . 23 Under Dimension Snaps. fill patterns. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. You create and modify materials. Notice that snapping is once again active. and move the cursor to the right. click Snaps. 21 Move the cursor downward. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. it will snap to the endpoints. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. and the wall edges. If you move the cursor along the wall. 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. Using these options. Do not set the wall end point. it defines the appearance of that component in shaded and rendered views. you modify the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. the midpoint. and object styles. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. 25 On the File menu. Finally. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. lines. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. you create a new material and apply it to a model component. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. save the project file with a unique name. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. and use it to complete the exercises. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. 24 Click OK. and do not save the file. and click Wall. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. click Modify. click Close.. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. 18 Enter SM. Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. annotations. 120 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and specify the wall endpoint.Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. 22 On the Settings menu. Modifying Project Settings. When you apply a material to a component. Make sure you also delete the semicolon.

Masonry-Fieldstone. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. and select Masonry . 3 Click Duplicate. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. this material provides a good foundation for the new material. click Materials. and click OK.Fieldstone. click the Training Files icon. However. Create a new material 1 On the Settings menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog box. Open m_Settings. enter Masonry .In the steps that follow.Stone for Name. When a model component is loaded into a project. 2 Scroll down. all materials that are part of that component family are also loaded into the project. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model component in this project. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. This creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. This list includes all materials required by loaded model components. Notice that there is no Surface Pattern applied to this material. you render a region to observe the changes. 4 In the New Material dialog box. nor is there an AccuRender texture applied. Modifying Project Settings | 121 . click Open. you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. In the steps that follow. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

By offsetting the X and Y values of the image map. click Edit. on the Material menu. select Masonry . 6 Navigate to BMCD2AR3\Bitmap Textures\Stone\.Fieldstone is now part of your AccuRender User library. . 122 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click Edit. 22 Click in the Material field for layer #1. notice that the Surface Pattern is still blank. click to select a texture. enter 0. 12 In the Material Editor dialog box. select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 21 In the Value field for Structure. enter Masonry .75 for X and Y. click Edit/New. and click OK. The upper wall now uses the Fieldstone on CMU AccuRender texture when you render it. 23 On the right side of the Material field. click OK.Fieldstone for the name. 25 Click OK three times. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . In the next exercise. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 Select the entry under Image Mapping. expand Floor Plans.Brick. 10 In the Image Mapping dialog box. 20 Enter the new wall name.Fieldstone for Name. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 15 Click OK. and click OK. 19 Click Duplicate. Before closing the Materials dialog box. click the Maps tab. and double-click Level 1. 24 In the Materials dialog box. 13 In the Save Material As dialog box. 28 In the Type Selector. expand Views (all). you help prevent the appearance of repetitive patterns within the rendering. 26 Select the right exterior wall.Modify material settings 5 Under AccuRender. click This is the material you created previously. and select the remaining two unchanged walls. 17 Select the upper exterior wall. and select Stone82. and click OK. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 14 In the Material Library dialog box. and click OK. select user from the list of libraries. The AccuRender texture Masonry . 11 Under Offset. 7 In the Material Library dialog box. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. click New  ➤ Use Current Material as Template. Apply the new material 16 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Material Editor dialog box.Fieldstone material. 27 Press CTRL. click the Orientation tab. Fieldstone on CMU. and click . click OK.

the rendering process begins. you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise.rvt. select Region Raytrace. the fieldstone material that you created is displayed. Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. and click Rendering. drag a rectangle around the 3D image. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. Controlling Object Styles. After you draw the rectangle around the 3D model. right-click the Design Bar. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. you apply a material to default roofs and resolve this. Zoom into the model. click Region Raytrace. 33 On the File menu. When finished. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. In the exercise. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view. This is because a material has not been applied to the roof. This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. click . TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. 34 Navigate to a folder of your preference. click Display Model. Notice the roof did not render. In the following exercise. 30 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Project Settings | 123 . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar. click Save As. 32 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress. click Display Model on the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 31 In the drawing area. and drag a rectangle around the area you want to render. 35 Proceed to the next exercise.29 On the View Toolbar.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 10 Under Custom. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. 9 Select Fieldstone_Model. The location of these files can vary depending on the path you set during installation. click Custom. 5 Click New. click Import. 11 Enter Fieldstone for Name.rvt. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog box. such as steel.There are two types of fill patterns: model and drafting. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. The new model pattern is available in the Name list in the Fill Patterns dialog box. Apply the fieldstone pattern 13 Select the east exterior wall. 12 Click OK. 2 On the Settings menu. 7 Under Custom. and double-click East. expand Elevations. and click Open. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. and enter . your training files can be found on C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\Revit Building\Training.56 for Import scale. TIP Typically. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. select fldstn. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. and click OK. 124 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .pat from the Common folder. choose Model. click Fill Patterns. 3 Under Pattern Type. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. 8 Navigate to the training folders installed with your Revit Building software. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. m_Settings-in progress. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall.

Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 16 In the Value field for Structure. select Model. notice that there is no surface pattern applied to the Masonry . It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 25 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. click in the Material field for layer #1. click . In the Materials dialog box. 23 Click OK three times. Object Styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. and click OK. you can set the window frame material to “By Category. click . click Edit. click Save. 19 Under Surface Pattern. click . For example. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. 20 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 21 Select the Fieldstone model pattern.14 On the Options Bar. TIP If the pattern does not display.Fieldstone. 18 On the right side of the Materials field. 28 Proceed to the next exercise.Fieldstone material. 24 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 27 On the File menu. under Pattern Type. Controlling Object Styles. there are often multiple window types within a project. 26 On the View Toolbar. click to select a fill pattern. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 22 In the Materials dialog box. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. Modifying Project Settings | 125 . The east wall of the building displays as solid fill. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. Controlling Object Styles You can use Object Styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. Object Styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. adjust your zoom settings as needed.” You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog box and apply it to all window types. click OK.

NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region) and drag a rectangle around the three left windows facing you.rvt. expand 3D Views. 2 On the keyboard. m_Settings-in progress. 126 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Apply object styles 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D Model View. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.

click the Trim Exterior Material value. click OK. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. click OK. click OK. and click Shading with Edges. click . and select 8 In the Materials dialog box. click Edit/New. This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting.3 On the View Control Bar. click . and select the circular window on the second level. 11 Zoom out. under Other. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. click By Category. and select 15 In the Materials dialog box. click Edit/New. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. . Modifying Project Settings | 127 . 4 Select one of the windows. 18 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. click OK. under Other. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. click By Category. click the Trim Exterior value. click Model Graphics Style. click Modify. . 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box.

click . click Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. 22 Under the Windows category. m_Settings-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Notice that the material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. click 29 On the File menu. 23 On the right side of the Material field. select Trim. expand Windows. 128 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click OK. click Save. specify Trim .rvt. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. 21 Under Category. 25 In the Object Styles dialog box. expand Windows. click Object Styles. 26 On the Settings menu.Granite for name. 27 Under Category. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. 24 In the Materials dialog box. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line. 28 On the View Toolbar. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.White for Trim material. select Trim . click Object Styles.19 On the Settings menu. Notice that the external window frames are now white. and click OK. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. . 20 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK twice. and click in the Material field.

click New. 8 On the Settings menu. You have created a new line pattern. Modifying Project Settings | 129 . click Object Styles. 9 In the Object Styles dialog box. 2 On the Settings menu. under Category. m_Settings-in progress. click Model Graphics Style. or you can use Object Styles to apply the change to all views. 10 Select Red for Line Color. There are two ways to apply the line style to the roof. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog box. and select Roof Line for Line Pattern. now you must apply it. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog box.Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. 11 Click OK. click Line Patterns. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice.rvt. enter Roof Line for Name. The line style is applied to the roof in all views. You can use the Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. is open with the 3D view active. select Roofs. 7 On the View Control Bar. and click Hidden Line.

and click Hidden Line. 19 Click the Model Categories tab. 24 On the Settings menu. Notice that the line style displays in this view also. 130 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .12 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Select Line Style dialog box. click Line Styles. under Modify Subcategories. Notice the site topography and the property lines. 22 Click OK twice. and click OK. 18 On the View menu. 25 In the Line Styles dialog box. under 3D Views. 17 Click OK. click Model Graphics Style. double-click Site. double-click 3D Model View. Select Blue for Line Color. select Roofs. select Override and specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ Select 5 for Line Weight. under Category. 20 Click Override for Line Style Projection. 26 Enter Zoning Setback for Name. 13 On the View Control Bar. Select Roof Line for Line Pattern. click Object Styles. and select Roofs for Visibility. click New. 16 Select Solid for Line Pattern. Create a new line style 23 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Settings menu. and select Black for Line Color. click Visibility/Graphics. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Object Styles dialog box. This overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view.

click Lines. Enter -3000 mm for Offset.27 For the Zoning Setback category. click . Select Double Dash 5/8" for Line Pattern. and clear Zoning Setback. 40 Click OK. 33 On the View Toolbar. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Select 2 for Line Weight Projection. 38 On the View menu. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. 34 On the View menu. 31 In the Options Bar. 35 On the Model Categories tab. 39 On the Model Categories tab. ■ 32 Click the upper-left corner of the property line to begin the rectangle. click Visibility/Graphics. 30 In the Type Selector. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. click . 41 On the View Toolbar. expand Lines. click Save. expand Lines. 42 On the File menu. Modifying Annotations In this exercise. Modifying Project Settings | 131 . 29 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the line style has not been applied to the roof in this view because you applied the override to the 3D Model View only. Modifying Annotations. 36 Click OK. double-click Level 1 Annotated. Notice the Zoning Setback lines appear in this view. under Floor Plans. move the cursor to the bottom-right corner of the property lines. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type number. 37 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. and clear Zoning Setback. 28 Click OK. (Make sure you specify a negative value. This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. and click to set the rectangle endpoint. The -3000mm offset displays inside the property lines. Select Red for Line Color. specify the following: ■ ■ Click .) Click . select Zoning Setback.

Number. 11 Select any window in the east or west wall. m_Settings-in progress. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. Notice that the windows on the east and west walls are tagged.Imperial and click OK. and that the tag displays the window type number rather than the window instance number. In the steps that follow. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 Annotated. click Modify. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Dimension. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. navigate to the Annotations/Architectural folder of the Metric Library. 18 In the Open dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. 7 Click OK twice. scroll down to Windows. In the Type Selector. notice that there is a Linear . 15 On the Settings menu. 4 Enter the name Linear . 5 Under Text. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type number. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. click . 2 On the Settings menu. 17 Click Load. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. 14 Click Cancel. m_Settings-in progress.rvt. 3 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Category. click Duplicate. 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. You have created a new dimension style. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. click the default value for Units Format. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 6 In the Format dialog box: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 16 In the Tags dialog box.Imperial dimension available. Load a new window tag 10 In the Project Browser. 132 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value. and select M_Window Tag . is open with the 3D View active. Select Feet and fractional inches for Units.

Temporary Dimensions.Number. notice that the label displays 1i. 32 On the View Toolbar. click the three left-most windows. Notice that both window tag types can coexist within the same view. M_Window Tag . TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. 28 Under Leader. Specifying Units of Measurement. 31 On the Design Bar. Under Category.In the preview image. click Tag. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. click M_Window Tag . 29 On the east wall. you modify the detail level assignments. In the first section. and click OK. In the second section. 30 In the Type Selector. Unless overridden. A window instance tag displays on each selected window. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Modify. Leave M_Window Tag . you modify three settings that have a broad impact on the project. click Tag All Not Tagged. 22 Click OK. you modify the temporary dimension settings. you specify the project units of measurements. 24 On the Options Bar. click Save. Modifying Project Settings | 133 . 21 Under Loaded Tags. m_Settings-in progress.rvt. . This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. select M_Window Tag .Number.Number as the assigned tag. Temporary Dimensions.Number. 20 In the Tags dialog box. dimension values display using this setting. select one of the window tags that displays the type value.Number is now the assigned tag. In the final section. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag . 27 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 25 On the left side of the north wall. click 33 On the File menu. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. notice Window Tags appears twice. 26 On the Design Bar. clear Leader. Specifying Units of Measurement. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. verify that Create is clear. and Detail Level Options. the other displays the instance value. and Detail Level Options In this exercise. 19 Click Open. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value.

select To the nearest 100 for Rounding. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. click Project Units. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. click Detail Level. 5 In the Format dialog box. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. In this table. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets. expand Floor Plans. click Save. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. When you create a new view and specify its view scale. under Length. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction.rvt from the Common folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.Set units of measurement 1 On the Settings menu. select meters squared for Unit suffix. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. dimensions use these project settings. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags. and click OK. 12 Click OK. These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. click the default value for Format. In this project. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. 8 Under Walls. Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Under Doors and Windows. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. 13 On the File menu. 3 In the Format dialog box. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 On the Settings menu. Open c_Project_Browser. Specify detail levels 10 On the Settings menu. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. Unless overridden. click . and click OK. select Faces. click Temporary Dimensions. In this exercise. 134 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand Views (all). under Area. and expand 3D Views. and click OK. You do not select a view scale to move it. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. select Openings. select 0 decimal places for Rounding. 6 Click OK. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog box. click Close. click the default value for Format. 14 On the File menu. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. click the Training Files icon. Modifying Project Browser Organization. click Open. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings.

In the Project Browser. expand each sheet set.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline.Phase 1-Structure East Wing . Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. 7 On the Settings menu. 4 On the Settings menu. 8 Select Phase. Modifying Project Settings | 135 . 2 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). notice that Views are grouped based on Phase. click Browser Organization. click Browser Organization. and click OK. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. 12 Click the Sheets tab. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . On the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline. expand each view type. 5 On the Views tab. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order. 14 In the Project Browser. select Discipline.Phase 2-Structure West Wing . Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 On the Settings menu. click Browser Organization. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. under Sheets. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. and click Apply. and click OK. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog box.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. 6 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. Proceed to the next lesson. you create a Revit Building template file and set it as your default template. Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. dimensions styles. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. expand 3D Views. and view names.Create a new browser organization name 15 On the Settings menu. If you want to save this file. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. and click OK. and expand both Architectural and Structural. This lesson is intended to provide you with a blueprint of how to create your office template. 136 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog box. When you create new projects. Although Revit Building provides many templates to choose from. navigate to your preferred directory. You can save Project Browser organization schemes. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. and Discipline. named print settings. The lesson begins with choosing the right base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you would consider in order to make a template unique to your situation. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. 20 In the Browser Organization dialog box. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. levels. It is mostly conceptual and designed as a road map with options for your consideration. and render scenes in a template. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. In the lesson that follows. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. 22 On the File menu. under Views. 16 Click the Views tab. click the Folders tab. and click New. Creating an Office Template. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. enter a unique file name. View Type (Family and Type). you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. click Browser Organization. 21 In the Project Browser. click Close. and click OK. In this lesson. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. A well designed template will ensure office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. You can also save these settings in a template file. expand Complete. you create an office template.

9 On the File menu. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. click Browse. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. Creating an Office Template | 137 . Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. and click Open. such as the structural template. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. If you have additional projects open. When you create the material. click Zoom  ➤ Zoom in Region and. and click OK. the same rules apply.rte template. expand Elevations. 2 In the New Project dialog box. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects. 3 Under Template File. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. and double-click North. 8 In the Project Browser. expand Views. select Project Template. 13 Select the default template. 5 Click OK. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. you can establish the settings that are common to most projects. 10 On the File menu. 12 Under Template File. for instance. 14 Click Open. Whenever you create a new project or template. Notice there are a number of different templates to choose from. Review existing templates 1 On the File menu. Other than the default template. 6 In the Project Browser. In that case. are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules.Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. when you create a new project. Other templates. a group of settings are used to specify the project environment. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. click New ➤ Project. For example. structural or construction. you can select it now. click Browse. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. click New  ➤ Project. you select the starting point for your office template. you modify the project settings for your new template. click Close. close them. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of the structural tools. When you create a new template based on an existing template. in the drawing area. each is modified in a way to make it useful to the applicable industry. select Project for Create new. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. 7 On the View menu. For example. If you want to use a template other than the default. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. 11 Under Create New. Modifying Project Settings. In order to maintain office standards and reduce rework. drag a zoom region around the level heads. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project.

or modify existing patterns. you can set line weights. Choose the appropriate option. and materials for different categories and subcategories of components or imported objects. In the Object Styles dialog box. 3 Under AccuRender. click Materials. 8 Click OK when finished. you can do so by going to the Material menu and selecting New. line colors. see the previous lesson. create and modify them as needed. rotate. RELATED See Modifying System Settings for more information on creating new AccuRender materials. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. be aware that access to the original material library may be necessary at some point. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. specific modifications are not dictated. you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. Modifying System Settings or refer to the Help documentation. and move model patterns. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. 7 Create new fill patterns as needed. You can do this by setting the AccuRender Texture. Observe the materials that are already defined. weights. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. 138 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . When you save a new AccuRender material designed to be used in an office template. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. You can align. 6 Scroll through the list of model and drafting patterns. During this exercise. click Fill Patterns. For more details on modifying these settings. line patterns. Create and modify fill patterns 5 On the Settings menu. If there are custom AccuRender materials that you want to add to the template. you may want to specify their appearance when rendered. click to access the AccuRender Material Library. click Object Styles. You may want to save the material to a library located on a network path. TIP Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. If you create or modify new materials. Create and modify materials 1 On the Settings menu. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. RELATED See Modifying Project Settings for more information on creating new fill patterns.In this exercise. If there are materials that are commonly used within your office or industry. 2 Scroll down the Name list. 4 Click OK twice to close the Material Library and Materials dialog boxes. and create the AccuRender material. Specify object styles 9 On the Settings menu.

The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. 21 Click the Model Line Weights tab. modify the line weight. 28 Click OK. 24 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. select it. 14 Modify categories. 33 Click OK. 32 Add and delete line patterns as needed. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for six different drawing scales. and click Edit. and one for annotation symbol line styles. click Line Patterns. Modify line styles 16 On the Settings menu. The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of modeling components. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. there are three tabs: one for model component line styles. such as section lines and dimension lines. 30 Scroll through the list of line patterns. 23 Add and delete view scales as needed. or line pattern as needed. 15 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog box.TIP When the material of a component is set to by category. 13 Click the Annotation Objects tab. one for perspective model line styles. 22 Modify existing line weights as needed. and scroll through the list of categories. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of objects such as walls and windows in perspective views. Creating an Office Template | 139 . 25 Modify existing line weights as needed. You can add and delete view scales. Modify line weights 20 On the Settings menu. 10 Click the Model Objects tab. click Line Weights. 19 Click OK. 12 If necessary. line color. click Line Styles. 26 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. 17 For existing line categories. 31 To modify a line pattern. create new line subcategories. such as walls and windows in orthographic views. In the dialog box. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category. 11 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. Modify line patterns 29 On the Settings menu. create new subcategories. and create new subcategories as needed. 27 Modify existing line weights as needed. 18 If necessary.

Modify Dimension Styles 40 On the Settings menu. Modify loaded tags 47 On the Settings menu. 50 After you have loaded the necessary tags. click Duplicate. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. and choose a decimal symbol. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. Specify project units 51 On the Settings menu. ■ ■ On the Settings menu. 35 Select the Type drop-down list. 44 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. click Load. 37 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. select it from this list. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Radial. 54 Click OK. and Angle settings. 140 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Linear. 56 Specify the Slope option. and specify the properties. 48 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 45 Click OK. 38 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. The arrowheads configured within this dialog box can be applied to text notes. 43 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. 39 Click OK. To see the details of a particular style. 41 Select the Type drop-down list. click Duplicate. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. 36 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. In the Tags dialog box. On the Settings menu. angular. To see the details of a particular style. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. select it from this list. 46 Repeat the previous five steps for angular and radial dimensions. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles.Modify arrowheads 34 On the Settings menu. 57 Click OK. 55 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. name the style. click Project Units. when you add a door with the tag option selected. and dimensions. 42 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. click Annotations  ➤ Dimensions  ➤ Angular. Volume. and specify the properties. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. 52 Under Length. 53 Modify the unit settings if necessary. tags. click Annotations  ➤ Loaded Tags. click Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. and radial dimensions are modified separately. 49 To load new annotation tags. name the style. For example. Linear. The tag assignments in this dialog box dictate the default tag for each category. click Format. and click OK. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog box.

Rename. and move view scales as needed. In such a case. When you create a new view. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. 71 If necessary. or Fine. Using the arrows between the columns. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. create new browser organization types. click Browser Organization. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. 67 Delete. you can move view scales from one detail level to another. 59 Under Walls. click the Views tab. create new browser organization types. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. 60 Under Doors and Windows. Modify project browser organization 65 On the Settings menu.Specify temporary dimensions 58 On the Settings menu. Although these settings can be saved within a template. or Edit existing organization types. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. you may only want to add generically named settings that would be applicable to most projects. Medium. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. The detail level is based on view scale. or Edit existing organization types. In a typical project. However. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. there are several additional commands that control the project environment. 70 Delete. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. For example. 69 Click the Sheets tab. 63 Review the table. 68 If necessary. click Detail Level. you can save rendered scene settings to a template. 64 Click OK. In order to organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. click Temporary Dimensions. Rename. 61 Click OK. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. TIP In the drawing area. click the arrows between columns. To move the view scales. see Modifying Project Browser Organization. 72 Click OK. 66 In the Browser Organization dialog box. Specify detail levels 62 On the Settings menu. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog box. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. Additional project settings 73 On the Settings menu. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. Creating an Office Template | 141 . you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template.

or add to this selection. This could be useful for things such as hardware. See Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. and electrical fixtures. You can find additional information in Help. Although this is possible. Depending on the intended use of this template. Use the instructions in the table below to load. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. Although the options are endless. Select it. In addition. Phases Project Phasing Area Settings Area Analysis View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you could load detail components. you should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. you can create and modify area schemes if there are default settings applicable to most projects. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. select from the Options Bar. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. phase filters. notice the list of doors already loaded. Site Settings If necessary. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. If necessary. For example. furniture. or load a new door type. or modify a door. If necessary. See Modifying Render Scene Settings Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings Render Scene If necessary. you do both. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. you may want to delete. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views. Obviously. Modify door type 142 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Use the table below as a checklist.Each of these areas are covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. 2 In the Type Selector. or use the Project Browser. and click OK. each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. you can move onto the next component type. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. 74 Proceed to the next exercise. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. the section cut material. and make modifications in each area as necessary. In the steps that follow. If necessary. See Modifying Views and View Templates. Links to associated tutorials are provided. In the Element Properties dialog box. there are some important thoughts to consider. titleblocks. This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. create. and the poche depth. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. You can load any family or group into a template. For example. select Load. select Edit/New. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. However. Make modifications. do so before starting this exercise. create. If this selection is satisfactory. It is important to understand that you should not load every conceivable family into a template file. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. modify. if you loaded every window type you could find. Each command is available on the Settings menu. you can set the default contour line interval. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. click Door. you would have to scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you changed a window within a project. you can create scene settings and save them to the template. you can set up the phases. 3 To modify. or electrical fixtures. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. and click Open.

You can also load families and groups from the File menu. Click Duplicate. (The titleblock name may vary depending on the template you started with. Use Project Browser to modify families 7 In the Project Browser. select Edit/New. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. Enter Name.) 9 Expand the titleblock. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. and click OK.Goal: Create new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog box. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. 6 On the File menu. click Load from Library. and click OK. Notice that there is a titleblock symbol loaded. expand Families. 8 Expand Annotation Symbols. Notice that each family category is listed. Modify type properties. 4 Click OK. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load Group. and select the titleblock type. Press ESC twice to return to the template. Creating an Office Template | 143 .

2 Select Architectural Plan for Name. right-click the component. To load a titleblock. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. View Range. At any time. you can apply a view template to any view. click View Templates. Discipline. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. click Load. 13 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. You may want to load a titleblock applicable to your office and then delete this titleblock. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project/template. you will first modify view templates. see Creating a Titleblock Family. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. This titleblock is currently part of the template. In this exercise. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. you create the views required for your template. In addition. The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. and click Delete. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. create. load. 12 Click OK. or modify any component families or groups as necessary.10 On the Options Bar. Create and modify view templates 1 On the Settings menu. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. Modifying Views and View Templates. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. To do so. 144 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . . RELATED For more information. Detail Level. and the visibility settings of categories and subcategories. click 11 Click <<Preview. In this exercise. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. Notice it has Revit Building in the upper-right corner. In addition. you created new projects using different templates. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance.

and click OK. Black level heads have no associated views. 20 In the Project Browser. Notice the level names. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. expand Floor Plans. click Apply. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. and apply the appropriate template. expand Views. under Floor Plans. and. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. right-click Level 1. and then click OK. click Apply View Template. in the context menu. After applying the template.By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. 22 In the Project Browser. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. review the floor plans. 24 In the Options Bar. Make sure you are still in the South Elevation view. or delete them as needed. click Apply View Template. notice that you have the option to rename. You can also duplicate or delete the view. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. Blue level heads have associated plan views. Rename. duplicate. 27 Recreate additional levels as needed. 15 In the Project Browser. If necessary. duplicate. 12 In the Project Browser. click Apply. 21 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. ceiling plans. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. under Floor Plans. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. double-click South. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. and double-click Level 1. 8 On the View menu. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. select Make Plan View. This options means that every time a new plan view is created. 4 If necessary. open the view from the Project Browser. and elevations. 6 Click OK. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. Upon the application of the view template. under Elevations. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. click Level from the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Site Plan. 23 To add additional levels to the template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. under Floor Plans. Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. 18 If you modified any other view templates. under Floor Plans. review the existing floor plans. 11 Click Apply. the view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. you can rename this view according to your preference. 16 On the View menu. Creating an Office Template | 145 . In addition. or delete this view. double-click Site. 13 On the View menu. the view is not linked to the template in any way. click Apply View Template. and click OK. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the Name drop-down list. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. double-click Level 2.

146 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . on the View toolbar. select the category type. click . and click OK. under 3D Views. Add sheets to the template 42 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select one. expand 3D Views. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views  ➤ 3D Views. Create and modify schedules 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. assign filters. and click View Properties. On the Filter tab. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click OK. 41 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. and select Rename. modify settings as needed. Dynamically Modify View.Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. you may want to modify the view properties of any new views. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. click . and modify their properties accordingly. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. If necessary. click 29 In the Project Browser. to orient and save the view. On the Appearance tab. 35 You can use Orient to a Direction or Orient to a View to set the camera location and target. and click OK. You can add schedules to a template. 40 Click OK. This can save significant time and ensure office standards are maintained. You are prompted to select a titleblock. 30 In the Project Browser. 32 To create additional 3D views. If you have already loaded your office titleblocks into the template. To do so. 39 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. select and order required fields. 38 If you want to add schedules to your template. click Sheet. modify settings as needed. On the Formatting tab. click 33 On the View toolbar. right-click {3D}. click Schedule/Quantities. on the View toolbar. 36 To save the view. modify settings as needed. You can use this tool. 31 Rename the 3D View. supply a view name. go to the View menu. 34 Click the arrow on the right side of the Dynamic View dialog box.

■ Automatic Sky: Treats the background as a sky. exterior-default. you could render basic scenes much faster and with greater consistency without the need to spend time modifying these settings. ■ Background Image: Lets you map images to your background. and provide a name for the scene. To do so. under Scene Settings. 9 Specify the date and time. You can still add views to the sheet. you can install AccuRender by running the install program on the Revit Building CD. and click Rename. and click New  ➤ Place Titleblock.TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the titleblock. or targa. a deciduous tree in summer appears in full bloom with leaves. Modifying Render Scene Settings You can create interior and exterior scene settings and save them within the template. Creating an Office Template | 147 . select the titleblock and delete it. ■ ■ ■ ■ You can also save and load environmental settings. TIP You can drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. if not. 3 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between three selected colors. Clouds: Adds procedurally generated clouds to the background. 43 Add views to the sheet by selecting Add View from the View tab of the Design Bar. select Exterior. Create and modify an exterior scene 1 On the Settings menu. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. and changes the color automatically depending on the sun and sky conditions. Choose from bitmap. right-click the sheet in the Project Browser. 45 Create new sheets as needed. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. Background images are available from the AccuRender software. Different seasons directly affect any AccuRender plants in the view. the relevant tab appears. By adding a default interior and exterior rendered scene setting to the template. for example. 3 Click OK. Ground Plane: Adds an infinite plane to your rendering. jpeg. 2 Color Gradient: Lets you vary the color between two selected colors. click Environment. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. and click OK. if one exists. 10 Under Plant Season. Solid Color: Specifies a single color that appears behind your rendering. for example. tiff. 44 To rename or renumber the sheet. and a Clouds tab appears. select the default titleblock. Alpha Channel: Lets you use the image's alpha channel (embedded pixel-by-pixel masking information). place. 7 Click OK. while in winter. To later add a titleblock to a sheet. it is completely bare. click Render Scene. ■ ■ ■ 6 Specify the Advanced features: TIP As you select options. and colors. go to the View menu. 2 Under Type. Be sure that you have installed this software. Modifying Render Scene Settings. select the Clouds option. After the sheet is created. which is included on the Revit Building CD. Haze: Simulates effects from slight “depth cues” to dense fog. click Sun. and then click OK. 8 Under Scene Settings. choose the appropriate season for plant rendering. 5 Specify the background color. for example. settings.

You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. Good. ■ Select Soft Shadows to produce more realistic shadow edges. 17 Click OK when finished. These scenes are now part of the template and will provide users with two basic rendering scenes.11 Specify Culling options: ■ Select Back Face Culling to eliminate rendering on model faces that do not face the camera eye. Medium. 15 Provide a name for the new interior scene. Select View Culling to eliminate rendering model faces that lie outside the area being raytraced. Higher values cause longer rendering times. Select Recalc Radiosity Lights to recalculate the shadows cast during the radiosity preprocess. Draft provides the lowest quality and fastest speed. Back face culling decreases rendering time and space. for example Interior . Better. This setting is effective for region raytraces. such as jaggy shadows or light leaks. and click OK. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Radiosity quality affects the relative coarseness of the mesh and the amount of time to process the solution. 148 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . Select Blurry Transparency to affect the look of material seen behind glass. Setting the quality to Better or Best reduces meshing artifacts. AccuRender always processes transparent faces. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN. Better. Select Blurry Reflections to affect the look of reflections in glass. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise. ■ 12 Specify the Radiosity Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an option: Draft. This works on opaque faces only. but also increases the solution time. This value is used both for the initial number of steps when you first use the Radiate command and for any subsequent calculation by clicking Continue from the Options Bar. Best. ■ Set values for Reflection and Transparency bounces. 16 Repeat the steps you performed when creating an exterior scene. Modifying Import/Export Settings. Higher values cause the color of reflected light to more closely approximate the color of the reflecting surface. click New. ■ Specify the Solution Goal: This limits the radiosity calculation to a certain number of steps. Medium. ■ ■ ■ Create and modify an interior scene 14 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Increasing the antialiasing level adds considerable rendering time. when used in conjunction with high antialiasing and soft shadows it can produce very high quality renderings with fewer radiosity artifacts. Meaningful values are between 0 and 1. the quality also is lower. Best. ■ 13 Specify Raytrace Settings: ■ Select Quality: Click the Quality drop-down list to choose an antialiasing option: Draft. Best is the slowest. The number of bounces determines how many levels of reflections or transparencies are permitted.Default. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. however. but provides the highest quality. This is a very time consuming operation but. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Shadows based on the size of the light source are calculated. Specify the Color Bleeding value: This controls the color saturation of reflected light. Good. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 On the File menu. Antialiasing is a process in which more than one ray is shot for each pixel in an attempt to better resolve the value of the pixel.

These settings are retained within the project template.txt for AutoCAD or exportlayersdgn. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. see Scheduling Shared Parameters or Scheduling Project Parameters. and so on. 5 For each category. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. you could use Shared Parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. The layer names are stored in a text file (either exportlayers. for example. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. Modify import line weights 7 On the File menu. Creating Named Print Settings. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. They cannot be shared with other projects. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer Name and Color ID Cut Layer Name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. windows. The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Building program installation directory. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. therefore. Using Shared Parameters. name the file. In this exercise. project parameters. project parameters. When you create a multi-category schedule. When you import a DWG or DXF file. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. select Save As. Revit Building presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. detailed instructions are not supplied since each office has a unique set of needs. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. doors. and click Save. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. TIP Color ID in the Export Layers dialog box corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. select Save As. When scheduling. 2 For each category. name the file. and click Save. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. 8 In the dialog box. click Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. you can define additional parameters that are not included in either the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. 9 Select Save As. Project Parameters are those parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. and so on. For example. You can save these mappings to a text file. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. Creating an Office Template | 149 . each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. and they become the set mappings for the project. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters.The Export Layers command maps Revit Building categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Building line weight. and click Save. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with Shared Parameters). and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. Multi-Category Tags employ Shared Parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. and related multi-category tags and schedules. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Modify export layers for DGN 4 On the File menu. name the file.txt for MicroStation).

For information on creating multi-category tags. 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. If this template will be used by multiple people within an office. select a parameter discipline type. and assign which categories this parameter applies to. 31 Navigate to the directory. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. add required parameters. 19 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 2 Click Create. 28 Add shared project parameters as needed. 23 To add a shared project parameter. click Shared Parameters. under Groups. Set up project parameters 13 On the Settings menu. 11 For each parameter group. For each parameter group. and select Shared Parameter. and click OK. The tag is now part of the template. select the tag. and choose a shared parameter. and click OK when finished. 26 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance or a type parameter. If a file already exists. This allows you to name the external parameter file. and specify the Type. 6 Create as many groups as needed. 17 Under Discipline. 10 Click OK. 18 Under Type. click Add. enter a parameter name. 22 Add project parameters as needed. click New. 7 Under Parameter group. you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 16 Under Name. you can create a list of parameters. 5 Enter the group name. you can begin creating parameter groups. 14 Click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 9 Name the Parameter. you may want to save the file to a network location. 25 Click OK. 3 Name and save the file. or use the Help documentation for assistance. 20 Select the element categories this parameter applies to. select a group that you want to add parameters to. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 27 Click OK. select a parameter value type. click Project Parameters. 8 Under Parameters. After the file is named.Set up shared parameters 1 On the File menu. After you have created the multi-category tags within the Family Editor. 24 Click Select. 30 On the File menu. click Load from Library  ➤ Load Family. click New. you can load them into the template. 21 Click OK. select Project parameter. and click Open. Create and load multi-category tags 29 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 150 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings .

and click OK. 3 Under Settings. select a different printer. By creating named settings within the template. 38 Proceed to the final exercise. 4 Click Save As. Create named print settings 1 On the File menu. 11 Click OK when finished. click Setup. you need only select a setting. By going first to the Print command. 14 Under Save as type. click Save. 7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. 2 Under Name. Creating Named Print Settings In this exercise. Creating Named Print Settings. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. enter a name for the schedule. 15 Name the template. 35 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. 36 When you have completed the schedule. Save the template 12 On the File menu. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. 34 Under Name.rte). For each printer. save the file as a template. you create named print settings. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. Your template is complete. click Print. select the first printer for which you want to create named settings. and the percent of actual size. and make it your default template file. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template.Create multi-category schedules 32 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and create new settings for this printer. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. and create additional settings as needed. you should save it to a network path. 6 Modify the printer settings. make minor modifications if necessary. 37 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. click OK. click Setup. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. you can set options such as sheet sizes. Creating an Office Template | 151 . you can select the printer for each set of named settings within the Print Setup dialog box. select Template Files (*. 5 In the New dialog box. The only remaining task is to save it. Depending on your office environment. 9 In the Print dialog box. click New. and click Save. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 33 Select <Multi-Category> for Category. paper placement. and print. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. click Schedule/Quantities. If you need to share this file with others. enter a name for the print setting and click OK.

click Options. loaded components. In addition. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. select it. and saved them to a template.Use the template 16 To use the template. you ensure that office standards are maintained. go to the File menu. If you have a project. This can provide a good starting point for a template. In addition. Set the template as your default template file 20 On the Settings menu. and click Open. click Browse. you modified settings. 18 Select the template. 17 Select Browse. You can also set this template as your default template. 21 Click the File Locations tab. you could delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 152 | Chapter 3 Modifying Project and System Settings . 19 Click OK. and click Open. 23 Navigate to the template location. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. By investing the time to individualize your template. The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. and click New  ➤ Project. In this lesson. 24 Click OK. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 22 Next to Default template file.

You also learn how to change the surface pattern of a ceiling grid. For more information.Ceilings 4 In this tutorial. you learn how to create automatic ceilings in Revit Building. You can also create ceilings by sketching them. see the online Help. 153 . You learn how to add ceilings by selecting room boundaries to automatically place the type of ceiling that you select. and how to create a compound ceiling.

4 Move your cursor into the upper center room and. and double-click Level 1. you learn how to create ceilings with the AutoCeiling command. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you learn how to add ceilings to an RCP view of a simple building model. After you add ceilings to the model. You add four different types of ceilings. click Open. expand Views (all). click Ceiling. and then change the surface pattern of one of the ceiling grids. Open c_Ceiling. when the room boundary highlights. You can create automatic ceilings in an RCP (reflected ceiling plan) view of the building model. 3 In the Type Selector. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Common folder. The ceiling is displayed.Creating Ceilings In this lesson. You also learn how to create and add a compound ceiling to the building model. expand Ceiling Plans. 154 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 1200mm grid. Create automatic ceilings 1 In the Project Browser. select it. you can change the surface pattern of the ceiling grids. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. Creating Automatic Ceilings In this exercise.

click OK. click in the Material type parameter Value field. when the room boundary highlights. 10 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 13 In the Name dialog box. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. Change the ceiling grid surface pattern of room on the left 8 On the Design Bar. select it.Interior . and click OK. 7 Select the room on the left and the room on the right.5 Select the lower center room and. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 Select the 600 x 600mm ceiling grid located in the room on the left. under Name. under Materials and Finishes. it displays in the Type Selector.Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. select Basic Ceiling : 600 x 600mm grid. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. click OK. click Duplicate. and click OK. NOTE You select one of the grids or the entire ceiling using the TAB key. enter Wood Diagonal Strips 150mm. select Finishes . When selected. Creating Ceilings | 155 . click . 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. and then click . 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. The new ceiling material is applied to the ceiling. 6 In the Type Selector. 15 In the Materials dialog box.

expand Views (all).18 If you want to save your changes.rvt located in the Common folder. click Open. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you change the project to Metric. on the File menu. and then add the ceiling to the building model. click the Training Files icon. add layers of material to the ceiling type. Open c_Condominium. expand Ceiling Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating Compound Ceilings In this exercise. The original project units are imperial. 156 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . Close the exercise file without saving your changes. You create a new ceiling type. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Create a new ceiling type 1 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow. and double-click First Floor. you learn how to create a compound ceiling. NOTE This common dataset is used in several imperial and metric datasets. click Save As.

click . 17 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Thickness. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. Add the compound ceiling 19 Move your cursor into the common area of the model and click to insert the Gypsum board on metal furring channels ceiling. under Layers. under Material. Creating Ceilings | 157 . click OK. 13 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. select Compound Ceiling: Ceiling 1. select Metal .Cold Rolled Channel. under Thickness. enter 20 mm Layer 4: Core Boundary Layer 5: Structure [1]. under Construction. click OK.Specify metric project units 2 On the Settings menu. enter 45 mm Layer 3: Structure [1]. specify Millimeters for units. click Ceiling. click OK. 14 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. under Thickness. enter 12 mm 16 Click OK. 5 In the Project Units dialog box. 4 In the Format dialog box. click Preview to display the current layers. 15 Define the five layers as follows and in the following order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Layer 1: Core Boundary Layer 2: Structure [1]. and click OK. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Interior . 7 In the Type Selector. click Insert twice to add two new layers. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. select Metal . and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Material. click the format button for length. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit for the Structure type parameter value. 8 On the Options Bar.Gypsum Wall Board. enter Gypsum board on metal furring.Furring. under Material. 11 In the Name dialog box. 3 In the Project Units dialog box. click Project Units. select Finishes .

22 The compound ceiling is visible in the section view of the first floor. on the File menu. 21 On the View Control Bar. 158 | Chapter 4 Ceilings . click the Detail Level control. Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and click Fine. expand Sections (Type 1). click Save As. You can also apply thin lines from the View menu. 23 If you want to save your changes. TIP You can use the zoom commands to zoom into the ceiling. and double-click Section 1. and save the exercise file with a unique name.View the compound ceiling in a section view 20 In the Project Browser under Views (all).

When creating a hosted opening. and you can create an opening in a roof specifically for a dormer. floor. or ceiling. In addition. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and a vertical cut. or ceiling.Openings 5 You can cut openings through roofs. floors. or ceilings using the Opening command. roof. 159 . you cut floor and ceiling openings that expose the stairs beneath them. In the exercises that follow. you have the option to cut perpendicularly through the face of a roof. You can cut vertically through a selected floor.

Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. To use the Opening tool to cut a dormer opening. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. the view range of a wireframe view was modified to display the entire dormer roof. you cut an opening in a roof with an existing dormer. notice the existing dormer.Cutting Roof Openings In this lesson. 160 | Chapter 5 Openings . Cutting a Dormer Opening in a Roof In this exercise. and you should create a view where you can see the dormer geometry. This allows you to precisely define the borders of the opening. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. the project must have an existing dormer. View current dormer construction 1 In the current 3D View. click Open. In this case. click the Training Files icon. you create an opening for an existing dormer and cut two openings in the roof in order to visualize the difference between a perpendicular and vertical cut.

WARNING Do not select the dormer roof. Notice no opening exists in the roof for the dormer. Cutting Roof Openings | 161 . The camera is located in the attic and is pointing to the dormer interior. Select the main roof to be cut. select Pick a roof to be cut by a dormer opening. under Views (all). click to select it. when the edges of the roof highlight. right-click the Design Bar. The dormer windows are above the roof so they do not display. and click Modelling. and double-click Roof . The view range was modified so the cut plane captured the entire dormer. Create the dormer opening 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the main roof. and click OK. expand Views (all). NOTE If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. and double-click Attic View. This view has been set up specifically for the dormer. and. 3 In the Project Browser.2 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views.Dormer. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. The display is wireframe so each dormer component can be seen and selected when defining the borders of the opening. click Opening. You need to cut an opening in the roof to accommodate the dormer. This is an interior 3D view. expand Floor Plans.

8 Zoom in around the dormer. you define the boundary of the dormer opening. a bottom face of a floor. an edge of the roof to be cut. or a model line on the face of the roof to be cut. 7 Place the cursor over the dormer. when it highlights. Valid boundaries are a joined roof or its bottom face. 162 | Chapter 5 Openings . Sketch lines display along the border between the dormer roof and the selected roof. and select the exterior face of the three walls that define the dormer. and.Next. select it. a side face of a wall.

under 3D Views. 12 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. the gaps in the bottom sketch line need to be closed. The dormer opening in the roof is apparent. click Finish Boundary. click Modify. 10 Select the lower sketch line. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Zoom out to see the entire plan view. double-click Attic View. 11 Drag each control to the corner until it intersects with the vertical sketch line on that side. and notice the drag controls on each end.Notice the sketch lines overlap in places. and the horizontal line on the bottom dormer wall does not extend to the corners. Cutting Roof Openings | 163 . Although the overlapping lines are not a problem.

Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Create a perpendicular opening 1 On the View toolbar. click Close. you create a roof opening that is perpendicular to the roof face. NOTE If you want to save this file. select Save As from the File menu. click Open.rvt located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon. Creating a Perpendicular Roof Opening In this exercise. 164 | Chapter 5 Openings .15 On the File menu. spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. 2 Using the spin function. click . In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

8 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof. floor. select Pick a face of a roof. 7 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box.3 On the Design Bar. right-click the Design Bar. and click Modelling. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 6 Move the cursor over the exterior face of the main roof. select it. and click OK. or ceiling and cut perpendicular to face. and. the opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. which is the side of the roof without a dormer. The opening on the right is cut vertically. click . when it highlights. click Modify. In the following illustration. Cutting Roof Openings | 165 . click Opening.

166 | Chapter 5 Openings . when it highlights. click Finish Sketch. select it. and. 10 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening.9 On the Design Bar.

rvt located in the Metric folder. click Close. click Open. . spin the model around so that you can see the side of the roof without the dormer. and click Finish Sketch.The opening is an element independent of the roof. change the shape. you create a roof opening that is cut vertically through the roof. click the Training Files icon. and constrain it like any other element. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating a Vertical Roof Opening In this exercise. You can move it. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. select Save As from the File menu. 2 Using the spin function. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. notice the tool displays. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. Create a vertically cut opening 1 On the View toolbar. click . dimension it. NOTE If you want to save this file. Cutting Roof Openings | 167 . 11 On the Options Bar. click 12 On the File menu.

4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. or ceiling and cut vertically. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. when it highlights. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. 168 | Chapter 5 Openings . select Pick a roof. floor. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular. and click Modelling. right-click the Design Bar. click Modify. In the following illustration. select it. 7 Move the cursor over the main roof.3 On the Design Bar. click Opening. and. 6 Click OK.

click . 12 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Project Browser. Cutting Roof Openings | 169 . select it. and. 11 Sketch a rectangle in the center of the roof on the side without the dormer. click .Because the cut is vertical. 10 On the Options Bar.Dormer. 13 On the View Toolbar. expand Floor Plans. it is easier to sketch the boundary on a plan view. when it highlights. click Lines. 14 Place the cursor over the edge of the opening. click Finish Sketch. and double-click Roof . 9 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all).

The opening is an element independent of the roof. you cut openings in a floor to accommodate a set of stairs that are already in place. The exercises in this lesson must be done sequentially. select Save As from the File menu. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). click 16 On the File menu. dimension it. expand Views (all). notice the tool. click Close.rvt located in the Metric folder. and double-click Section 1. NOTE If you want to save this file. you created a roof opening that was cut vertically through the roof. . and click Finish Sketch. You can move it. click Open. In this exercise. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings In this lesson. and constrain it like any other element. Cut a floor opening 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. click the Training Files icon. Cutting an Opening in a Floor In this exercise. If you want to modify the shape of the sketch. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. change the shape. 15 On the Options Bar. 170 | Chapter 5 Openings . you cut an opening on the second level of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs.

However.Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. and click OK. Before cutting the floor opening. The opening on the left is cut perpendicular to the face. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 171 . make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. or ceiling and cut vertically. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. click Ref Plane. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. floor. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. click Opening. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. and the level 1 and 2 lines. This is useful when sketching the opening in a plan view. select Pick a roof. and click Modelling. the opening on the right is cut vertically through the face. a section view provides an excellent vantage point to select faces or planes to cut. right-click the Design Bar. The first click specifies the start point. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. In the following illustration. When cutting a floor or ceiling for a stairway.

Otherwise. and the reference plane you added previously. select Floor Plan: Level 2. 9 On the Design Bar. 11 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. click Model Graphics Style. If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Finish Sketch. 10 On the Options Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. 172 | Chapter 5 Openings . and click Wireframe. under Sections (Filled Arrow). 12 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. under Views (all). click Lines. Notice the new floor opening. 13 On the Design Bar. You are prompted to select a view. 8 On the View Control bar. double-click Section 1. you may close the project with or without saving it. NOTE The next exercise requires this project in its current state. click .6 Select the floor on Level 2. do so now. the stairs. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. and click Open View.

double-click Section 1. Notice the new ceiling opening. or ceiling and cut vertically. you cut a ceiling opening for the stairwell. click Finish Sketch. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click Modelling. 8 In the Project Browser. right-click the Design Bar. click Opening. under 3D Views. 4 In the Go To View dialog box. Dataset Continue using the dataset you were using in the previous exercise. 3 Select the ceiling below level 2. click . 5 On the Options Bar. under Sections (Filled Arrow). under Views (all). Cut a ceiling opening. and click Open View. and the right and lower border of the stairs and floor you added in the previous exercise. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1 Interior View. Use the following illustration as a guide. floor. and click OK. 2 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. under Views (all).Cutting an Opening in a Ceiling In this exercise. 6 Sketch a rectangle that borders the reference plane. select Pick a roof. select Reflected Ceiling Plan: Level 1. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 173 . 9 In the Project Browser. the interior face of the wall. 7 On the Design Bar.

you must sketch in a plan view. 3 Add a vertical reference plane similar to the following illustration. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Before cutting the opening. Adding a reference plane is a two-click process. 174 | Chapter 5 Openings . select Save As from the File menu. Cutting an Opening Using the Shaft Tool In this exercise. When using the shaft tool to cut an opening. and the second click specifies the end of the plane. click Ref Plane. make sure that the plane intersects the fifth stair tread from the bottom. NOTE If you want to save this file. and double-click Section 1.10 On the File menu. expand Views (all). you cut an opening through several levels of a building model to accommodate a set of existing stairs and to account for the possibility of extending the stairs up another level. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The length of the plane does not have to be precise. you add a reference plane to mark the stair head height. and the level 1 and 2 lines. Open the file m_Cutting_Openings. however.rvt located in the Metric folder. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Open. click the Training Files icon. However. expand Sections (Filled Arrow). click Close. Notice that there is not an opening for the stairway in the ceiling or the floor. The first click specifies the start point. Add a reference plane 1 In the Project Browser.

right-click the Design Bar. 10 Zoom in around the upper right corner where the stairs are located. Creating Openings in Floors and Ceilings | 175 . but does cut the ceiling of level 1. click Lines. and click Wireframe. 11 Sketch a rectangle that borders the interior face of the wall. 6 In the Go To View dialog box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. 7 On the View Control bar. the ceiling of level 1 would remain intact. click .4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Constraints. under Sections (Filled Arrow). specify the following parameters: ■ Select Level 1 for Base Constraint. under Views (all). 14 Click OK. select Create shaft opening. and click Modelling. If you selected level 2 for the base constraint. and the reference plane you added previously. select Floor Plan: Level 2. and click OK. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. 16 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box. 9 On the Options Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. Entering a value for base offset ensures that the shaft opening does not cut through the floor at level 1. and click Open View. ■ ■ Select Up to level: Roof for Top Constraint. 12 On the Design Bar. click Properties. click Model Graphics Style. click Opening. TIP If the Modelling tab of the Design Bar is not active. the stairs. This accounts for the possibility of extending the existing stairs up another level. Enter 3400 for Base Offset.

and roof that interferes with the defined volume of the opening. you can cut a single opening through every floor. 176 | Chapter 5 Openings .Notice the shaft opening that cuts through several levels. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Using the shaft tool. ceiling.

you learn how to create a railing and customize it using design information for rails. and panels. 177 . balusters.Railings 6 In this tutorial. posts.

between the balusters. Creating the Railing Layout In this exercise.rfa. 3 On the File menu.Custom3. verify that DefaultMetric. click Railing.Custom4. Make certain that you draw the line from bottom to top because these starting and ending points are used to justify the railing later. You also learn how to use a pattern editor to place balusters and posts and how to customize the railing with additional components. such as panels. 7 On the Options Bar.rfa. 178 | Chapter 6 Railings . 2 In the New Project dialog box.Newel. navigate to Metric Library/Balusters. Sketch a plan view of two railing lines 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you need to load railing components from the library provided in the drawing template.rfa.rfa . Before you lay out the railing. click New ➤ Project. Open five component families 1 On the File menu. select M_Baluster . and click OK. The railing layout in this exercise is based on these custom components. click Lines. you create a railing and add components to it.rfa. 6 On the Design Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rte is selected as the Template file from the Metric Templates folder.Creating Railings In this lesson. Project is selected under Create new. M_Baluster . and M_Post . press the CTRL key. 4 In the Open dialog box. and click Open. you learn how to create and place a railing using design information such as the shape and finish material of the rails. M_Post . M_Baluster Panel 1. select Chain.Square w Ball. 8 Draw a 4300 mm vertical line from bottom to top as shown.

and then do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In row 1. enter -25 mm for Offset. 19 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. and then click . enter 300 mm for Height. and click OK. select Metal . 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. TIP You may need to zoom in until the angular dimension increments by a single degree. In row 2.Dark Gray. Matte for Name. in row 2. click Edit for Rail Structure. 13 In the Name dialog box. In row 2. enter Bottom for Name. and click OK. select Metal . enter Top for Name. click Insert. . click Railing Properties. click in the Material field. enter Railing with Glass Panel for Name. Matte for Name.Dark Gray. 16 In row 1. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box. select M_Rectangular Handrail : 50 x 50 mm for Profile.9 Draw a second 4300 mm line at an angle of 37 degrees as shown. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New.Paint Finish . 15 In the Edit Rails dialog box. In row 2. In row 2. Creating Railings | 179 . 18 In the Edit Rails dialog box.Paint Finish . and then click 17 In the Materials dialog box. Specify the railing parameters 10 On the Design Bar. click Duplicate. click in the Material field.

click . 180 | Chapter 6 Railings . under Main pattern. Adjusting Railing Parameters. click OK. 25 In row 4. under Posts. in row 1. select M_Post. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Glass Panel for Name. click on row 2. 35 Proceed to the next exercise. Lay out the post pattern 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box.Square w Ball : 60mm for Baluster Family and enter 50 mm for Top offset. click Finish Sketch. under Construction. click Shading with Edges. Lay out the main baluster pattern 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. from previous.rvt. Select Bottom for Base.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space. Adjusting Railing Parameters In this exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select M_Baluster . 24 In row 3. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. 29 In row 3. from previous.20 In the Edit Rails dialog box. Enter 380 mm for Dist. 30 Click OK three times. IMPORTANT Completing this tutorial is required to successfully complete some exercises in the tutorial on Stairs. 23 In row 2. Select M_Baluster Panel 1: 600mm . select M_Post. Select Bottom for Base. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. and then click Duplicate. 28 In row 2. 26 Select Beginning for Justify. click Edit for Baluster Placement. Enter 380 mm for Dist.Glass for Baluster Family. 31 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Toolbar.Custom 3 : 25mm for Baluster Family. select M_Post . A new row is displayed. you change the pattern of balusters and posts with the pattern editor to show different design options for the railing. 33 On the View menu. enter 230 mm for Dist. from previous. 34 On the File menu.Newel : 150mm for Baluster Family and enter 0 mm for Space.

under Construction. 17 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 7 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. click . 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Construction. under Main pattern. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 Click OK three times. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 13 Click OK three times. and double-click East. The railing layout reflects the assigned end justification option.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views (all). 2 Zoom in on the left side of the railing. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . Training_Railing. Creating Railings | 181 . View the end justification option 3 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the railing. 4 On the Options Bar. under Construction. under Main pattern. under Main pattern. View the center justification option 9 On the Options Bar. 18 Click OK three times. View the beginning justification option 1 In the Project Browser. select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. expand Elevations. click . The railing layout reflects the beginning justification option that you assigned in the previous exercise. click Edit/New. 12 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. select Center for Justify. click Edit/New. The railing layout reflects the assigned center justification option. select End for Justify. click Edit for Baluster Placement. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. View the spread pattern to fit option 14 On the Options Bar.rvt.

25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 35 On the Toolbar. click . enter 54 degrees for Angle. under Main pattern. 23 Click OK three times. click Edit/New. under Construction. Observe that the balusters that occur in the excess length fill area extend below the bottom rail. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification. under Construction. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. You cannot assign base top and bottom offset parameters to excess length fill balusters. click Edit for Baluster Placement. View the custom baluster with specified spacing excess length fill option 24 On the Options Bar. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 182 | Chapter 6 Railings . 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Construction. 34 Click OK three times. select Angles Greater Than for Corner Posts At. click . 32 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. select M_Baluster . and spacing options.Custom3 : 25mm for Excess Length Fill. click Edit/New. under Main pattern. and select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. View the truncate pattern excess length fill option 19 On the Options Bar. The railing layout reflects the assigned beginning justification and truncated excess length fill options. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box. 22 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. and enter 150 mm for Spacing. 26 In the Type Properties dialog box. 33 Under Posts. custom baluster excess length fill. click Edit for Baluster Placement. View post options 29 On the Options Bar.The railing layout reflects the assigned spread pattern to fit justification option. click . 28 Click OK three times. under Main pattern. click . select Beginning for Justify. select Truncate Pattern for Excess Length Fill. 27 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Edit for Baluster Placement.

Creating Railings | 183 . 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. 43 In the Project Browser.The railing layout reflects the assigned minimum angle limit for the corner post option. click . The railing layout reflects the assigned distance and justification options. a corner post does not occur. click Edit/New. In row 4. enter 0 mm for Dist. do the following: ■ ■ ■ In row 2. 42 Click OK three times. Specify the final railing layout 36 On the Design Bar. 44 On the File menu. click Edit for Baluster Placement. double-click East. click Modify and select the railing. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. from previous. enter 380 mm for Dist. under Elevations. 37 On the Options Bar. under Construction. from previous.rvt. Since the angle is less than 54 degrees. under Main pattern. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Each Segment End for Corner Posts At. click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Railing. Select Spread Pattern To Fit for Justify. 41 Under Posts.

184 | Chapter 6 Railings .

185 . gutters. In addition. and soffits to the roofs that you create. you learn how to add fascia. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Autodesk Revit Building.Roofs 7 In this tutorial.

Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. including hip. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. shed. click Open. Open m_Roofs. select Name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click OK.Creating Roofs In this lesson. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. click the Training Files icon. and double-click Level 1. 186 | Chapter 7 Roofs . and click OK. You do not need to create the work plane. The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. gable. Before you can sketch the roof profile. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and mansard roofs. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog box. You create roofs from footprints and by extrusion: the two roof creation methods in Revit Building. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you learn to create several different types of roofs.rvt located in the Metric folder. 5 In the Go To View dialog box.

This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. click Ref Plane. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. Creating Roofs | 187 .

14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. Next. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. select Chain. click Lines. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. sketch the roof profile. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 188 | Chapter 7 Roofs .

20 Select the breezeway roof edge. 19 On the Tools toolbar. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. click Modify. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. The roof should resemble the following illustration. 17 On the Tools toolbar. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. expand Views (all). and then select the exterior face of the wall. Next. press CTRL. 21 In the Project Browser. 18 Select the edge of the roof. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. click . click . Creating Roofs | 189 . click to display the model.16 On the View toolbar. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. and select the second wall. and double-click Section 1. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. press TAB. expand Sections (Type 1).

27 Proceed to the next exercise. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines.24 On the Options Bar. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 26 On the View toolbar. 190 | Chapter 7 Roofs . To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. click Attach for Top/Base. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends.

under Dimensions. On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Pick Walls. click Finish Roof. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 When you see the informational dialog box. 6 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 10 Press CTRL.rvt. sketch the roof footprint. 3 Next. verify that Floor Plan: Garage Roof is selected. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 7 On the Options Bar. By default. and click Open View. verify that Defines slope is selected. click . select both slope definition lines. clear Defines slope. 8 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. 4 On the Options Bar. click Modify. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. 2 In the Go To View dialog box. 5 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. Next. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. and on the Options Bar. Creating Roofs | 191 . and enter 600 for Overhang. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. and click OK. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch.

14 On the View toolbar. clear Defines slope. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. When you complete the roof. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 192 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model.rvt. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. expand Floor Plans. press TAB. and double-click Level 3. m_Roofs. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and enter 600 for Overhang. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. click Pick Walls. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar.

12 Select the uppermost horizontal line.6 Click to select all the walls. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 15 On the Options bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. 10 On the View menu. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 17 When you see the informational dialog box. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Modify. add new slope lines to the roof. Creating Roofs | 193 . 9 Using automatic snaps. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. Next. select Defines Slope. click . click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. select Defines Slope. 13 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. sketch the chimney opening.

Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls.rvt. select Defines slope. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. and enter 600 for Overhang. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 194 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. expand Views (all). click to view the new roof in the model. click Pick Walls. 3 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.18 On the View toolbar. and double-click Level 2. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint. expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

7 On the Options Bar. Next. select the left vertical slope definition line. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. clear Defines Slope. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. close the roof sketch. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. click Lines. 9 On the Tools toolbar. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 10 On the Options Bar. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and click . using the following illustration for guidance.Next. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 11 To trim the first line segment. click . Creating Roofs | 195 .

22 Using the same method that you used previously. join the two remaining walls to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. click Finish Roof. click 17 Click to display the model. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. 14 Under Constraints. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. The Element Properties dialog box is displayed. to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected.Next. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. Next. click Modify. 16 On the View toolbar. 196 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. click Roof Properties. and click OK. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. 18 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

clear Defines Slope. Creating Roofs | 197 . 25 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. click . click Pick Walls. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise.23 On the Tools toolbar. and double-click Level 2. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. m_Roofs. expand Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and enter 300 for Overhang. expand Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. press TAB. and press ENTER. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Next. 198 | Chapter 7 Roofs . You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. and click OK. 6 On the Options Bar. select the left vertical roof line. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. click Roof Properties. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click . 8 On the Tools toolbar. 16 Under Constraints. Next. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. enter 0 for Overhang. 10 To trim the first line segment. 9 On the Options Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. select Defines slope. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. 19 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. you add a slope-defining line. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections.

m_Roofs. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. Before you can add slope arrows. 9 On the Tools menu. and double-click Level 2. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and double-click 3D. Creating Roofs | 199 . 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. To help locate the position of each split. expand Views (all). 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. you need to add two reference planes. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof. 5 On the View menu. click . 4 In the Project Browser. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. click Ref Plane. expand Views (all). Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. expand 3D Views.rvt. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click to activate the roof footprint sketch. click Split Walls and Lines. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments.20 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. and enter 600 for Offset. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines.

Begin the tail at the right reference plane. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. Next. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 11 On the Design Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. verify is selected. and click 19 Under Constraints. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 18 Press CTRL. 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. click Slope Arrow. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. click Modify. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. select both slope arrows. select Slope for Specify. and then click OK. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. . clear Defines Slope. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves. 200 | Chapter 7 Roofs .15 to add the second slope arrow. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. add two new slope arrows. and move the cursor to rotate the arrow. 12 On the Options Bar. 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.Next. 20 Under Dimensions. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. and double-click Garage Roof. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. under Dimensions. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). expand Floor Plans. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. click . 12 On the Design Bar. 6 With the two gable end lines selected. click Align Eaves.rvt. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. m_Roofs. When you sketch a hip roof. Next. the adjacent eave heights must align. expand Views (all). When eave heights differ. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. When aligning eaves. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. click . 5 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. on the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. click to display the model. select a method to align the eaves. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. select Defines Slope. 10 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. Creating Roofs | 201 . The eave lines display with a dimension. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines.Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser.

click Save As. 3 Select the roof and. 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. 1 In the Project Browser. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. under Constraints. on the Options Bar. click Modify. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Open m_Mansard_Roof. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. expand Elevations. click . Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all).rvt located in the Metric folder. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. on the File menu. 202 | Chapter 7 Roofs . Creating a Mansard Roof. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. click Open. click the Training Files icon.14 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and double-click North.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click . under Dimensions. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. and double-click Level 3. 17 On the View toolbar. expand Views (all). and then select Defines slope. click Lines. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click . click to display the model. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and select the remaining three lines.6 On the View toolbar. expand Floor Plans. press TAB. click Finish Roof. 7 In the Project Browser. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Next. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. Creating Roofs | 203 . 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 14 On the Options Bar.

click Open. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. 2 In the Open dialog box. Gutters. gutters. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box.rfa. enter Built-up Fascia. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK. gutters. click the Training Files icon. 204 | Chapter 7 Roofs . and soffits. open the Profiles folder. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. click Duplicate. under Construction. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.18 If you want to save your changes. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 8 In the Name dialog box. After you create a roof. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click Open. on the File menu. Open c_Condominium. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 5 On the Options Bar. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. and open the Roofs folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Creating Fascia. you learn how to create roof fascia. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click . 1 On the File menu. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. and soffits in Revit Building. 3 Press CTRL. click Save As. open the Metric Library folder. and click OK twice. and Soffits In this lesson. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. you can easily create its fascia.rvt located in the Common folder.

11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. and Soffits | 205 . Creating Fascia. Gutters. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. Creating Gutters In this exercise. Creating Gutters.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 206 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 3 In the Properties dialog box. click . and click OK three times. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. click in the Value field for Material. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. c_Condominium. 10 Click to place the gutter. and click OK. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. Creating Soffits. click Edit/New. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Materials dialog box. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click Duplicate. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. 2 On the Options Bar. you learn how to place a roof soffit. and then click . under Construction. Creating Soffits In this exercise. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 7 Under Materials and Finishes.

5 On the Design Bar. and double-click 3D. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Select the roof. expand 3D Views. 1 In the Project Browser. Gutters. 6 In the Project Browser. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. expand Floor Plans. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit.rvt. and Soffits | 207 . click Pick Roofs. click Finish Sketch. Creating Fascia.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Views. c_Condominium. expand Views (all).

click Join Geometry. and then select the soffit to join them. on the File menu. 9 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name.7 On the Tools menu. 8 Select the roof. 208 | Chapter 7 Roofs . 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As.

u-shaped.Stairs 8 In this tutorial. add railings to your landings. you learn how to create and modify straight. and work with a stair calculator. You learn to create special feature stairs. 209 . and semi-circular runs of stairs.

You learn to work with different stair components. you can display both of the levels that you are working with. The level where the stairs originate displays as your current working level. The outline of the level 2 floors and wall display as an underlay. add. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. View the first level lobby and second level underlay 1 In the Project Browser.Creating Stairs In this lesson. specify the start point for the stair run. expand Views (all). 210 | Chapter 8 Stairs . select Level 2 for Underlay. 4 Click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. you learn how to create runs of typical and special feature stairs with the stairs aligned correctly between the levels in your project. The level where the stairs end displays as a screened background after you select it as an underlay. click Open. you create and align a straight run of stairs to provide access from the first level to the second level of the building model.rvt file located in the Metric folder. such as treads. 7 Using the following illustration as a guide. railings from another project. Creating the Main Lobby Stair Run In this exercise. Open the m_Stair_Exercise. click View Properties. Draw a straight stair run 5 Zoom in on the entry way. and double-click Level 1. click Stairs. click the Training Files icon. 2 On the View menu. under Graphics. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. risers and stringers. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. If you add stairs to a drawing in plan view. and then modify. use the Stair Calculator to add a straight run of stairs to your drawing.

click Finish Sketch.8 Specify the stair run endpoint as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. Creating Stairs | 211 .

13 Select the top edge of the stair run as the entity to align as shown. The top edge of the stair run is now aligned with the front edge of the second level. 212 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 11 On the Toolbar.Align the top edge of the stair run with the front edge of the second level 10 Zoom in on the top of the stair run. click . 12 Select the front edge of the second level as the alignment line as shown.

Align the stair run centerline with the wall centerline
14 Select the wall centerline as the alignment line as shown. TIP On the Options Bar, click Wall centerlines on the Prefer menu.

15 Select the stair run centerline as the entity to align as shown.

The stair run centerline is now aligned with the wall centerline.

16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view.

Creating Stairs | 213

Specify new main lobby stair parameters
17 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Sections, and double-click Stair Section. 18 On the View menu, click Thin Lines.

TIP Hold the cursor over the stairs to see the risers and treads. 19 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 20 On the Options Bar, click .

21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 22 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 23 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Main Stairs for Name, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 8 Stairs

24 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Treads, enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. Under Treads, select Stair Nosing - Radius : 20 mm for Nosing Profile. Under Treads, enter 50 mm for Tread Thickness. Under Risers, clear End with Riser. Under Risers, select Straight for Riser Type. Under Risers, enter 20 mm for Riser Thickness. Under Risers, select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. Under Stringers, select Match Level for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, enter 305 mm for Stringer Height. Under Stringers, enter 65 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers, enter 180 mm for Landing Carriage Height. .

25 Under Materials and Finishes, click in the Value box for Tread Material, and click

26 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 27 Click in the Value box for Riser Material, and click .

28 In the Materials dialog box, select Finishes - Interior - Carpet 1 for Name, and click OK. 29 Click in the Value box for Stringer Material, and click .

30 In the Materials dialog box, select Wood - Cherry for Name, and click OK. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. Because you specified ending the stair run with a tread instead of a riser, a warning dialog box displays, telling you that the actual number of risers is different from the desired number of risers. 32 Click OK to ignore this warning message. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width. 34 Click OK.

The stair section reflects the new assigned parameters. 35 On the File menu, click Save As, and save this exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 36 Proceed to the next exercise, Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run.

Modifying the Main Lobby Stair Run
In this exercise, you use design information about a railing from another project and create special feature stairs with concave stringers from the straight run of stairs you completed in the previous exercise.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Changing the railing type
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click lobby stair view. 2 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press CTRL, and select both railings. 3 In the Type Selector, select Railing : Railing with Glass Panel.

Creating Stairs | 215

NOTE If the panels do not display in the railings, go to the Type Properties of the railing. Click Edit next to the Baluster Placement parameter. If selected, clear the check box for the User Baluster Per Tread on Stairs option. Notice that the railing start post is offset above the level of the floor.

Adjust the railing start post offset
4 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select one of the railings. 5 On the Options Bar, click .

6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 8 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 1, enter -200 mm for Base offset. 9 Click OK three times. 10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

The railing start post is now at floor level.

Change the stair shape in plan view
11 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 12 Zoom in on the stair run. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 14 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 15 Press and hold CTRL, select the left and right stair run boundary lines, and delete them.

216 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Draw the left boundary arc
16 On the Design Bar, click Boundary. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 Specify the intersection of the bottom riser and inside wall face as the arc start point as shown.

19 Specify the left end of the top riser as the arc endpoint.

Creating Stairs | 217

20 Specify a point to the left of the stair run for the arc midpoint approximately as shown.

Mirror the left boundary arc
21 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left boundary arc. 22 On the Toolbar, click .

23 Select the stair run centerline as the mirror axis.

Draw the new first riser
24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, select the first riser and delete it.

218 | Chapter 8 Stairs

25 On the Design Bar, click Riser. 26 On the Options Bar, click .

27 Specify the lower end of the left boundary arc as the arc start point as shown.

28 Specify the lower end of the right boundary arc as the arc endpoint as shown.

29 Specify the intersection of the front wall edge and the stair run centerline as the arc midpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 219

30 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

31 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click lobby stair view.

The stair run from the first floor main lobby is now complete. 32 On the File menu, click Save As and save the exercise file as Training_Stairs.rvt. 33 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs.

220 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Creating the Second Floor Lobby Side Stairs
In this exercise, you create and align runs of side stairs with railings.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Specify the lobby side stair run parameters
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

2 On the View menu, click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select Level 3 for Underlay, and click OK.

4 Zoom in on the upper left of the lobby area. 5 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs, and then click Stairs Properties. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Lobby Main Stairs for Type, and click Edit/New. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter Lobby Side Stairs for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Risers, select End with Riser. Under Risers, select None for Riser Type. Under Construction, enter -300 mm for Extend Below Base. Under Stringers, select Do not trim for Trim Stringers at Top. Under Stringers, select None for Right Stringer. Under Stringers, select None for Left Stringer. Under Stringers, select 1 for Middle Stringers. Under Stringers, enter 100 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Treads, select Front, Left and Right for Apply Nosing Profile.

10 Click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Dimensions, enter 1220 mm for Width, and click OK.

Creating Stairs | 221

Place the lobby side stair run
12 Specify a point near the left edge of the landing for the stair run start point, and then specify a point to the left for the stair endpoint. NOTE The exact location of the stair run is not critical. You specify its final location in subsequent steps. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Move the stair run into the corner of the level 2 opening
14 Zoom in on the upper left side of the stair run. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify, hold down CTRL, and select the stair run and both railings. 16 On the Toolbar, click .

17 Specify the upper left endpoint of the railing as the move start point as shown.

18 Specify the upper left corner of the level 2 opening as the move endpoint as shown.

The top of the stair run is now positioned in the corner of the level 2 opening.

222 | Chapter 8 Stairs

19 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Specify a new side stair run railing type
20 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 21 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe. Notice that both railings are on the outside of the treads. This is because the original stairs that you duplicated, the main lobby stairs, have left and right stringers that hosted the railings. Because the lobby side stairs have only a center stringer, you need to flip the railings so they rest on the stair treads. 22 Select each railing, right-click, and click Flip Orientation.

Mirror the lobby side stair run
23 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select the side stair run and both railings. 25 On the Toolbar, click .

26 Specify the main lobby stair run centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

Creating Stairs | 223

The lobby side stair run is mirrored to the right side of the lobby.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The lobby side stairs and railings are now complete. 28 On the File menu, click Save. 29 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings.

Creating the Level 2 Landing Railings
In this exercise, you create and modify railings for a landing and then extend the railings from the side stairs in the previous exercise to the railing on the landing.

224 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Sketch the left side level 2 landing railing path
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom in on the level 2 landing. 3 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left main stair railing. 4 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 7 Click to specify the sketch line start point approximately as shown.

8 Move the cursor down and specify the next sketch point as shown.

9 Move the cursor to the right and specify the sketch endpoint as shown.

Creating Stairs | 225

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the left railing sketch line of the main stairs. 11 Select the endpoint of the sketch line for the railing as shown.

12 Drag the arc sketch line endpoint up to the right end of the new horizontal sketch line as shown.

13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

14 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click Level 2 Landing.

226 | Chapter 8 Stairs

15 Zoom in and on the View toolbar, click

to reorient the view to look as shown.

Create the right side level 2 landing railing
16 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 17 Select the right lobby main stair railing and delete it. 18 Select the left lobby main stair railing. 19 On the Toolbar, click .

20 Specify the lobby main stair centerline as the mirror axis as shown.

The new lobby main stair and level 2 landing railing layout is mirrored to the right side of the stair run.

21 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click Level 2 Landing.

Creating Stairs | 227

Extend the lobby side stair railing onto the landing
22 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 23 Zoom in on the left side of the level 2 landing. 24 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the upper lobby side stair railing.

25 On Options Bar, click Edit. 26 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 27 Click to specify the right endpoint of the railing sketch line for the line start point as shown.

28 Move the cursor 440 mm to the right and specify the sketch line endpoint as shown.

228 | Chapter 8 Stairs

29 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 30 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D} and zoom in on the railing extension.

The railing now extends onto the landing.

Modify the railing extension parameters
31 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 32 On the Options Bar, click .

33 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select No Connector for Tangent Joins. 35 Click OK twice.

Creating Stairs | 229

36 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 37 On the Options Bar, click .

38 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 39 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Add Vertical/Horizontal Segments for Tangent Joins, and click Edit for Baluster Placement. 40 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Posts, in row 2, select None for Baluster Family. 41 Click OK three times.

42 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the extended railing. 43 On the Options Bar, click Edit. 44 Select the 440 mm railing extension sketch line segment. 45 On the Options Bar, select Custom for Height Correction and enter 170 mm. 46 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

230 | Chapter 8 Stairs

47 On the File menu, click Save. 48 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run.

Creating the Emergency Exit Stair Run
In this exercise, you create a u-shaped run of stairs in plan view, and then add a railing and extend the stairs to another level in a three-dimensional (3D) view. When you are adding stairs that turn corners in plan view, it is easier to align the stairs if you mark the edge of the landing with a reference plane first.

Dataset
Continue to use the dataset from the previous exercise, Training_Stairs.rvt.

Draw a reference plane
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on the stairwell on the left side of the building.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 4 On the Options Bar, click and enter 528 mm for Offset.

5 Move your cursor over the left edge of the exterior wall and place a vertical reference plane to the left of the exterior wall face as shown.

Creating Stairs | 231

15 In the Materials dialog box. select Finishes . 17 In the Materials dialog box. 8 Under Dimensions. click Stairs. 20 Move the cursor up 2040 mm and specify the stair run next point as shown. 232 | Chapter 8 Stairs . 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 16 Under Materials and Finishes. and then click Stairs Properties. and then click Edit/New. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. under Treads.Paint Finish. select for Stringer Material Value.Paint Finish. Draw the exit stairs 19 Click to specify the midpoint of the landing edge as the stair run start point as shown. select for Tread Material Value. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Metal . Specify the exit stairs parameters 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select for Riser Material Value. and click OK.The new reference plane. and click OK. 14 Under Materials and Finishes. 12 Under Materials and Finishes.5 mm as indicated by the temporary dimension. 18 Click OK three times. 13 In the Materials dialog box. enter Exit Stairs for Name. select Metal . enter 915 mm for Width. enter 255 mm for Minimum Tread Depth. click Duplicate. Dark Gray Matte for Name. 10 In the Name dialog box. measured from the exterior wall centerline.Exterior: Precast Concrete Panels for Name. Dark Gray Matte for Name. and click OK. is at 864.

21 Move the cursor to the right and specify the intersection of the next-to-last riser line and the reference plane as the stair run next point as shown. 22 Drag the cursor down and specify the intersection of the landing edge and the reference plane as the stair run endpoint as shown. The exit stair run layout is complete. Creating Stairs | 233 .

234 | Chapter 8 Stairs . expand Views (all). and double-click Exit Stairs. View the exit stairs 24 In the Project Browser. 25 Zoom in on the exit stairwell. and the exit door.23 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 26 Hold CTRL and select two of the exterior walls of the exit stairwell. expand 3D Views.

Round1 : 25mm for Baluster Family. The selected objects are hidden. select Railing : 900mm Pipe. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Object. click Edit/New. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. select M_Baluster . 30 In the Type Selector. 29 On the Design Bar.27 On the View Control Bar. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. 31 On the Options Bar. and select both railings. under Construction. and the exit stairs are visible. Creating Stairs | 235 . click . 34 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box. click Modify. hold down CTRL. 35 Click OK three times. under Posts. in row 2. Specify a new railing type 28 Zoom in on the stair run.

236 | Chapter 8 Stairs . Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run In this exercise. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Save. 40 On the File menu. and click OK. click . Creating a Semi-circular Exterior Stair Run. click Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate.Add another exit stairs flight 36 On the Design Bar. and select the exit stairs. select Level 3 for Multistory Top Level. 37 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. Turn on the display of the exit stairwell exterior walls and exit door 39 On the View Control Bar. under Constraints. you create a semi-circular run of stairs and then modify the winders and the railing.

Under Construction. and then click Stairs Properties. for Tread Material Value. enter 1300 mm for Width. select Monolithic Stairs. and double-click Level 1. expand Floor Plans. select 16 for Desired Number of Risers. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 300 mm for Stringer Carriage Height. Under Stringers.rvt. and click OK. select Concrete . and click OK. click Run. select 9 In the Materials dialog box. click . Under Treads. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. expand Views (all). Under Risers. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter 200 mm for Maximum Riser Height. 15 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Type Properties dialog box.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Stairs. enter 0 mm for Landing Overlap. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box under Dimensions. select for Monolithic Material Value. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Construction. 8 Under Materials and Finishes. Under Stringers. select 180mm max riser 275mm tread for Type. enter 5 mm for Riser Thickness. 16 Click to specify the midpoint of the concrete slab edge as the stair run center point as shown. select Concrete . 6 In the name dialog box. Draw the semi-circular stair run 14 On the Design Bar.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name.Cast-in-Place Concrete for Name. enter 200 mm for Landing Carriage Height. and click Edit/New. click OK. Under Treads. and click OK. enter 1 mm for Tread Thickness. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Training_Stairs. Under Risers. enter 0 mm for Nosing Length. TIP You can use the shortcut key SM to snap only to midpoints. and click OK. Specify the semi-circular stair run parameters 1 In the Project Browser. Under Risers. enter Semicircular Stairs for Name. click Duplicate. select Extend Tread Under Riser for Riser to Tread Connection. 11 In the Materials dialog box. Creating Stairs | 237 . 2 Zoom in on the exterior concrete pad above the north exterior wall of the building.

enter 1310 for Radius as shown. and click to specify the arc end point.17 Drag the cursor to the right along the slab edge. 18 On the keyboard. and press ENTER. as shown. 19 Move the cursor counterclockwise until the display indicates that there are 0 risers remaining. 238 | Chapter 8 Stairs . The semi-circular stair run is complete.

20 On the Design Bar. Creating Stairs | 239 . TIP You may need to select the outer railing and flip its orientation to align it to the pad. Modify the semi-circular stair run parameters 21 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. click Finish Sketch. expand Views (all). and double-click Exterior Stairs.

The underside of winder parameter is smooth. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Stepped for Underside of Winder. 26 Click OK twice.

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with no overlap. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the stair run. 28 On the Options Bar, click .

29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, enter 300 mm for Landing Overlap. 31 Click OK twice.

240 | Chapter 8 Stairs

The underside of winder parameter is stepped with a 300 mm overlap.

Specify new semi-circular stair run railing parameters
32 On the Design Bar, click Modify, press and hold CTRL, and select both railings. 33 In the Type Selector, select Railing : 900mm Pipe.

34 If you want to save your changes, on the File menu, click Save. 35 On the File menu, click Close.

Working with the Stair Calculator
In this exercise, you create two sets of stairs side by side within a new project. The first set of stairs uses the default settings to calculate the slope. The second set of stairs uses the stair calculator to calculate the slope of the stairs. After creating both stairs, you add dimensions to them to see how the tread depth and stair slope adjust based on the changes made in the stair calculator.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤  Project. In the New Project dialog box, under Template File, click Browse. Open the DefaultMetric.rte file located in the Metric Templates folder.

Creating Stairs | 241

Create a set of stairs using the default settings
1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 2 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click OK. 4 In the center of the Level 1 Floor Plan, click to specify the stair run start point, move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete, and click to specify the end of the stair run.

5 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 6 On the View Toolbar, click .

When you created these stairs, the slope was calculated automatically. In the steps that follow, you create a set of stairs using the stair calculator to define the stair slope.

242 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Create a set of stairs using the stair calculator
7 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Stairs. 9 On the Design Bar, click Stairs Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Industrial and Assembly for Type, and click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 12 In the Name dialog box, enter Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope, and click OK. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Calculation Rules. 14 In the Stair Calculator dialog box, select Use Stair Calculator for slope calculation. The Stair Calculator computes actual tread depth using the following Calculation Rule equation: X * Rise + Y * Depth = Z X is the value to multiply the actual riser height indicated by the stair properties; Y is the value to multiply the actual tread depth, and Z is the result that lies within threshold minimum and maximum values range based on either design standards or building codes. 15 Enter 680.0 mm for Z, enter 695.0 mm for Maximum Result for Stair Calculator, and enter 670.0 mm for Minimum Result for Stair Calculator. 16 Click OK. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 19 To the right of the stairs you created previously, click to specify the stair run start point, and move the cursor vertically upward until the stair risers are complete. NOTE When specifying the stair run starting point, try to align it with the bottom of the stairs you created previously. This allows you to make a better comparison of the slope when you view the stairs together in a 3D view at the end of the exercise.

20 After all the risers have been created, click to specify the stair run end point. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. Notice the stairs created using the stair calculator have a longer run than the first set of stairs you created. 22 On the View menu, click Zoom  ➤  Zoom in Region, and draw a zoom region around both sets of stairs. 23 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 24 On both sets of stairs, add dimensions to the bottom tread and the stair run as shown.

Creating Stairs | 243

25 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 26 Select the right stair run, Industrial and Assembly - Calculated Slope. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog box, notice the Actual Tread Depth is 332.2 mm. Within this project, the project units are set to display length dimension values on screen rounded to the nearest 1 mm. Even more exact dimension values are displayed to the nearest .1 mm where appropriate in the Element Properties dialog box. In this case, the actual tread depth dimension is 332.2 mm; it becomes 332 mm when rounded to the nearest 1 mm in the drawing area. The actual tread depth is determined by using the following Calculation Rule equation derivation: Tread = (Z - X * Riser) / Y Substituting with the current values (X = 2, Y = 1, Z = 680 mm and Riser = 173.9 mm) yields: Tread = (680 - (2 * 173.9))/1 Tread = (680 - 347.8) Tread = 332.2 mm 29 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 30 On the View Toolbar, click 31 On the View Toolbar, click . and spin the model as shown.

244 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Notice the difference between the slope of the two stairs. 32 On the File menu, click Close. You can close the project file without saving your changes. This completes the Working with the Stair Calculator exercise. This also completes the Stairs lesson.

Creating Stairs | 245

246 | Chapter 8 Stairs

Walls

9

247

Creating Walls
In this lesson, you learn about walls. Sketch wall segments, work with compound walls, and create new wall types. Create curtain and foundation walls, join walls to floors, and assign wall top and bottom attachments.

Sketching Walls
In this exercise, you use sketching tools to draw and modify straight and arc wall segments, and then add a floor with an opening.

Draw the first exterior wall segment
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.
■ ■ ■ ■

In the New Project dialog box, under Template file, click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box, click the training files icon. Select the m_Tutorial_Default.rte file located in the Metric folder, and click Open. In the New Project dialog box, click OK.

2 Zoom in on the center of the viewing window. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 4 Specify the wall segment start point, and drag the cursor to the right 2900 mm.

5 Click to specify the wall segment endpoint and select the dimension. 6 Enter 3000 mm for the new horizontal dimension.

7 Press ENTER.

The wall segment length is updated with the new dimension.

Draw the second exterior wall segment
8 Specify the right endpoint of the first wall segment as the second wall segment start point.

9 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the wall segment endpoint.

Both vertical and horizontal dimensions display.

248 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the third and fourth exterior wall segments
10 Specify the lower end of the second wall segment as the third wall segment start point. 11 Press and hold SHIFT, drag the cursor to the right 2400 mm, and click to specify the third wall segment endpoint.

NOTE Hold down SHIFT as you drag the cursor to constrain your drawing direction orthogonally. 12 Specify the right end of the third wall segment as the fourth wall segment start point. 13 Hold down SHIFT, drag the cursor up 2100 mm, and click to specify the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Stretch the fourth exterior wall segment
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 15 Select the fourth wall segment and select the upper drag control.

Observe that the first wall segment has an assigned lock icon that references the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint. 16 Drag the cursor up to 3600 mm.

Only the fourth wall segment is stretched. 17 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor down to 2100 mm. 18 Click the first wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint.

Creating Walls | 249

19 Select the drag control again, and drag the cursor up to 2900 mm.

Observe that the first wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment endpoint maintain their alignment. The second wall segment stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the first wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw the fifth and sixth exterior wall segments
20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 21 On the Options Bar, select Chain. 22 Specify the upper end of the fourth wall segment as the fifth wall segment start point. 23 Drag the cursor to the right 5500 mm, and click to specify the fifth wall segment endpoint.

24 Drag the cursor down 5500 mm, and click to specify the sixth wall segment endpoint.

250 | Chapter 9 Walls

Draw the seventh, eighth, and ninth exterior wall segments
25 Drag the cursor to the left 7000 mm, and click to specify the seventh wall segment endpoint.

26 Drag the cursor down 2100 mm, and click to specify the eighth wall segment endpoint.

27 Drag the cursor to the left 3900 mm, and click to specify the ninth wall segment endpoint.

Move the eighth wall segment
28 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the eighth wall segment. 29 Drag the cursor to the right until the centerline of the eighth wall segment aligns with the fourth wall segment centerline.

Creating Walls | 251

30 Click the eighth wall segment lock icon to lock the alignment of the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline. 31 Select the eighth wall segment, and drag the cursor to the right 2100 mm to specify the new wall segment location

Observe that the eighth wall segment centerline and the fourth wall segment centerline maintain their alignment. The third, fifth, seventh, and ninth wall segments are stretched as well to accommodate the new position of the eighth wall segment. Locking the alignment ensures that this relationship between wall segments is maintained.

Draw an arc wall segment
32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 33 On the Options Bar, click .

34 Specify the left end of the ninth wall segment as the arc start point.

252 | Chapter 9 Walls

35 Specify the left end of the first wall segment as the arc endpoint. NOTE Do not snap the cursor to 180 degrees.

36 Move the cursor along the preview arc wall, and click to place the arc wall. 37 Select the radius value, and enter 4900 mm.

38 Press ENTER.

Creating Walls | 253

Move wall segments by modifying dimensions
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the fourth wall segment. 40 Select the 3200 mm dimension value, and enter 4000.

41 Press ENTER.

254 | Chapter 9 Walls

Both the fourth and eighth wall segments are shifted 800 mm to the right.

Draw a diagonal exterior wall segment
42 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 43 Specify the midpoint of the fifth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment start point.

44 Specify the midpoint of the sixth wall segment as the diagonal wall segment endpoint.

45 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 46 On the Toolbar, click .

47 Select the left side of the fifth wall segment as the first wall segment to trim.

48 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to. 49 Select the lower side of the sixth wall segment as the next wall segment to trim.

Creating Walls | 255

50 Select the diagonal wall segment as the wall segment to trim to.

Draw a floor by picking walls
51 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor, and then click Pick Walls. 52 Place the cursor over one of the walls, press TAB, and click to select the entire chain of walls.

All of the wall segments are highlighted. 53 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch a rectangular floor cutout
54 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Opening. 55 In the Opening Placement Options dialog box, select the first option, and click OK. 56 Place the cursor over the edge of the floor until it highlights, and click.

256 | Chapter 9 Walls

57 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 Using the following illustration as a guide, specify an approximate location for the first corner of the rectangular floor opening.

60 Specify the second corner of the rectangular floor opening, creating a 1800 mm X 3000 mm floor opening.

TIP The cursor snaps to dimension values based on the zoom of the view. To get the rectangle to the exact dimensions, you may need to zoom in. 61 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 62 On the Toolbar, click .

63 On the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 64 On the Toolbar, click .

65 In the Dynamic View dialog box, select Spin, and then, while holding the left mouse button down, move the cursor in the viewing window to orient the view as shown.

Creating Walls | 257

This completes the Sketching Walls exercise.

Working with Compound Walls
In this exercise, you work with compound walls. Convert generic wall styles to new custom wall styles, add dimensions, edit fill patterns that display in section views, and apply surface patterns.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the m_Gallery.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

Access wall properties
1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 Zoom in on the upper part of the floor plan. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify. 4 Select the 200 mm exterior wall.

258 | Chapter 9 Walls

Enter 50 mm for Thickness. click . under Layers. ■ 15 In row 5. Click OK. click Edit for Structure. enter 200 mm Stud Wall for Name. and click Up. select Finishes . click Click OK.GRG (Glass Reinforced Gypsum). 8 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. ■ Creating Walls | 259 . Click in the Material field. click . do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. ■ 14 In row 3. and in the Materials dialog box. Click in the Material field.Exterior . click . Click in the Material field. and select Structure [1]. select Finishes . and click Down twice.Exterior Insulation and Finish System. . under Name.EIFS . click Insert twice. under Name. Click OK. 12 Select row 3. click Edit/New. and select Finish 2 [5]. click Duplicate. and select Finish 1 [4]. and in the Materials dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. 13 In row 1.Interior . 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. Add two layers to the new wall type 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. 10 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. Enter 135 mm for Thickness. under Name. 11 Select row 2. and in the Materials dialog box.Stud Layer. select Wood . do the following: ■ ■ Click in the Function field. Enter 15 mm for Thickness.5 On the Options Bar.

and click Select All Instances. and expand Basic Wall. click Dimension.16 Click Preview.200mm. 22 In the Type Selector. Assign the new wall style to the remaining exterior walls 20 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Design Bar. 260 | Chapter 9 Walls . 26 Select the upper horizontal wall segment centerline as the first dimension point. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. select Basic Wall : 200 mm Stud Wall. 21 Select Generic . Specify the view detail level 18 On the View Control Bar. 19 Zoom in on the left end of the new 200 mm Stud wall segment. select Wall centerlines for Prefer. The style of the selected walls is updated in the building model. expand Walls. Add a wall centerline dimension 23 Zoom in on the lower part of the floor plan. expand Families. right-click. 25 On the Options Bar. 17 Click OK three times.

select Wall faces for Prefer. Add a wall face dimension 29 On the Options Bar. The vertical wall centerline to centerline dimension displays.27 Select the lower horizontal wall segment centerline as the second dimension point. 28 Specify a point to the left as the dimension location point. Creating Walls | 261 . 30 Select the upper horizontal wall segment exterior face as the first dimension point.

34 Select the left vertical wall segment exterior core face as the first dimension point. 32 Specify a point to the right as the dimension location point. The vertical wall exterior face to exterior face dimension displays. select Faces of core for Prefer. Add a wall core face dimension 33 On the Options Bar. 262 | Chapter 9 Walls .31 Select the lower horizontal wall segment exterior face as the second dimension point.

35 Select the right vertical wall segment exterior core face as the second dimension point. The horizontal wall core face to core face dimension displays. 36 Specify a point below as the dimension location point. Creating Walls | 263 .

41 In the Import dialog box. The new Gypsum pattern is assigned to the gypsum wall board representation in section view. Assign a masonry surface pattern in a 3D view 49 In the Project Browser. select Custom. click New. 46 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 39 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. expand Sections (Callout 1). select Finishes . click OK. select Gypsum. 50 On the View Control Bar. select revit. and double-click Callout of Section 3. expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}.25 for Import scale. 43 Click OK twice.pat. 264 | Chapter 9 Walls . click for Pattern. 42 In the New Pattern dialog box. 40 In the New Pattern dialog box.Create a custom gypsum fill pattern 37 In the Project Browser. click Materials. and click OK. and under Cut Pattern. 47 In the Materials dialog box. Assign the new gypsum fill pattern to a wall layer in section view 44 On the Settings menu. and click Open. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Enter 0. 38 On the Settings menu. 45 In the Materials dialog box. Enter Gypsum for Name. click Fill Patterns.Glass Reinforced Gypsum.Interior . 48 Zoom in on the gypsum board representation in the wall section.GRG . navigate to \Program Files\Autodesk Revit Building\Data.Dense for Import. and click Import. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sand .

51 On the Settings menu, click Materials. 52 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks, and under Surface Pattern, click 53 In the Fill Patterns dialog box, select Model for Pattern Type, select Block 8x16, and click OK. 54 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 55 Select the low circular wall segment. 56 On the Options Bar, click . for Pattern.

57 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Structure. 59 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, click 60 In the Materials dialog box, select Masonry - Concrete Blocks. 61 Click OK four times. 62 Zoom in on the low wall segment. for Material.

Align a masonry surface pattern in an elevation view
63 In the Project Browser, expand Elevations, and double-click East.

64 Zoom in on the right retaining wall.

Creating Walls | 265

65 Zoom in on the upper left corner of the wall. 66 On the Toolbar, click .

67 Select the building wall edge as the alignment reference.

68 Select the CMU edge as the line to align.

The upper left corner of the CMU pattern is now aligned with the upper left corner of the retaining wall. This completes the Working with Compound Walls exercise.

Working with Vertically Compound Walls
In this exercise, you modify vertically compound walls and create and modify wall layers in sections view.

266 | Chapter 9 Walls

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Townhouse.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Access the exterior wall properties
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the right front exterior wall.

6 On the Options Bar, click

.

7 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 9 If the Preview pane is not displayed on the left side of the Edit Assembly dialog box, click Preview. 10 On the Preview pane, ensure that Section: Modify type attributes is selected for View.

The wall section displays at its default sample height of 6096 mm.

Creating Walls | 267

Assign split regions to the wall section
11 Right-click in the preview window and click Zoom In Region. 12 Zoom in on the bottom of the wall section. 13 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 14 Specify a point up 300 mm from the bottom of the wall on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the first split point.

15 Specify a point up 300 mm from the first split point on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the second split point.

Merge split regions in the wall section
16 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Merge Regions. 17 Select the upper split line as the region to merge.

268 | Chapter 9 Walls

The previously split regions are now merged.

Adjust the split line location
18 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 19 Select the split line, and click the 300 mm dimension value. 20 Enter 3680 mm.

Creating Walls | 269

21 Press ENTER. 22 Zoom out on the wall section.

The split line now occurs 3680 mm above the bottom of the wall.

Adjust the sample wall height
23 Scroll up to view the top of the wall. 24 Move your cursor over the top of the wall and press TAB until the outer boundary of the wall is highlighted (watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the interface to be sure you are highlighting the outer boundary), and then click to display the lock icon and the 6096 mm dimension value. 25 Click the 6096 mm dimension value, and enter 5500 mm.

270 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Press ENTER. The sample wall height is now 5500 mm.

Add another split line
27 Zoom in on the existing split line. 28 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Split Region. 29 Specify a point up 240 mm from the existing split line on Layer 1: Masonry - Brick as the new split point.

The new split line now occurs 240 mm above the previous split line.

Creating Walls | 271

Add a new layer to the wall style
30 Under Layers, select row 1, and click Insert. 31 In row 1, select Finish 1 [4] for Function. 32 Select for Material.

33 In the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Masonry Brick - Soldier Course, and click OK. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, select row 1. 35 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Assign Layers. 36 On the Preview pane, select the 240 mm high region between the split lines as shown. Place the cursor at the bottom of the region to select it.

37 Click OK three times. 38 Zoom in on the front brick wall.

The soldier course displays in the exterior wall.

272 | Chapter 9 Walls

Specify allowance for layer extension
39 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the front brick wall. 40 On the Options Bar, click .

41 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 42 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 43 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, on the Preview pane, zoom in on the bottom of the wall. 44 Under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Modify. 45 Select the outer boundary of the wall at the masonry brick layer.

46 Click the lock icon to unlock the masonry brick layer for layer extension. 47 Click OK three times.

Modify extended layers
48 In the Project Browser, expand Sections (Callout 1), and double-click Wall Detail. 49 Select the brick wall.

50 Using the drag control at the bottom of the brick wall, drag it down into the concrete wall approximately as shown.

Creating Walls | 273

51 On the Tools menu, click Join Geometry. 52 Select the brick layer of the wall as the first layer to join.

53 Select the concrete foundation wall as the second layer to join.

The concrete foundation wall is cut away to accommodate the brick course.

54 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 55 On the Options Bar, click .

56 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter -150 mm for Base Extension Distance, and click OK.

274 | Chapter 9 Walls

Add a wall sweep
57 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the brick wall. 58 On the Options Bar, click .

59 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 60 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 61 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Modify Vertical Structure (Section Preview only), click Sweeps. 62 In the Wall Sweeps dialog box, click Add and do the following:
■ ■

Select Sill : Sill for Profile. In the Material field, click Concrete. Click OK. , and in the Materials dialog box, under Name, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place

■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 3860 mm for Distance. Select Base for From. Select Exterior for Side. Enter -90 mm for Offset.

63 Click OK. 64 On the Preview pane, zoom in on the applied wall sweep in the wall section.

65 Click OK three times. 66 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), under 3D Views, double-click 3D perspective. 67 Zoom in on the front wall, and view the sill.

Creating Walls | 275

This completes the Working with Vertically Compound Walls exercise.

Joining Walls to Floors
In this exercise, you work with joining walls and floors in section view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Floor_wall_joins.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Draw the level 2 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2.

6 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 7 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 8 For all four walls, select the outer edge of the wall core. Use the flip arrows to toggle the selection. TIP You can select each wall or use the TAB key to select the chain of walls.

276 | Chapter 9 Walls

9 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, select Wood Joist 255 mm for Type, and click OK. 11 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 12 When prompted to cut the geometry from the walls, click Yes. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 14 Zoom in on the wall at Level 2.

The level 2 floor extends into the wall structural layer.

Draw the level 1 50 mmx255 mm wood joist floor
15 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Floor. 17 On the Options Bar, select Extend into wall (to core). 18 Select all four walls on the centerline (click each wall while pressing Ctrl).

19 On the Design Bar, click Floor Properties. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box, verify that the Type is Wood Joist 255mm, and click OK. 21 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 22 When prompted to attach the walls to the bottom of the floor, click Yes. 23 In the Project Browser, expand Sections, and double-click Section 1. 24 Zoom in on the wall at Level 1.

Creating Walls | 277

The foundation wall is trimmed by the level 1 floor. This completes the Joining Walls to Floors exercise.

Working with Foundation Walls
In this exercise, you create and modify concrete foundation walls and footings.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall_Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

1 On the Settings menu, click Project Units. 2 In the Project Units dialog box, click the button under Format next to Length. 3 In the Format dialog box, select Millimeters for Units, and click OK. 4 Click OK in the Project Units dialog box. 5 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

6 On the View menu, click View Properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Graphics, select T.O. Footing for Underlay, and click OK. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 9 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 10 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select T.O. Footing for Depth. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 305mm for Offset.

11 Specify the outside upper left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment start point, and then specify the outside lower left corner of the building as the first foundation wall segment endpoint.

278 | Chapter 9 Walls

12 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five foundation wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each foundation wall segment endpoint. 13 In the Project Browser, expand 3D Views, and double-click {3D}.

Create a new 610 mm concrete footing wall type
14 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click T.O. Footing.

Creating Walls | 279

15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. 16 In the Type Selector, select Basic Wall : Foundation - 305 mm Concrete. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 20 In the Name dialog box, enter Foundation - 610mm Concrete for Name, and click OK. 21 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 22 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Layers, in row 2, enter 610 mm for Thickness.

23 Click OK three times.

Draw the 610 mm concrete footing
24 On the Options Bar, do the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Select Unconnected for Depth and enter 305 mm. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. Select Chain. Enter 460 mm for Offset.

25 Specify the outside upper left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment start point and then specify the outside lower left corner of the foundation as the first footing wall segment endpoint. If a warning about the objects not being visible in the current view is displayed, close the warning dialog.

280 | Chapter 9 Walls

26 Proceed in a counterclockwise direction and draw the remaining five footing wall segments. Snap to the outside corners at each footing wall segment endpoint.

27 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click {3D}.

The concrete foundation walls and footings are now complete. This completes the Working with Foundation Walls exercise.

Working with Wall Wraps
In this exercise, you assign different wall wrap conditions to a window opening.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Wall Functions.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Creating Walls | 281

Assign window wall closure parameters
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom in on one of the level 1 windows.

Neither the interior nor the exterior wall components wrap around the window opening. 3 Select the window. 4 On the Options Bar, click .

5 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select By host for Wall Closure. 7 Click OK twice.

Assign an interior wall wrap parameter
8 Select the wall. 9 On the Options Bar, click .

10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 12 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Interior for At Inserts. 13 Click OK three times.

The interior metal stud wall with gypsum board now wraps around the window opening.

Assign an exterior wall wrap parameter
14 On the Design Bar, click Modify, and select the wall. 15 On the Options Bar, click .

16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 17 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, click Edit for Structure. 18 In the Edit Assembly dialog box, under Default Wrapping, select Exterior for At Inserts. Both would wrap gypsum and brick. Exterior wraps only the brick. 19 Click OK three times.

282 | Chapter 9 Walls

The exterior brick wall now wraps around the window opening. This completes the Working with Wall Wraps exercise.

Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments
In this exercise, you assign wall bottom attachments to a curved floor in 3D view and wall top attachments to reference planes in elevation view.

Dataset
■ ■ ■

On the File menu, click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box, click the Training Files icon. Open the c_Attach_Top_Bottom.rvt file located in the Common folder.

Attach wall bottoms to floor surface
1 Select all four wall segments.

2 On the Options Bar, click Attach for Top/Base, and select Base for Attach Wall. 3 Select the floor as the object to attach to.

The walls are projected down to attach to the floor.

Creating Walls | 283

5 Select the south wall. expand Views (all). click Attach for Top/Base. and double-click South. 7 Select the first reference plane as the object to attach to. and select Top for Attach Wall.Attach wall tops to reference planes 4 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations. The south wall is projected up to attach to the first reference plane. 284 | Chapter 9 Walls . 6 On the Options Bar.

click Attach for Top/Base. 9 Select the north wall. Creating Walls | 285 . under Elevations. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Select the second reference plane as the object to attach to. The north wall is projected up to attach to the second reference plane. double-click North.8 In the Project Browser. and select Top for Attach Wall.

This completes the Assigning Wall Bottom and Top Attachments exercise. expand 3D Views and double-click {3D}. 286 | Chapter 9 Walls . This also completes the Walls lesson.12 In the Project Browser.

they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. Like windows. For example. panel.Curtain Systems 10 Curtain systems are not walls. To switch panel types. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. grid lines. or you can use a specific curtain system command. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. To change grids. Unlike windows. This affects the entire curtain system. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. and they are not windows. you select the grid. and you can change these elements individually. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. you need to select a panel. you need to change the length of the wall. 287 . Like walls. to resize the system. and mullions.

click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. click Wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. click Open. click the Training Files icon. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in on Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. you create a curtain system using the wall command. 288 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Creating an Entrance In this exercise.Flat Curtain System In this lesson. Open the m_Curtain_Walls. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. 4 On the Type Selector. expand Views (all). and double-click Ground Floor.rvt file located in the Metric folder.

7 Zoom in on the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Flat Curtain System | 289 .6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown.

click Orient ➤ Northeast. 11 Select the curtain system and click . The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. top constraint. 290 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . 10 Zoom in on the curtain system you just added. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all).8 In the Project Browser. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. and double-click Southeast Isometric. top and base attachments. specify Up to level: TOP OF ROOF for Top Constraint. 13 Specify 1200 for Top Offset. Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. 9 On the View menu. 12 Under Constraints. and room bounding. and click OK.

22 Place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. click Elevation. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. and click OK. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Flat Curtain System | 291 . using curtain grids. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. You are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. 18 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. right-click on the elevation name Elevation 1 . 20 In the drawing area. the curtain system is a single glazed panel. double-click GROUND FLOOR.Right now. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar.a. and click Rename. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation.

SIXTH FLOOR. click Modify. click Modify. and click OK. 26 Hold CTRL and select the 3 grid lines you just placed. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. Click to place another grid line. Click to create a vertical grid. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Copy to Clipboard. 27 On the Edit menu. 33 On the Design Bar.23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 25 On the Design Bar. 292 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. and SEVENTH FLOOR. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. click Curtain Grid. THIRD FLOOR. FOURTH FLOOR. 28 On the Edit menu. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 29 In the Select Levels dialog box. one larger than the other. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. hold CTRL and select SECOND FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR.

you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. You do not use the Door command. 38 Using the same method. The segment line style changes to dashed.Next. The two segments are removed. Flat Curtain System | 293 . You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. you add a doorway to the curtain system. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. click Add or Remove Segments. Instead. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. and then select the segment above it. and on the Options Bar.

click Curtain Grid. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels.39 On the Design Bar. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 43 Delete the dimensions. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. 42 Place dimensions as shown. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. Use the following picture as a guide. 294 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. select One Segment. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. and lock them.

Flat Curtain System | 295 . you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. 55 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click Open. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. Now. The panel changes to a double door. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. double-click Entrance Elevation. 56 In the Project Browser. click in any white space to exit the editor. 49 On the File menu. This changes the graphics style of the view. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. Next.TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). They are part of the curtain panel category. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. click Modify.rfa. and click Wireframe. select M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. click . You will have to press TAB to highlight it. under Elevations. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 50 In the Doors folder. 57 On the View Control Bar. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. on the new curtain system you added. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. not as curtain panels. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. Next. These panels schedule as doors. 52 On the Type Selector. 54 On the Design Bar.

61 With the panel still selected. 66 On the View Control Bar. click System Panel : Solid. click . 65 On the View Control Bar. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. 60 On the Type Selector. 63 Click OK twice to close the Type Properties and Element Properties dialog boxes. 68 On the File menu. 296 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . click Wireframe for Graphics Style. Name the file m_rvt8_Curtain_Walls-in_progress.59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line.rvt. The glazed panels display in blue. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click Shading with Edges for Graphics Style. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. and the solid panels display in white. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. click Save As. 62 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall.

3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select All Empty Segments. however. Flat Curtain System | 297 . 4 On the Options Bar. You are going to change some mullion joins. because they reduce the doors’ size by their widths. 2 On the Options Bar. select Grid Line Segment. click Mullion. so you remove them next. there are a few that you do not want. select Entire Grid Line. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. 9 Delete the mullions below them. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in on the set of doors. 6 On the Options Bar.

298 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 13 Click the top mullion control. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. Two mullion join controls display.Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion.

Finally. 4 On the Type Selector. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. 10 Place the second point at the lower right side. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR for Top Constraint. Finally. click Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. you can also right-click and select Break at Join from the Join Conditions menu to break the mullion at both joins. Curved Curtain System | 299 . you add a curtain system using the wall command. click . you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. 8 On the Options Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 6 Under Constraints. 9 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. 15 In the Project Browser. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. click Modify. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Design Bar. 7 Enter 1200 for Top Offset. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click .TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. click Wall. 2 Zoom in on the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. and click OK. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 16 Save the file. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Ground Floor. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc.

double-click East. and then sixteenths. eighths. 14 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. under Elevations. Next. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. Divide the halves into quarters. You are going to use one of these snaps points. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. 16 Zoom in on the cylinder. click Curtain Grid. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 15 In the Project Browser. you place grids on the system.11 Finish the arc by clicking at the top of the arc. 13 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 300 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. Next. Remember to click from the selection except Curtain Walls. Curved Curtain System | 301 . select the bottom layer of panels. Using walls as panels 18 Using a selection box. you change some panels in the system.300mm. click Basic Wall: Generic . you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. 19 On the Type Selector. click Modify. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. to filter out all other elements 20 Save the file.17 On the Design Bar.

5 On the Design Bar. 2 In the Metric templates folder. 9 Select the extrusion. click New ➤ Family. .Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter 100 for Depth. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Metric Curtain Wall Panel. and click OK. under Elevations. and on the Options Bar. and click . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 8 On the Design Bar. click Model Lines. 6 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 302 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . specify Glass for Subcategory. double-click Exterior. click . 10 Under Identity Data. click Finish Sketch. 3 In the Project Browser. 7 Start the sketch at the upper lefthand reference line intersection and finish at the lower righthand reference line intersection.rft. click Lines. 1 On the File menu. click 12 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion.

click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. double-click FIFTH FLOOR.rfa family. 21 Select the curved arc curtain wall. All the panels change to the solid panel. and save the family as Curtain Panel .13 On the Design Bar. 16 On the File menu. 25 Highlight a panel in the arc. 14 On the File menu. and return to your project file. Curved Curtain System | 303 . right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. 24 In the Project Browser. and click Flip Orientation. click Modify. click Save As. 18 In the Project Browser. All fifth floor panels are selected.Solid. 15 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu.rfa. . 19 Highlight a panel in the arc. and then click . 22 Right-click.Pattern. 26 On the Type Selector. 23 On the View toolbar. right-click and select Select Panels along Horizontal Grid from the Select Panels menu. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. click System Panel .Pattern. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 17 Load the Curtain Panel . All the panels change to the custom panel you created. All fourth floor panels are selected. select Curtain Panel .Pattern. click curved curtain system. Hold Shift and spin the model so that you can see the The curved curtain system’s structure now matches that of the main part of the building. 20 On the Type Selector.

click Family Category and Parameters. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. For vertical mullions. 6 On the Settings menu. enter 8 for Sides. click Mullion.The finished arc wall should look like the following picture. click Lines. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel.rft. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 On the File menu. and click OK. 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. 7 Specify Mullion for Profile Usage. double-click Metric Profile. 27 Save the file. click . 9 On the Options Bar. 304 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . click New ➤ Family. double-click East. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 5 In the Metric Templates folder. under Elevations. and select Radius and specify 50 mm for the radius.

14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. 17 Open the m_Cylinder Mullion . Curved Curtain System | 305 . This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. click the Training Files icon.detail. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 On the File menu. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Visibility. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. 18 On the Design Bar. and click OK.10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. click Modify. clear Fine.rfa file from the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Detail Components folder. click Detail Component. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 11 On the Design Bar. 19 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. Click again to specify the ending point.

The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 37 Click OK twice. and click Visibility. 36 Under Construction. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 26 On the File menu.rfa.20 On the Design Bar. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 40 On the Design Bar. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. specify Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion for Profile. 25 Close the family file by clicking Close on the File menu. 38 On the Options Bar. 30 On the Modelling tab. 29 Click . it can be added as a mullion type. click Modify. double-click Southeast Isometric. 41 In the Project Browser. 27 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 24 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. click Save As. select All Empty Segments. clear Coarse and Medium.rfa family. You have placed more mullions than you want. and click OK. so next you remove the unwanted ones. click Modify to exit placing mullions. click Mullion. 31 Click . under 3D Views. and return to the project file. and click OK. 22 In the Family element visibility settings dialog box. select Circular Mullion for Family. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. 23 On the File menu. After the new profile is loaded. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. 33 Click Edit/New. click Duplicate. 28 In the Project Browser. 21 Select the detail component. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. under Floor Plans. 306 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . and click DELETE. 34 In the Type Properties dialog box. right-click and use Select Mullions on gridline from the Select Mullions menu.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. under Floor Plans.43 Save the file. you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. you learned to create a curved curtain system. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. and press TAB. 4 On the Design Bar. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. and a ruled curtain system. double-click TOP OF ROOF. 2 Zoom in on the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Additional Curtain Systems | 307 . place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. In this lesson. a storefront system. TIP To chain select all the walls. make custom curtain panels and mullions. and you can click to select them all. select Defines slope. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. All the inside faces highlight. click Pick Walls. and then apply those custom elements to the system. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Options Bar.

click Roof Properties. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. 15 On the Options Bar. 9 Under Constraints. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. Storefront System In this exercise. click System Family: Sloped Glazing for Family. 18 On the View Control Bar. 308 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . and click OK. click Shaded with Edges for Graphics Style. click Mullion. 12 On the View Control Bar. select Entire Grid Line. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system.7 On the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. 16 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. 17 On the Design Bar. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. 11 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 19 Save the file. 14 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Southeast Isometric. 13 Zoom in on the skylight. click Modify. 10 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box.

This curtain wall cuts the original wall. Additional Curtain Systems | 309 . 2 Zoom in on the wall at the eastern-most area of the model. 4 On the Type Selector. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. under Floor Plans. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Unconnected for Height. 5 On the Options Bar. and enter 2400. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Wall.

under 3D Views. and the Spacing (Grid 1) is set to 1524 mm. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. 11 Zoom in on the new storefront wall. The Justification (Grid 1) specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. By setting the Angle (Grid 1) value. double-click Southeast Isometric. Click OK. click Modify. The type parameters under the Pattern heading create the predefined layout. Justification (Grid 1). and press ENTER. 14 After you have looked at the Pattern parameters. and click . 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. see the Revit Building help. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. or end. This means that the panel heights will be exactly at a 2400 mm height. 12 Select the storefront wall. 13 Click Edit/New to open the Type Properties dialog box. The Grid 2 counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. even if the wall height changes. For this wall. 310 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . the Layout (Grid 1) is set to Maximum Spacing. and the Spacing (Grid 2) is set to 2400 mm. This specifies an exact length for the wall. The Offset (Grid 1) is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. You see these same parameters for Grid 2. which is specified in the type.8 Click the temporary dimension. To see how the grid layout is defined. The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. Angle (Grid 1). The Layout (Grid 2) is set to Fixed Distance. 10 In the Project Browser. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. center. enter 10200 mm. enter 45 for Angle (Grid 1) and 15 for Angle (Grid 2). 9 On the Design Bar. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog box and return to the Element Properties dialog box that displays the instance parameters. Under the Pattern heading. and Offset (Grid 1). The Number (Grid 1) is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. you find Number (Grid 1).

This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. 17 Select a curtain grid. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. click Hidden Line for Graphics Style. Additional Curtain Systems | 311 . In this exercise. 18 Save the file. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. 1 In the Project Browser. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise.16 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. double-click Southeast Isometric. 3 On the View Control Bar. and select All Empty Segments on the Options Bar. under 3D Views. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Mullion.

8 Select the highlighted line. 312 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems . A panel between the 2 lines is created. and highlight the thin line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. making sure Thin Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the thin line. 6 Click the highlighted line. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level.5 Place the cursor at the bottom edge of the SECOND FLOOR.

Additional Curtain Systems | 313 .A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. embed a curtain system inside another wall. quarters. and define a ruled curtain system. Finally. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 12 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. 15 On the Type Selector. 9 Select the panel. click System Panel : Solid. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. 16 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 10 Click OK to close the Element Properties dialog box. click Curtain Grid. and then eighths. quarters. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. and click . 14 Highlight a top level glazed panel. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. right-click and use Select Panels along Grid 2 from the Select Panels menu. 17 Save the file. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 13 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. and then eighths. Next. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system.

314 | Chapter 10 Curtain Systems .

section. begin by first creating sheets. 315 . The model views that you can add to sheets include plan. usually contain a title block. elevation. you can add different views of the building model directly to the sheet. and schedules. three-dimensional views. Depending on the type of drawing that you want to create. Sheets are defined by borders. and are accessible from the Project Browser.Creating Drawings 11 In this tutorial. To create a printed or plotted set of drawings from the views in your building model. which are a type of view in a project. you learn how to create drawings from a building information model in an Autodesk Revit Building project.

you learn how to create sheets within an Revit Building project. Next. You turn off the visibility of the furniture in the duplicated view to create a floor plan view and rename the original view as the furniture plan. click the Training Files icon. Creating a Drawing Sheet In this exercise. adjust the view scale. You then add the floor plan view to the sheet. The project used in the following exercises is a small office building model. you enter the project information and create a drawing sheet with a title block that displays the project information. you create a drawing sheet that includes a floor plan of the first level of the building model. and observe that the changes are made in the floor and furniture plan views of the building model. how to create new views from a building model. Open m_Drawing_Exercise located in the Metric folder. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. click Open. You also reorient the swing of one of the doors in the floor plan view on the sheet. and dimension the exterior walls of the building to complete the floor plan drawing sheet. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 316 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . You begin by duplicating an existing floor plan view that includes furniture.Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. how to add views to the sheets. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.

enter Level 1 Furniture. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 317 . A copy of the Level 1 Floor plan view is displayed in the Project Browser. 2 Under Floor Plans. 5 In the Project Browser. 3 Right-click Copy of Level 1. click the Model Categories tab. Casework. expand Views (all). Casework. furniture. Turn off visibility for casework. and specialty equipment are no longer displayed in the Level 1 floor plan view. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 9 Under Visibility. furniture. and click Rename. and click OK. Enter the project information to display in the title block of the drawing sheet 11 On the Settings menu. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. and specialty equipment continue to display in the Level 1 Furniture plan. and expand Floor Plans. and specialty equipment in the Level 1 Floor Plan view 6 On the View menu. 8 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. lighting fixtures. double-click Level 1 to redisplay the floor plan. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 10 Click OK. right-click Level 1. and click Duplicate. click Edit for Project Address.Copy the Level 1 floor plan view to create a Level 1 Furniture plan view 1 In the Project Browser. click Visibility/Graphics. click Project Information. The changes in visibility are applied to this view only. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. furniture.

Enter Client Approved for Project Status. 318 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 15 Continue to change the remaining type parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 31 March. Smith for Client Name. 2005 for Project Issue Date. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. click Sheet. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. 16 Click OK. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. select A0 metric. Enter Residence for Project Name. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. and click OK. The text fields of the title block on the sheet automatically display the corresponding project information that you entered in step 14. 17 On View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. 18 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. Enter J.13 In the Edit Text dialog box. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. right-click. MA 12345 14 Click OK.

NOTE The Project Path parameter in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. 23 Ground Floor Plan is displayed in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. enter Ground Floor Plan for Sheet Name. on the Options Bar. click Modify. under Identity Data. click . 20 On the Design Bar. 19 In the Project Browser. but the scale of the view is too small for the drawing sheet. and you can modify it within the sheet by activating the Level 1 floor plan view and changing its scale. and click OK. The Level 1 floor plan view is displayed on the drawing sheet. select Floor Plan: Level 1. 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all).Unnamed. 25 In the Views dialog box. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 When the title block highlights. and click to place the view in the center of the drawing sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 319 . click Add View. and select the title block. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A101 . 26 Move the cursor to the center of the drawing sheet. View scale is a property of the view. and click Add View to Sheet.

The border and the title block are no longer grayed out. and click View Properties. 32 Select the viewport. 320 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . click Activate View. The border and title block are grayed out. and drag the grips that display on the scale to lengthen it. Center the view on the sheet and reposition the drawing scale 30 On the View menu. right-click. and click View Properties. and click OK. on the View menu. select 1:20 for View Scale. indicating the view is deactivated. under Graphics. Any changes that you make to it on the sheet while it is active display when you open the Level 1 floor plan view.27 With the view selected. 29 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Deactivate View. click Viewport : Title w Line. The scale of the view on the sheet changes. 33 Drag the viewport to the center of the drawing sheet. 31 Select the viewport and from the Type Selector. you would see that the scale of the Level 1 floor plan view is now 1:20. If you were to open the Level 1 floor plan view. 28 Right-click the view. indicating that the Level 1 floor plan View is active and you can modify it.

■ 38 Dimension the west exterior wall of the building by selecting the outer faces of the north and south exterior walls and placing the dimension to the left of the west wall. and click Activate View. Reorient the door in the upper exterior wall 39 On the Design Bar. click . Move the cursor above the north exterior wall. 37 Dimension the north wall of the building: ■ Select the outer face of the west exterior vertical wall. as shown in the following illustration. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. click Modify. 36 On the Options Bar. This creates aligned dimensions that originate at the wall faces. and then select the outer face of the east exterior vertical wall. 40 Click the control arrows until the door swings open to the interior. and select the door on the north exterior wall (in the upper right corner).Dimension the exterior walls of the building 34 Right-click on the viewport on the drawing sheet. as shown in the following illustration. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 321 . and select Wall faces for Prefer. 35 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

42 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Adding a Sheet to the Project. When you change the geometry of the building model while the view is activated. but the door reflects the change you made to its orientation in the Level 1 floor plan. The two dimensions that you added to the view in the previous steps have been added to this view. 322 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . right-click. 43 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. the change is also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. however. double-click Level 1. are specific to the view in which they are created. The dimensions that you added to the Level 1 floor plan view are not displayed. Dimensions. double-click Level 1 Furniture.41 Select the view. and the door is updated. This means that when you reoriented the door swing in the Level 1 floor plan. the changes are made within the building model and not restricted to the current view. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Deactivate View.

Furniture Plan Level 1 is displayed in the title block as the sheet name. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 323 . The sheet is incrementally named A102. A102 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog box.Furniture Plan Level 1. you add a new sheet to the project. is displayed. click Sheet. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 3 Select the title block. Add a new sheet to the project 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select A0 metric. In the Project Browser. under Identity Data. and on the Options Bar. add the furniture plan view.Adding a Sheet to the Project In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. under Sheets (all). m_Drawing_Exercise. and click OK. click . and adjust the scale of the view to create a furniture plan drawing. enter Furniture Plan Level 1 for Sheet Name. the new sheet.rvt.

right-click on the view on sheet A102. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet In this exercise. double-click Level 1 Furniture. under Sheets (all). 4 In the Type Selector. 6 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Project Browser.Change the scale of the view before you add it to the sheet 5 In the Project Browser. You change a lamp type and the length of an interior wall in the furniture plan view on Sheet A102. and select 1:20. click and drag Level 1 Furniture onto the sheet. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. and click to place the view.Furniture Plan Level 1. 7 In the Project Browser. and select the lamp next to the lounge chair. double-click A102 . Change the lamp type in the furniture plan 1 In the drawing area. click Modify. verify that M_Floor Lamp 2 : 150 watt Incandescent is displayed.rvt. and click Activate View. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet. under Floor Plans. m_Drawing_Exercise. click the scale value. 3 On the Design Bar. 9 Center the cursor in the drawing area of the sheet. 5 Select M_Floor Lamp 1 : 100watt Halogen in the Type Selector to change the lamp type. 2 Zoom in on the lower left corner of the building. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and then observe that the changes are also made in the Level 1 Furniture plan. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. 324 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

enter 5200 mm. 7 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Window menu. The desk. and the wall position in Sheet A102 are reflected in the Level 1 Furniture plan view. chair. and press ENTER. 11 Select the same wall you selected in step 8 to view the change in dimension. 8 Select the wall as shown in the following illustration. and notice that Moves with Nearby Elements is selected in the Options Bar. furniture. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 325 . select Floor Plan: Level 1 Furniture. Creating New Views to Add to Sheets. and file cabinet adjacent to the wall move when the wall is resized. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. The changes made to the lamp. click Modify. 9 Click the temporary dimension value of the distance between the wall and the centerline of the exterior horizontal wall.6 Select one of the furniture components.

326 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . and move it to the position shown in the following illustration. 5 Select the blue border grip adjacent to the view tag.Creating New Views to Add to Sheets In this exercise. click Callout. and section views of the building model and add them to a single drawing sheet. and select the dashed callout view border. double-click Level 1 Furniture. m_Drawing_Exercise. click Modify. 3 Draw a rectangle around the room in the lower left corner of the drawing to define the boundaries of the room. callout. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. A callout tag is placed inside the walls of the building model. 4 On the Design Bar. you learn how to create new elevation.rvt. under Floor Plans. Create a callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and click to place the view. and double-click the callout tag to display the callout view. Change the callout view scale. The new sheet. A103 . 12 Move the cursor to the upper left corner of the sheet. select Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture. click Add View. click Sheet.6 On the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. and select 1:20.Unnamed. click the scale value. select A0 Metric. and click OK. 8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. position the view. 9 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 11 In the Views dialog box. TIP You can also drag the Floor Plan: Callout of Level 1 Furniture view from the Project Browser to place it on the sheet. and add the callout view to a new sheet 7 On the View Control Bar. 10 On the View tab of the Design Bar. is displayed under Sheets (all) in the Project Browser. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 327 . click Modify.

select the elevation symbol arrow.13 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click to place the elevation symbol. and place it on the sheet 15 Adjust your zoom to display the lower left corner of the view. The tag now displays the drawing sheet and detail number. 328 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . click Elevation. 18 On the Design Bar. 14 Zoom in around the view tag of the callout. 16 On the View tab of the Design Bar. the elevation symbol points to the closest wall. and zoom out to view the elevation extents. 17 Move the cursor to the lower left room. double-click Level 1 Furniture. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor in the drawing area. click Modify. Create a new elevation view. The elevation extents do not display when you select the body of the elevation symbol. As you move the cursor. center it in the room so that it points north.

21 In the Project Browser under Views (all). and click Add View to Sheet. select Elevation: Elevation 1 . click Add View. expand Elevations. The symbol is displayed as in the following illustration. 25 Click to place the elevation next to the callout view on the drawing sheet. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 329 . 20 Select the box under the elevation symbol to create a new elevation view 180 degrees from the first elevation view you created when you placed the elevation symbol.c.19 Select the body of the elevation symbol. Add the new elevation views to sheet A103 22 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). and notice that two new elevation views display: Elevation 1 . 24 In the Views dialog box.a. double-click A103 .a and Elevation 1 .Unnamed. 23 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

and add it to the sheet 29 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click A102 . 30 Zoom in on the right side of the building.26 Add Elevation 1 . 330 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .c to the sheet either with the Add View command or by dragging it from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 28 Zoom in on the elevation tag in the lower left room. Create a section view. double-click Level 1 Furniture. The sheet (drawing) number and detail IDs of the views are displayed in the symbol. 27 In the Project Browser.Furniture Plan Level 1. under Sheets (all).

click Section. 33 Add a section line that cuts through the right side of the building: ■ Click outside the north exterior wall of the building to place the start point of the section line and the section head (section tag). 32 In the Options Bar. Move the cursor down and click outside of the south exterior wall of the building to place the section tail and complete the section line. select 1:50 for Scale. ■ 34 Click the arrows at the head of the section line to flip the section so it points to the west.31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project | 331 .

and sections. modify the building model from your sheets. The drawing sheet is now complete. and click OK. you learned how to create new drawing sheets. By completing the exercises in this lesson. 41 Enter 25 for Scale Value. and click View Properties. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. 36 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click A103 . 43 Place the section view on the drawing sheet as shown in the following illustration. 37 In the Views dialog box. 44 If you want to save your changes. 45 Close the exercise file. click Custom for View Scale. 42 Right-click on the view. elevations. and click Activate View. under Graphics. on the File menu. select Section: Section 1. click Add View. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 39 Right-click on the view.35 In the Project Browser under Sheets (all). add views to your sheets. and click Add View to Sheet. such as callouts. 38 Right-click on the viewport. and click Deactivate View.Unnamed. and to create new views of your building model. 332 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

enter Symbol Legend for Name. 6 Add the following symbols to the legend view. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. On construction documents. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. Add symbols to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Upgrade : 6 mm M_Wall Tag : 12mm Door Tag metric Window Tag metric Using Legends | 333 . click the Training Files icon. 2 In the Project Browser. windows. click Open. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. Open m_Legends. you add the completed symbol legend to a cover sheet for the construction documents. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or noteblock. Finally. door frame schedule. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 3 Right-click Legend 1. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown.Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. click Symbol. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. and so on). Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them.Filled Level Head .rvt located in the Metric folder. expand Legends. and door frames. doors. and click OK. click New ➤ Legend. and click Rename. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. On construction documents. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Building building model.

enter 3mm for Name. enter 3mm for Text Size. click Duplicate. select Text : 6mm. 334 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 9 On the Options bar. and click OK. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Marker (Level name/Elevation in mm) Wall Tag (Wall Type #) Door Tag (Door #) Window Tag (Window Type #) Place the symbol legend on a sheet 16 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Symbol Legend. 17 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Type Selector. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. click . You do this by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. and double-click A100 . click Text. 18 On the Design Bar. drag it to the lower-right corner of the cover sheet. expand Sheets (all). 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click to place it. 15 Working from the top down. 14 Enter Detail Callout (detail #/sheet #) for the text note. 12 Under Text. click Edit/New. 8 In the Type Selector. you create a text type with the necessary size. click Modify to end the command.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area.Create a text type 7 Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. On the Design Bar. and click OK twice.

and click OK. expand Legends. 19 On the File menu. 20 Navigate to your preferred directory.Brick on CMU for Family. m_Legends_in progress. select Walls: Basic Wall: Exterior .rvt. 3 Right-click Legend 1. You then add the completed legend to a project cover sheet. enter Wall Type Legend for Name. Add components to the legend 5 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Wall Type Legend In this exercise.rvt. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. and click Save. Creating a Wall Type Legend. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Rename View dialog box. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. click New ➤ Legend. and click Rename. 2 In the Project Browser. Using Legends | 335 . 8 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. click Save As. 9 Repeat the procedure to place a wall of type Interior . 7 Select Section for View. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.138mm Partition (1-hr) directly below the first wall. click Legend Component. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component.The symbol legend is added to the project cover sheet. 6 On the Options Bar. name the file m_Legends_in progress.

16 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the remaining text annotations on the upper wall component. and click Modify on the Design Bar. 15 Enter (1) Layer 16mm GWB. 13 Click in the far left portion of the Brick on CMU wall to specify the leader start point. 17 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. verify that Text : 3mm is selected. click Text. 11 In the Type Selector. The text note with leader is added to the legend. click to add a single-segment leader. 336 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 12 On the Options bar. 14 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point.Add text to the legend 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

click to add text without a leader. add an identical detail line below the lower component. select Medium Lines. 20 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. select Text : 6mm.Cover Sheet to open it in the drawing area. 27 In the Project Browser. 29 On the File menu. You capture the wall type properties in the tool. The wall type legend is added to the project cover sheet. 22 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. Using Legends | 337 . Using a Legend View to Match Types.Add titles to the legend components 18 In the Type Selector. Place the legend on a sheet 25 Using extension reference lines. you use the Match Type tool to convert a wall in the floor plan to the component type used in the Wall Type Legend. click Save. drag it onto the sheet. 26 In the Project Browser. Using a Legend View to Match Types In this exercise. and enter Wall Type 1. draw a detail line that extends as far as the longest component callout. and then select the wall to which you want to apply the same properties. 21 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2. click Wall Type Legend. and click to place it above the symbol legend. 28 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Type Selector. double-click A100 . 24 Below the title text of the upper component. click Modify to end the command. 30 Proceed to the next exercise.

The open drawings are both visible. click Tile. 338 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 8 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the floor plan view. 6 Draw a rectangle around the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. click . select the wall type 1 component. Match a component type 3 On the Tools toolbar. select Medium for Detail Level. Tile views in the drawing window 1 Close all project view drawings except Floor Plan: Level 1 and Wall Type Legend. so that you are zoomed in to the walls. 2 On the Window menu. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. 7 Click on the wall at the top of the view.rvt. m_Legends_in_progress. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. 4 In the Wall Type Legend view.

Specify a revision numbering method 1 On the Settings menu. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. 9 On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. contractor inquiries. 5 Verify that Issued is cleared. Add a revision to the project 3 Click on the value for Release Date. When Issued is selected. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In general. the revision is locked and issued to the field. Open m_Revisions. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. For example. You can create a sequence of revisions. click Open. If you select By Sheet. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. click the Training Files icon. and enter Moved window and added second window to Living Room. Using Revision Tracking Revit Building provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project. In this exercise. or changes in building material availability. Using Revision Tracking | 339 . Using Revision Tracking. 10 Proceed to the next lesson. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. yet as concise as possible.The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 1 from the Wall Type Legend. 4 Click on the value for Description. click Revisions. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 2 In the Revisions dialog box. When you use this option. 6 Verify that Visible is selected. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. These changes can be due to owner requests. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. if the active revision is number 1. click Close. Using the table. and enter a date. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing.

name the file m_Revisions-in progress. and press ENTER. The selected window is moved to the left 900 mm. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. select the window. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. Revision clouds have read-only properties. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Modify a window 1 In the Project Browser. 8 On the File menu. In most instances. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project.rvt. 340 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . 2 Double-click Level 1 to open it in the drawing area. 3 In the small empty room. click Save As.If Visible is not selected. and expand Floor Plans.rvt. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. 9 Navigate to your preferred directory. 4 Select the dimension value to the left of the window. enter 1200 mm. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Revisions-in progress. 7 Click OK. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Sketching Revision Clouds. you make changes to the project floor plan. expand Views. including revision number and revision date. and click Save.

and click 6 Select the midpoint of the casement window as the start point. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 9 On the Design Bar.Add a window 5 Verify that the modified window is still selected in the drawing area. 11 In the drawing area. 16 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Revit Building is now in sketch mode. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. Add a revision cloud 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 7 Move the cursor to the right until the distance from the midpoint is 1800 mm. 12 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click near the windows you have changed. 15 On the File menu. on the Edit toolbar. m_Revisions-in progress. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified windows. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. click Finish Sketch. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify to end the command. Tagging Revision Clouds. click Save. click Revision Cloud. 8 Click to place the second window. 13 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. You can change the appearance of the cloud from the Settings menu. you load a revision tag into the project. Using Revision Tracking | 341 .

rvt. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. 8 In the drawing area. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Working with Revisions In this exercise. and because the revision is the first in the project. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. and click Open. the cloud is tagged as number 1. 9 Click to place the tag. Add a revised view to a sheet 3 In the Project Browser. on which you place a revised view. 3 In the Tags dialog box. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. 4 In the drawing area. click Tags. clear Leader. under Floor Plans. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. You then issue a revision.Load a revision tag 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. verify that A0 Metric is selected. 10 On the File menu. scroll down to Revision Clouds. and click OK. Create a sheet view 1 On the View menu. select Level 1. 6 Draw a rectangle around the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. 4 Click Load. and drag it onto the sheet view. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. click Save. m_Revisions-in progress. click OK. In the Tags dialog box. A new sheet view is created in the project. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud. 342 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings . browse to Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 2 On the Options Bar. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. Working with Revisions. click New ➤ Sheet. 5 In the Open dialog box. 5 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 6 In the Tags. you create a sheet view in your project. you create additional revisions in the revision table. Because you chose to number by project. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. you need to add one. Tag a revision cloud 7 On the Options Bar. click to place the floor plan. dialog box. click Tag.

On the Settings menu. and click OK. Create additional revisions 10 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. enter a name for Issued to. click New. NOTE After you issue a revision. You can continue to add revisions. On the Settings menu. you prevent further changes to the revision. 13 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. 11 In the Revisions dialog box. 8 In the Revisions dialog box. you can no longer modify it. 15 On the File menu. under Add. click Revisions. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. Issue a revision 7 After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. 14 Click OK. You do this by issuing the revision. 12 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. click Close. clear Visible for each issued revision. Using Revision Tracking | 343 . A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. click Revisions. 9 Select Issued.The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area.

344 | Chapter 11 Creating Drawings .

like a standard detail that you want to add to a library.Detailing 12 In this tutorial. and metal studs. 345 . you learn how to create details in Autodesk Revit Building. These components scale with the building model. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. In this tutorial. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. you also learn how to change the detail component display order and visibility settings in a detail to create depth and show varying levels of detail. plywood. using detail components to represent materials like lumber.

346 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In order to detail from the building model. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt located in the Metric folder. expand Floor Plans. The section line that you see in the floor plan indicates that a section view has been added to the project. click the Training Files icon. click Open. You create the callout view by adding a callout to the section view. you trace over the building model geometry. and double-click First Floor. The callout defines the extents of the callout view. In the callout view. Open m_Cape_House. The callout view is a larger view of the area that you define in the section view with the callout.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. expand Views (all). you detail the foundation sill of a small house. you create a callout view that references the foundation sill of the house. add detail components. Creating a Callout View In this exercise. Modify the section view 1 In the Project Browser.

3 Click the break symbol to create a gap in the section line.2 On the Design Bar. click Modify and select the section line. 4 Select and move the blue grips of the interior end points of the section line so the section line is displayed as in the following illustration. Blue grips and a break symbol display on the section line. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 347 .

select 1:5 for Scale. ■ Reposition the callout head 10 On the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. 6 Double-click the head of the section line to display the section view. 7 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The callout border and tag highlight and display blue grips. click Modify. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and select the callout border. 348 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Click in the section view where the lower right corner displays. 9 Add the callout by drawing a rectangle around the left side of the foundation: ■ Click in the section view where the upper left corner of the callout rectangle displays in the following illustration. right-click in the Design Bar. click Modify.Add a callout to the section view to specify the callout view 5 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the grip near the callout head and move it to the bottom left side of the view as shown in the following illustration. click Callout. 8 On the Options Bar.

Notice that the alignment of the level is locked to the site level. click View Properties. click Modify and double-click the callout head. 16 In the view. The callout view is displayed. 15 Click OK. 13 On the View menu. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ Enter Section Detail @ Foundation Sill for View Name. select the First Floor level line. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 349 .Display and modify the callout view 12 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Hidden Line for Model Graphics Style.

rvt. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. which means that any detail components. and insulation objects. you detail the view of the foundation sill. You start by adding a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside of the foundation wall. TIP If you do not see the Filled Region command. 350 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Filled Region. m_Cape_House. Notice that the Design Bar is now in Sketch mode and the model geometry is grayed out. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. Detailing the View In this exercise. select Chain and click . 5 Trace the region representing the sloped grade using the following illustration for reference. 4 On the Options Bar. sub-flooring. They are also view specific. 2 On the Design Bar. turn off the display of some of the Design Bar tabs. region objects. 3 In the Type Selector. TIP Enter SO on your keyboard to turn off snapping as you sketch. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. siding. select Wide Lines. Exact dimensions are not important. and an anchor bolt. and then add detail components to the detail that represent lumber. as well as detail lines. Detailing the View.17 Proceed to the next exercise. Create a filled region that represents the sloped grade outside the foundation wall 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Lines.

Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 351 . enter Earth for Name. 15 On the Design Bar. click in the Fill Pattern type parameter Value field. The earth fill pattern is displayed in the filled region. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Modify and select the two lines shown in the following illustration. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. NOTE You may have to zoom out to view the earth fill pattern in the filled region. click Edit/New. 11 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. click Finish Sketch to complete the filled region. select <Invisible lines>. 9 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. 14 In the Type Selector. 13 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. select EARTH. the pattern does not display. 12 Click OK three times. click Region Properties.6 On the Design Bar. under Name and Pattern. If you are zoomed in too far.

Add lumber detail components 16 On the Design Bar. 19 At the bottom of the dialog box. 22 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber Section counter-clockwise. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section 38X235. select M_Dimension Lumber-Section. 21 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 18 In the Open dialog box. 17 On the Options Bar. click . 23 Place the 38X235 Lumber component in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. navigate to Detail Components\Structural\Wood in the Metric Library. 352 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select the following lumber components: ■ ■ ■ 38X140 38X235 38X286 20 Click Open.rfa.

Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 353 .Section: 38x140. and place it in the detail view.24 Place a 38X235 lumber component as shown in the following illustration. select M_Dimension Lumber. 25 In the Type Selector.

28 Place the plywood component above the last 38X235 that you added as shown in the following illustration.Add a plywood detail component to represent the sub-flooring 26 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Type Selector. Add a plywood detail component to the exterior wall face 29 Place another plywood component on the exterior face of the wall as shown in the following illustration. click Detail Component. select M_Plywood : 25mm. TIP You may need to use the Align tool to place the plywood component. 354 | Chapter 12 Detailing .

and click OK. 33 In the Type Selector. .30 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. this parameter determines the appropriate spacing between the repeated components so that they fill the space that you select evenly. and click to place the lap siding. change the following type parameters: ■ ■ Select m_lap siding for Detail. click Repeating Detail. 41 Add the lap siding to the plywood on the exterior face: ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the plywood detail component. click Detail Component. 38 In the Name dialog box. When you place the repeating detail component. click Modify. click . 39 In the Type Properties dialog box. select the plywood on the exterior face of the wall. and click OK. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box. Add a lap siding to the exterior wall as a repeating detail component 34 On the Design Bar. enter Lap Siding for Name. until enough lap siding displays to cover it. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 355 . click Edit/New. ■ ■ 40 Click OK twice. Move the cursor up along the plywood component. select m_anchorbolt and place it in the detail view as shown in the following illustration. Verify Detail Rotation is set to None. enter 19 mm for Thickness. Verify Fill Available Space is selected for Layout. click Duplicate. Add an anchor bolt detail component 32 On the Design Bar. and click 31 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Inside. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box.

NOTE You may need to move your cursor above the crop region of the detail view to place the lap siding along the entire length of the plywood. Adding Detail Lines. click Modify and select the repeating lap siding detail component. 356 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Wide Lines. Select and move the blue grips on the repeating detail line to shorten or lengthen the lap siding. meaning they display only in this view. If you need to make modifications to the lap siding after you place it. 2 In the Type Selector. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. on the Design Bar. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. 3 Sketch detail lines to enclose the bottom end of the lap siding as shown in the following illustration. 42 Proceed to the next exercise. The lap siding is displayed along the plywood. Like detail components. you add lines to your detail. they are view specific. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cape_House. click Detail Lines.rvt.

13 Trace over the interior wall face as shown in the following illustration. select As underlay for the Display Model instance parameter. select . and click OK. and click . 11 In the Type Selector. The model geometry that displays underneath the detail components and lines is grayed out. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. click View Properties. 9 Add two more detail lines as shown in the following illustration. 12 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. select Medium lines. sketch a 20 x 100 mm baseboard. 7 In the Type Selector. 6 On the Design Bar. Create a filled region that represents the15 mm gypsum board 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.4 On the View menu. click Detail Lines. 8 Using the underlay inside wall face and floor as references. select Chain. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 357 . select Medium Lines.

and click OK. click Edit/New. 21 On the Design Bar. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. click Duplicate.14 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Gypsum-Plaster. 17 In the Name dialog box. under Name and Pattern. 20 Click OK three times. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 18 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Region Properties. 358 | Chapter 12 Detailing . enter Plasterboard for Name. click Finish Sketch to view the gypsum board. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box.

31 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 23 In the Type Selector. 29 In the Name dialog box. 32 Click OK three times. select Concrete. click Region Properties. under Modify Subcategories. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Add a vapor barrier 1 On the Settings menu. select Medium Lines. enter Concrete for Name. you turn off the display of the model geometry.Create a filled region that represents the foundation wall 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 28 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch to view the concrete filled region. click in the Fill pattern type parameter value field. 24 On the Options Bar. click Line Styles. 2 In the Line Styles dialog box. 30 In the Type Properties dialog box. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. select . Near the end of this lesson. you add a vapor barrier and insulation to the detail. click Filled Region. If there were no filled region to represent the foundation walls. 25 Trace a rectangle over the foundation wall. the region would be blank. under Name and Pattern. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 359 . 3 In the New Subcategory dialog box. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. click New. click Duplicate.rvt. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation In this exercise. and click OK. m_Cape_House. 33 On the Design Bar. Adding a Vapor Barrier and Insulation. click Edit/New. 26 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter Vapor Barrier for Name.

360 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 11 On the Options Bar. click Detail Lines. enter 120 mm for Width and 65 mm for Offset to center. select Vapor Barrier. click and enter 28mm for Offset. 9 Click the right face of the interior wall to create a line as shown in the following illustration.4 Under Lines Styles. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Break Lines In this exercise. Move your cursor down to the top of the 38x140 and click to specify the endpoint. 5 Click OK to complete the new line style. you add break lines to the detail. make the following changes to Vapor Barrier: ■ ■ ■ Select 3 for Line Weight/Projection. Select Black for Line Color. Add insulation 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 12 Sketch the insulation: ■ ■ Click at the top and to the right of the exterior wall face underlay of the wall to specify the start point. Select Dash for Line Pattern. click Insulation. 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. Adding Break Lines. 8 On the Options Bar.

7 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. click Modify. 2 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. Add a break line to the top of the wall section 1 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 8 Place the break line approximately in the center of the floor as shown in the following illustration.rvt. 5 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the view displays as in the following illustration. and select the crop boundary of the detail view. Add a break line to the floor 6 On the Design Bar. m_Cape_House. verify that M_Break Line is selected. 3 Place the break line at the top of the wall section as shown in the following image. select M_Break Line.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 361 .

click Modify. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added previously. as shown in the following illustration. and select the break line. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. NOTE You may need to drag the shape handles of the break line to resize it to the illustration. select Do not display for Display model. and click OK. 10 On the Tools toolbar.9 On the Design Bar. When you turn the display model off. click View Properties. 362 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Turn off the visibility of model components to view detail components only 11 On the View menu. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. click and rotate the break line until it displays as shown in the following illustration.

3 On the Options Bar. you add text notes to complete the detail. click Save As. select 4 mm text for Text size.rvt. 6 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.13 Proceed to the next exercise. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Enter the text. 4 Add the leaders and notes shown in the following illustration: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to set the location of the arrow. Creating a Detail from a Building Model | 363 . Adding Text Notes. click to create a leader with two segments. 2 On the Type Selector. Click again to set the location of the text box. on the File menu. click Text. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cape_House. Click again to set the elbow position of the leader. 5 If you want to save your changes.

The section line that you see in the top right corner of the floor plan indicates that a section view that cuts through the kitchen sink and cabinet has been added to the project. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. or can display in front of or in back of specific components. you can set only doors in a detail view to display in fine detail. A detail component can display in front or in back of all other components. while other model elements.Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). you learn to modify the display of detail components in your detail views. you change the order in which detail components in a detail view of a kitchen sink and cabinet display. click Open. Open c_Office_Building. expand Floor Plans. You also learn how to override line styles and detail level settings for each model element. For example. such as walls and windows.rvt located in the Common folder. 364 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click the Training Files icon. Changing Detail Component Order in a Detail View In this exercise. 2 Double-click the section line head to display the section view. display in coarse detail. Open the detail view 1 In the Project Browser. Within a detail view. The filled regions in the detail section view do not overlap properly. you can arrange the order in which detail components display. and double-click Basement.

Display the sink in front of the cabinet 3 Move your cursor over the kitchen sink detail component. The sink is now sent to the back of the drawing. click . 4 With the sink selected. on the Options Bar. on the Options Bar. The sink now displays as if it was in front of the cabinet detail component. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 365 . click . and when it highlights. Display the sink behind the cabinet 5 Select the sink and. select it. behind the cabinet.

Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View In this exercise. and overriding detail level settings. 2 On the Window menu. 5 Click in the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view and draw a zoom box around the furniture as shown in the following illustration. you change the visibility settings of several views by overriding line styles. Changing Visibility Settings in a Detail View. 366 | Chapter 12 Detailing . double-click Level 1. Display the furniture in the basement view in halftone 4 On the View menu.rvt.There are three stacked detail components in this detail: a sink. select Zoom ➤ Zoom In Region. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Tile. Open four different views 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 6 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 On the View menu. using halftone. c_Office_Building. and a simple fill pattern. Select the base cabinet and try the various depth options on the Options Bar. a cabinet. select Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.

expand Floor Plans. and click Apply. click the Annotation Categories tab. 10 Click OK. 16 Move the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box so you can view the floor plan. click the Model Categories tab. The furniture within this view is displayed in halftone. The door tags are not displayed. Changing Component Order and Visibility Settings in Detail Views | 367 . and select Halftone. select Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. and double-click Level 1. select Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 15 Clear the Visibility for Door tags. 13 On the View menu. 9 Under Visibility. Turn off door tags in the Level 1 Floor Plan 11 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 7 On the View menu.6 Maximize the window containing the Floor Plan: Basement view. select Visibility/Graphics. scroll down to Furniture. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 12 On the View menu.

All the walls in this view are displayed as coarse regardless of the settings in the View Properties dialog box. select Coarse for Detail Level. click the Model Categories tab. click Override under Line Style Cut for Walls. Select Solid for Line Pattern. Change the cut line style for walls in the view 19 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. The cut line style of the walls is now significantly heavier. 368 | Chapter 12 Detailing . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Override. and click Apply. 21 Click OK twice. 20 In the Select Line Style dialog box. The walls in this view display in a coarse level of detail while the rest of the floor plan is displayed in a fine level of detail. Select 8 for Line Weight. 18 For Walls. Select Black for Line Color.Display walls in coarse detail in the Level 1 Floor Plan 17 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.rvt located in the Metric folder. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 5 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn how to create a drafted detail. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View. expand Views (all). you create a drafting view that is not associated with a building model. Creating a Drafting View In this exercise. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. on the File menu. 4 In the Project Browser. Select 1:5 for Scale. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Building or by importing details from an existing detail library. Open m_Drafting_views.22 If you want to save your changes. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon. click Open. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. click New ➤ Drafting View. 3 Click OK to create the new drafting view. 23 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. you create a door detail in this new drafting view. Create the new drafting view 1 On View menu. named Door Detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. is displayed in the Project Browser. Creating a Detail in the Drafting View In this exercise. The new drafting view. enter the following: ■ ■ Enter Door Detail for Name. Creating a Drafted Detail | 369 . In the next exercise. The building model is no longer displayed in the drawing window because you have created a drafting view that is not associated with the building model. you create a door detail in the new drafting view. click Save As. and expand Drafting Views. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. After you create a drafting view. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet.

and then use the Split and Trim tools to complete the sketch. You can also use the Rectangles sketching tool to create the basic shapes. After you create a dimension. 5 Permanently dimension the door jamb sketch so that the dimension values match those in the following illustration. 370 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 2 In the Type Selector. m_Drafting_views. 4 On the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click the tab in the context menu. click Dimension. When the dimension value displays in blue. you can change its value by clicking Modify on the Design Bar and selecting one of the lines the dimension references. Create a drafted door detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. TIP You may want to use the Chain option when you sketch the door jamb. you can change it. right-click in the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. select Wide Lines.rvt. 3 Sketch the door jamb shown in the following illustration.

The detail with filled regions (the gypsum wall board with the sand drafting pattern) is displayed. click Edit/New. 9 Turn off automatic snapping to facilitate sketching in close detail: ■ ■ On the Settings menu. and click OK. click Filled Region. On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. Under Dimension Snaps. 8 On the Options Bar. select Sand. under Name. and click OK 3 times. enter Sand. click Snaps. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box. 21 Sketch the 50 mm x 15 mm door trim as shown. 14 In the Name dialog box. verify Drafting is selected. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 16 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. 17 Under Pattern Type. click for the Fill pattern type parameter. click Duplicate. and click OK. Creating a Drafted Detail | 371 . 19 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Wide Lines. 20 In the Type Selector. click .Create filled regions 6 You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. click Lines. click Region Properties. clear Length dimension snap increments. 18 On the Design Bar. 10 Sketch two 15 mm thick rectangles as shown.

and add 2 dimensions to the door trim.22 On the Design Bar. 24 Drag the door jamb dimension controls to pull the dimensions away from the detail. 25 Add an overall dimension of the door jamb. click Dimension. Adjust witness lines 23 Select each door jamb dimension. 372 | Chapter 12 Detailing .

Creating a Drafted Detail | 373 . and click OK. and click Hide Object from the context menu. click Detail Lines. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. 31 On the Options Bar.Sketch a door 26 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. and on the View Control Bar. click Detail Component. click Duplicate. 34 In the Name dialog box. 28 Draw lines that represent the door as shown. 36 Press the Spacebar to rotate the Lumber counter-clockwise. click . Select the desired dimensions. select M_Dimension Lumber 38X140. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the lumber. select Medium Lines. and click OK twice. 37 Place the lumber component in the detail. 30 In the Type Selector. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. enter 38 x 125. enter 125 for the Width type parameter. Add the dimensional lumber for the header 29 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click the Hide/Isolate command. TIP You may find it helpful to temporarily hide the dimensions in the view when sketching the door. 27 In the Type Selector.

TIP Rotate and move the bottom break line to adjust its masking element. click Detail Component.38 Stack another 38 x 125 directly above the one that you placed in the previous step to complete the header. 41 Add two break lines as shown. 374 | Chapter 12 Detailing . select Break Line. 40 In the Type Selector. Add two break lines 39 On the Design Bar.

46 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Creating a Drafted Detail | 375 . 48 Select Door Detail. and click OK. 43 In the Options Bar. click Modify to end the command. 50 On the Design Bar. Place the drafting view on a new sheet 45 On the View menu. click New ➤ Sheet. 47 In the Project Browser. and expand Drafting Views. verify that A0 metric is selected. 49 Click to specify an insertion point. and drag it onto the sheet. click Text.Add text notes to complete the detail 42 On the Design Bar. expand Views. click to create a leader with two segments. 44 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown.

Create a new drafting view 1 On the View menu. After you explode it. DGN. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog box. In order to modify it. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. under Layer/Level Colors. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. 376 | Chapter 12 Detailing . 3 Click OK. Select Custom for Scale.rvt. The detail that you import is in DWG format. DXF. select New ➤ Drafting View. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Import a complete detail in DWG format 4 On the File menu. you must explode it.dwg from the Metric folder in the Training Files. Enter 5 for the Scale value. 6 At the bottom of the Import/Link dialog box. and then click Open. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the detail. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View. select Preserve colors. 5 In the Import/Link dialog box. enter the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Rail Detail for Name. 7 On the View menu. The detail is imported as an import symbol. m_Drafting_views.51 Proceed to the next exercise. select m_Rail_detail. the DWG entities are converted into Revit Building elements.

The text retains the DWG layer color. Change the text color to black and add text leaders 11 On the Design Bar. press and hold CTRL. click Modify. 15 In the Color dialog box. 9 Right-click. and the text within the detail is converted to Revit Building text. and click OK 3 times. 12 On the Options Bar. click the button in the Color type parameter Value field. click . select black. and click Full Explode. click Modify.Explode the imported detail 8 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. click Delete Element(s). The text is displayed as black after you click in the drawing area. The lines of the detail are converted to detail lines. 10 If an error dialog box displays. and select all of the text blocks in the detail. and then select the detail. Creating a Drafted Detail | 377 . 14 In the Type Properties dialog box.

Add leaders to the text notes 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. click . A leader is added to the text note. 18 Select and move the leader grips to position the leader as shown. 378 | Chapter 12 Detailing . Creating a Reference Callout. and select the bottom text note. 19 Add leaders to the remaining text notes to complete the detail as shown. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. MET STUD FRAMING. 17 On the Options Bar.

Display the reference view 7 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). and double-click the callout. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating a Drafted Detail | 379 .Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. The section view is displayed. 6 Select the callout. 5 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble over the upper left door corner.rvt. select Reference other view. expand Sections. m_Drafting_views. it appears in the Reference other view list with the detail number and sheet number displayed after the view name. The callout head displays the detail and sheet information (1/A101) because the referenced drafting view is already placed on this sheet. and double-click Section 1. NOTE When a view has been placed on a sheet view. and select Drafting View: Door Detail (1/A101). The door detail that you drafted previously is displayed. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Zoom in on the Level 1 doors. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the door detail that you previously created. 3 On the Options Bar. click Callout.

8 If you want to save your changes. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. close the exercise file without saving your changes. 380 | Chapter 12 Detailing . click Save As. Otherwise.

Scheduling 13 In this tutorial. 381 . you learn how to create different types of schedules in your Autodesk Revit Building projects.

When you schedule building components in Revit Building. creating an instance schedule. creating a type schedule. or a schedule that lists every window in the building. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. You begin by creating an instance schedule. 382 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . you learn how to create type and instance schedules.Creating Type and Instance Schedules In this lesson. or you can group components of the same type into a single line item. You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. you can list each component as a separate line item.

Open m_Schedules. you change the window instance schedule to a window type schedule. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select Comments and click Add. 7 Click OK. click the Training Files icon. select Windows. Finally. or a schedule that lists the windows by window type. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. click Open. Creating Type and Instance Schedules | 383 . under Category. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box.Next. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. Create a new window schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Under Available fields. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 6 Under Scheduled fields. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 5 Using the same process. click the Fields tab. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar.rvt located in the Metric folder. and click OK. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. and click View. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. click Schedule/Quantities.

384 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Close. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. click Show. 15 Select Type Mark for Sort by. NOTE By clicking Show. expand Schedules/Quantities. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. 10 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog box. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. on the Options Bar. sorted by type mark. 16 Click OK twice.Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 8 Select any cell in the first row of the window schedule and. this can be a time-consuming process. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 12 Right-click on the schedule. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 11 In the Project Browser. and double-click Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. The window schedule is displayed. in large building models with many views. 9 In the warning dialog box that is displayed. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Other. However. and click View Properties.

and click View Properties. click Edit for the Sorting/Grouping instance parameter. on the File menu. click Save As. 22 Close the exercise file. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn to add schedules and schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. The window type schedule is displayed. 19 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. clear Itemize every instance.Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 17 Right-click on the schedule. 20 Click OK twice. you create a room schedule from the floor plan of a large building model. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 385 . 21 If you want to save your changes.

3 In the New Schedule dialog box. and click OK. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). click the Training Files icon. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Several rooms and room tags exist in the floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. select Rooms. and double-click flr 3 to make it the active view. right-click in the Design Bar. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Under Available fields. under Category.rvt located in the Metric folder. click the Fields tab. Open m_Schedules. select Number and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. click Schedule/Quantities. 386 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . click Open. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.

select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Tagged. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. next to Rows:. Add new rooms to the schedule 11 On the Options Bar. you define the font for the schedule headers. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 387 .6 Using the same process. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. because the room is not tagged with a room tag. click New. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. 10 Click OK. The room Number is 1. 8 Click the Appearance tab. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 7 Under Scheduled fields. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. 9 To the right of Header text. Next.

The second room is displayed at the bottom of the list and is numbered sequentially. and enter Conference to change the room name. 13 Select Room in the Name column for Room 29. 14 Select Room in the Name column for Room 1. add a second room.12 Using the same process. 17 Zoom in on the right side of the building. and enter 30. and select Conference from the list. Add two room tags to the floor plan 16 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 388 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 15 Select 1 in the Number column for Room 1. double-click flr 3. None of the rooms have tags placed on them.

20 Move your cursor into the large room in the upper right corner of the floor plan. click Room Tag. select 29 Conference for Room. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 389 . select 30 Conference for Room. and click to place the room tag. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. and verify that Horizontal is selected. The boundaries of the room highlight before you place the room tag. 19 On the Options Bar. and click Drafting. and double-click Room Schedule to view the updated room rows. 23 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. 21 On the Options Bar. right-click in the Design Bar.18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 22 Place the room tag in the small room across from the large conference room.

under Schedules/Quantities. click Room Tag. 28 In the Project Browser. select Auto for Room. double-click flr 3.Add eleven additional room tags 24 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click Room Schedule to view the 11 rooms that you added to the schedule. 27 Place the room tags as shown in the following illustration. 390 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 26 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Design Bar.

31 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 33 In the Element Properties dialog box. 34 On the Design Bar. The name in the room tag is now Circulation. locate the room with an area of 92.Modify room tags 29 In the schedule. click Modify. press and hold CTRL. double-click flr 3. under Identity Data. press and hold CTRL. and click OK. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 391 . click . and select the seven room tags shown in the following illustration. and zoom in on the room. 32 With the room tags selected. click Modify. select Office for Name. 35 With the room tags selected. under Floor Plans. 30 In the Project Browser. and select Circulation for Name. click . select Services for Name.11 square meters. and select the tags in the three remaining rooms named Room. 36 In the Element Properties dialog box.

392 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Floor Finish. press and hold CTRL. Enter Paint for Wall Finish. under Category. and click Add. and Wall Finish. 45 On the Options Bar. 39 Select Schedule keys. under Available fields. Enter Carpet 1 for Floor Finish.Add a schedule key 37 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. Define three new room styles 42 On the Options Bar. 44 Using the same process. 43 In the new row. 38 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Base Finish. 46 Add information to the rows so that the schedule displays as shown in the following illustration. click New twice to add two rows to the schedule. click the Key Name field. enter the following information in the row: ■ ■ ■ Enter Vinyl for Base Finish. and enter Std Office. click Schedule/Quantities. select Rooms. click New to add a row to the schedule. 41 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 40 In the Schedule Properties dialog box.

View the room schedule 54 In the Project Browser. click Edit for Fields. double-click Room Schedule. 56 Under Other. 58 Change the order of the schedule as shown in the dialog box below. click Modify. and click OK. under Other. 39) in the lower right corner of the floor plan. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 393 . under Other. click . 55 On the View menu. 48 On the Design Bar. 38. click Modify. 51 On the Design Bar. 52 On the Options Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. select Exec Offices for Room Style. 49 On the Options Bar. select Exec Offices for Room Style. click View Properties. 59 Click OK twice to update the schedule.Apply the new room styles to the room schedule 47 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click OK. 50 In the Element Properties dialog box. 57 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 53 In the Element Properties dialog box. double-click flr 3. and click Add. and select the room tag in the large conference room (29) in the upper right corner of the floor plan. under Available fields. and select the room tags in the three offices (37. press and hold CTRL. click . select Room Style.

you create a room color diagram based on the names of the rooms in the floor plan. Creating a Room Color Diagram. 394 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 61 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise.60 For the rooms in the schedule that are named Services. select Services from the list in the Room Style column.

and select the color legend. scroll all the way to the left. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog box. click PANTONE. click the color button for Conference. The rooms in the floor plan automatically change color. The fill color in the rooms named Conference are displayed as green.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. expand Floor Plans. 11 Click OK three times. Create a room color diagram 1 In the Project Browser. Change the fill colors that are applied to the conference rooms 6 On the Design Bar. click Color Fill. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. m_schedules. 5 In the alert dialog box. and double-click flr 3. 2 Zoom out so you can view the entire building model. under Views (all). A legend displays at the tip of your cursor. click Edit Color Scheme. and click the color green. 10 In the PANTONE® Color Picker. click Modify. 7 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Color dialog box. 4 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. click OK. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams | 395 .rvt.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE Because the next two lessons use common files. on the File menu. click Open. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click OK. 2 In the New Schedules dialog box. and click View. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 13 In the Room Schedule. and level. You also learn how to create a furniture schedule that includes room name. select Services for Room (10) in the Name column. click the Fields tab. double-click Room Schedule. you learn how to schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Building components. click Save As. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. right-click in the Design Bar. 396 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 4 Under Available fields. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. double-click flr 3.rvt located in the Common folder. Room no longer displays in the key/legend. select Walls. 16 Close the exercise file. graphics are displayed with imperial values. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. number. Create a new wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Categories. click the Training Files icon. 14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Open c_Schedules_2. select Project Units from the Settings menu and change the appropriate formats to metric. under Schedules/Quantities. select the following fields and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. The color diagram and legend reflect the changes that you made.Change the name of the single room named Room 12 In the Project Browser. To display graphics with metric values. 15 If you want to save your changes.

The Assembly Code and Assembly Description fields display in the schedule. click Edit for Fields. expand Schedules/Quantities. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 397 . 9 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 10 Click OK twice. 7 Right-click Wall Schedule. and click Properties to view the element properties of the wall schedule that you created.Schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes 6 In the Project Browser. under Other. add Assembly Code and Assembly Description to the schedule.

and select C1010115 . expand C10 .Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project within the schedule 11 In the wall schedule. expand C1010 .Partitions . under Views (all).Fixed Partitions. expand C1010100 . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project from the building model 15 In the Project Browser. 398 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .Partitions. click in the Assembly code column in the first row of the schedule. expand Floor Plans.Interior Construction. and then click in the schedule. and click . expand C . 13 Click OK. All of the walls of this wall type are updated. 14 Click OK in the dialog box that explains that the change will be applied to all elements of the chosen type. and double-click Level 1. 12 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box.Interiors.Brick Veneer w/ Stud.

expand C10. expand C1010. 20 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog box.Partitions . double-click Furniture Schedule.Drywall w/ Metal Stud. 17 On the Options Bar. click in the Assembly Code field. expand C. under Identity Data. double-click Wall Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. and then click .16 Select one of the Interior . click . expand C1010100. under Schedules/Quantities. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes | 399 . and select C1010145 . 22 In the Project Browser. Schedule building model components by level and room 23 In the Project Browser. 21 Click OK three times.5 1/2" Partition (1hr) walls.

click Sheet. under Other. Place the Furniture Schedule on a new drawing sheet 30 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 34 Adjust the row length in the schedule by selecting and moving the blue grips that are displayed on the top of the schedule. 28 Select Furniture for Select available fields from.24 In the Project Browser. select Room for Select available fields from. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 32 Drag the furniture schedule from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 Add Room: Name and Room: Number to the schedule. and then add Level and Manufacturer to the schedule. and click Properties. and click OK. click Edit for Fields. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : 30 x 42 Horizontal. 31 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. 29 Click OK twice. and click to place it. 400 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . Change the appearance of the schedule 33 Zoom in on the schedule on the sheet. right-click Furniture Schedule.

regardless of category. Creating a Multi-Category Schedule In this exercise. on the File menu. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Building multi-category schedules. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in pre-defined instance and type parameters either within family components or within the project template. The following exercise demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters.35 Split the schedule into multiple segments by clicking the blue break line that is displayed on the right border of the schedule. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. click Save As. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 401 . Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. These shared parameters can be added to any family. 37 If you want to save your changes. ensuring consistency across families and projects. 36 Select the blue crosses that are displayed in the center of each schedule segment to reposition the schedule segments as shown. The new schedule segments are automatically placed to the right of the original schedule and are top aligned. you create a multi-category schedule. and creating a multi-category schedule. adding the shared parameters to a family. 38 Close the exercise file. and are defined and stored in an external file.

2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. 402 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . add them to a door family. and click OK. Create a new parameter group to store individual parameters 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box. click New. make sure you save your shared parameter files in a location where other users can access it. Create a shared parameter file 1 On the File menu. Shared parameters are saved to an external file. 10 After you add the parameters. verify that Hardware is selected for Parameter group. enter Hardware. ID. If you are working on a network. click OK. and Lock Set. enter a file name. select Text for Type. The shared parameter file (TXT) is created. enter Closure for Name. 7 Under Parameters. create a multi-category tag that you use to tag a simple floor plan. click Shared Parameters. 9 Add three additional parameters. 3 In the Save As dialog box. click New. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Click OK if the alert box indicates that the shared parameter file does not exist. 5 In the New Parameter Group dialog box. Hinge. and click OK. You store all of your hardware-related parameters within this group for use in the project. click Create.You create shared parameters. and click Save. and then generate the multi-category schedule. under Groups. and assign Text for Type. Create parameters in the Hardware group 6 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog box.

Enter Chrome for Hinge.rfa located in the Common folder. under Parameters. ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Yale for Lock Set. 22 Save the file as NewDoor in an appropriate location. 20 Assign the new parameters the following values by entering them in the corresponding Value field. select ID. click the Training Files icon. and click OK. and click Select. 14 On the Design Bar. Enter 1 for ID. select Shared parameter. You are now working in the Family Editor. 19 Repeat the steps for the other parameters. click Add. The Family Types dialog box displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 13 Open c_ Door. click Family Types. 16 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 12 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 15 In the Family Types dialog box.Add the shared parameters to a family 11 On the File menu. 21 Click OK. 23 On the File menu. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 17 In the Shared Parameters dialog box. setting them as Type parameters. under Parameters. click Open. so that you can use it later in this exercise. and click OK. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 403 . select Instance. The parameters are displayed in the Family Types dialog box. Enter N/A for Closure. click Close to close the file.

click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and click Open. 33 Click OK. select Multi-Category Tag.rft in the Annotations folder. 35 On the Design Bar. 404 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . 28 In the Select Parameter dialog box. NOTE If you do not specify a filter parameter for the tag. select c_Hardware_Plan. ID). click Label. A multi-category tag must have at least one label with an external parameter set as a filter parameter. as shown. under Parameter Group.rvt located in the Common folder. 36 On the Options Bar. click . Open. This option ensures that this tag attaches only to a component with that same filter parameter (i. Use the multi-category tag in a project 40 On the File menu. 41 In the Open dialog box. the tag cannot attach to any component. and click OK twice. 38 Save the file as HardwareTag in an appropriate location. 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. and click Open. click Add. 30 In the Shared Parameters dialog box.e. 32 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 37 Draw a rectangle around the tag.Create a multi-category tag 24 On the File menu. 27 Click at the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog box. 39 On the File menu. select Hardware. click Select. 31 Under Parameters. 26 On Design Bar. click Close to close the file. 34 Zoom in to the tag at the intersection of the reference planes. select ID. select Filter parameter.. 25 In the New dialog box. click Lines.

Create a multi-category schedule 50 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 53 Click OK. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 405 . and click OK.rfa and NewDoor. Notice that the HardwareTag is reading the shared parameter that you created earlier and attached to the Door family. 48 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.42 On the File menu. and load into the project the multi-category tag files HardwareTag. 49 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. 45 In the Type Selector. select Multi-Category Tags for Category. select the multi-category HardwareTag that you just loaded. and click OK. click Tag. click Schedule/Quantities. select Multi-Category from the list. click Tag All Not Tagged to quickly tag all the components with the filter parameter.rfa that you just created. Notice that you can highlight only those components that have the filter parameter that you set earlier to ID. add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ID Mark Type Family Closure Lock Set NOTE Do not be concerned with duplicate ID and Lock Set fields. 47 Click to place the tag. 46 Move your cursor into the drawing window. 43 Replace any existing doors by selecting them and changing their type to the NewDoor type that you just loaded. 51 In the New Schedule dialog box. 52 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 44 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family.

click the Training Files icon. click Save As. The second schedule that you create is a wall schedule that calculates the cost of the walls in the project. based on wall area. click Schedule/Quantities.M_Single-Flush Vision: 915 x 2134 mm 3 . You use both filters and a formula to create the second schedule.The multi-category schedule is displayed.M_Single-Flush Vision: 864 x 2032 mm 3 . There are 11 doors of the following types on this level of the building model: ■ ■ ■ 5 . Open m_First_Project-West_Wing. all of the doors in the project would be scheduled. The floor plan is displayed. However. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules In this lesson. 54 If you want to save your changes. 406 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . you create a level based door schedule. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and double-click Level 3. on the File menu. Creating a Level-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise.UK_Single-Flush: SO 1010 x 2410 mm If you created a standard door schedule. expand Views (all). you want to filter out all doors that are not on level 3 to include only the 11 doors listed above.rvt located in the Metric folder. Create a new door schedule for level flr 3 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. The first schedule that you create is a level-based door schedule that uses a filter to exclude all of the doors that are not on floor three of the building model. you create two schedules. View the third floor of the building 1 In the Project Browser. 55 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

3 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Level. This filter checks each door in the project to see which level it is associated with. Verify Schedule building components is selected. click the Filter tab. and click OK. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. Clear Itemize every instance to group the like door types into one row. 12 Right-click the schedule. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Hide the Level field in the schedule so it is used only to filter the doors that are not on level 3 and not included as a column in the schedule 9 Click the Formatting tab. Verify New Construction is selected for Phase. Using Formulas and Filters in Schedules | 407 . and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Sill Height Head Height Width Level 7 Click the Filter tab. 10 Under Fields. 15 Click OK twice.Level 3. The schedule includes the count and type for only doors on floor 3. click Edit for Filter. select the following fields. under Other. 6 Under Available fields. select Doors. 4 Click OK. and it causes the schedule to include only the doors on Level 3. and click View Properties. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Level in the first menu. Select Level 3 in the third menu. 11 Under Field formatting. Select equals in the second menu. select Hidden Field. Under Name. click the Fields tab. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. and select (none) for Filter. enter Doors . The counts for the door types represent the door schedule for the entire model. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and specify the following options: ■ ■ Select Family and Type for Sort by.

and then under Field Formatting. Verify New Construction is selected under Phase. 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 7 Select Family and Type for Sort by. 408 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . The wall type information for each wall is updated when you enter this data. 9 Click the Formatting tab. m_First_Project-West_Wing. 12 Under Fields. click Schedule/Quantities. Create a new schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you create a wall schedule that provides a total cost of all of the walls in the project based on the total square footage of each wall type. m to more accurately represent the data. Verify Schedule building components is selected. 3 Click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. click the Fields tab. select Calculate totals so that the total area of the each type is calculated. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. select Cost. enter Cost/Sq. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula. 8 Clear Itemize every instance to group the like wall types into one row. 14 Since no cost has been assigned to these wall types. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Use the cost values in the following illustration. select the following fields. click once so the schedule represents only the doors on Flr 3. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. select Area. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Cost Area 6 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. select Walls. 11 Under Heading. Creating a Wall Schedule with Filters and a Formula In this exercise. The schedule is displayed. 5 Under Available fields.16 On the Standard toolbar. enter a cost value for each type in the schedule. 10 Under Fields. 13 Click OK.

27 Select Grand totals to have the schedule display the sum of any row for which you selected Calculate totals on the Formatting tab. Notice that there is no grand total displayed for the Cost/Sq. unlike shared parameters. 23 Click Field Format. They cannot be shared with other projects and. NOTE The /(1 m^2) in the formula is required to make the resulting value unitless. click Save As. 25 Click OK. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog box. Project parameters are instance or type parameters that you can use to schedule information specific to the project that you are working with. click the Sorting/Grouping tab. under Other. 24 In the Format dialog box. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click View Properties. Enter Area * Cost/(1 m^2) for Formula. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Total Cost for Name. Verify that Number is selected for Type. The schedule is displayed. Select 2 decimal places for Rounding. 19 Click OK. without the value it would have a unit of area. on the File menu. click Calculated Value. Scheduling Project Parameters | 409 . select Total Cost. Select Fixed for Units. you cannot use them to tag objects. 28 If you want to save your changes. Scheduling Project Parameters In this lesson. 29 Close the exercise file. and save the exercise file with a unique name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 20 Click the Formatting tab. select Calculate totals to ensure that a total of all the walls is returned. This is because you did not select to calculate the totals for that field. click Edit for Fields. 21 Under Fields. 17 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click OK twice. 22 Under Field formatting. m column.Determine the total cost for each wall type by multiplying the total area of the wall by the cost per square foot 15 Right-click the schedule. you learn how to schedule project parameters.

After you create the schedule. 4 Click OK. right-click in the Design Bar. either by entering it directly. 410 | Chapter 13 Scheduling .Creating a Room Schedule with Project Parameters In this exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Project Parameter. click Add to create the new parameter. Occupant. Open m_Office_2. Assign the new Occupant parameter to the project and create the room schedule 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you can add information to the Occupant column in the schedule. TIP If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not active. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. The new project parameter Occupant is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog box. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog box. and click Drafting. You begin by adding the Occupant parameter to the project and creating the room schedule to include the Occupant parameter as a column in the schedule. Enter Occupant for Name. you create a room schedule for the following office floor plan that includes the project parameter. 7 Tag the rooms as shown in the following illustration. click Open. Create a project parameter 1 On the Settings menu. click the Training Files icon. click Project Parameters. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. or by entering it in the properties of the room tag. click Room Tag. Under Categories. select Rooms to associate the Occupant parameter with the Room category. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 5 Click OK.rvt located in the Metric folder.

and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Area Department Occupant 12 Click OK to generate the schedule. and save the exercise file with a unique name. on the File menu. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 10 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. 15 Close the exercise file. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 11 Under Available fields. select Rooms to create a room schedule. The Occupant field is displayed in the schedule. click the Fields tab.8 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Exporting Project Information with ODBC | 411 . you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. 9 In the New Schedule dialog box. select the following fields. 14 If you want to save your changes. and click OK. under Categories. 13 Add names to the occupant field by entering them directly in the schedule or by entering them in the room tag properties. click Save As. click Schedule/Quantities.

The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. 10 When the confirmation displays. enter Revit_Project. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. select a location for the database file. 3 Click New. 13 Close the exercise file. instance tables include a “TypeId” column containing the ID of the instance’s type. under Database. These parameters are exported as well and contain the ID of the key element. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements.rvt located in the Common folder. click Create. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. 1 On the File menu. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Building exports. Open c_Schedules_2. 12 Click OK in the remaining dialog boxes.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. 9 Under Directories. 8 In the New Database dialog box. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog box. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. click OK in the dialog box. used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.mdb for Database Name. so that each table of elements includes an “Id” column. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. and click Next. and open the database in Microsoft Access. click OK. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. For example. Revit Building creates two tables for the following categories of elements: one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project (see below). under Database Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog box. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. 412 | Chapter 13 Scheduling . and click Next. Additionally. and some instance tables include a “RoomId” column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog box. 6 Click Finish. in addition to the Id column. click Open. and click OK to create the database. click the File Data Source tab. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types.

and how to annotate and dimension your Autodesk Revit Building projects. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.Annotating and Dimensioning 14 In this tutorial. 413 .

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you can relocate the project at a base elevation of 1500 m and define the levels as shared so that Level 1 reads 1500 m. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. and not 4 m. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. expand Views (all). and not 1504 m. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at sea level. After you define the levels as shared and relocate the project. 414 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . while Level 2 reads 4 m. expand Elevations. and Level 2 reads 1504 m.rvt located in the Metric folder. Open m_simple_house. Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. click the Training Files icon. Shared levels report an elevation value relative to an origin that you establish when you relocate the project. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 m and Level 2 is 4 m above the base elevation. you relocate the base elevation of a small house from 0 m to 10000 m. Project levels report elevation as it relates to other levels in the project. and double-click South. the elevation value of the second level of the house (4000 mm above Level 1) reports an elevation of 14000 mm. Level 1 reads 1500 m. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project.Setting the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. For example. For example. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. Setting the Base Elevation of a House In this exercise. You accomplish this in Revit Building by defining levels as either project or shared levels. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. if a project is built on a plateau at 1500 meters and Level 2 is 4 meters above the base elevation. click Open.

10 Select the Level 1 line. By entering 10000 mm in this step. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Constraints. By selecting the Level 1 line.Shared. select Level : Level . enter Level . The elevation of the other levels remains the same. you specify the new location of the project. The reported value of Level 2 changes to take the value of the global elevation into consideration.Shared. click Edit/New. If you did that now. and press ENTER. and click OK. click Duplicate. 6 In the Name dialog box. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. and you must create a new level type. you specify the point from which you want to relocate the project. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. 14 In the Type Selector. you would change the parameter for all the levels in the Project. 8 Click OK twice. Setting the Base Elevation of a Project | 415 . The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. Relocate the project 9 On the Tools menu. 11 Move the cursor above the elevation line. In order for Level 1 to report the global elevation after the project is relocated. click . only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. 7 In the Type Properties dialog box. However. enter 10000 mm. 3 On the Options Bar. The south elevation is displayed. select Shared for Elevation Base. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box.2 Select the Level 1 line. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 12 On the View menu. 13 Select the Level 2 line. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared.

17 If you want to save your changes. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your designs. 16 Using the same method. under Elevations. so it reports an elevation of 18000 mm. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. 18 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. permanent dimensions are created automatically.15 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. In Revit Building. double-click North. there are two types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Dimensioning In this lesson. 416 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. as well as other views of the building model. except when you sketch profiles to create families. define the roof level as shared. on the File menu. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created. click Save As. In this case.

that you can add to your drawings. Open m_Dimensions. you learn how to create and modify different types of permanent dimensions. 2 Without making any changes on the Options Bar. move the cursor over the top straight wall on the floor plan. multi-segmented.rvt located in the Metric folder. Create permanent dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Creating Dimensions In this exercise. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. and when the centerline of the wall highlights. click Open. select it. The different types of dimensions that you can add include aligned. and angular dimensions. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Dimension. radial. By default. click the Training Files icon. select it. Dimensioning | 417 . linear. 4 Move the cursor over the wall at the very bottom of the view. 3 When the centerline of the wall highlights. dimensions are aligned and snap to wall centerlines. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

6 Click the lock. 418 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . A lock symbol that is unlocked displays next to it. and click to place the dimension. and click to set the location of the dimension. Move the cursor below the lowest horizontal wall. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. In addition. an equal symbol with a slash through it is displayed. The lock displays as locked. indicating that you cannot change the distance between the referenced walls without first unlocking the dimension. indicating that the dimension segments are not equal in length. outside of the wall. An unlocked lock symbol displays next to each dimension segment. Create multi-segmented dimensions 7 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. The dimension displays in the drawing. 8 Dimension the four vertical walls: ■ ■ Select the four vertical wall segments sequentially. indicating that the dimension can be modified.5 Move the cursor to the left.

Move the cursor to the inside of the curved wall.9 Click the equal symbol to make all dimension segment lengths equal. 11 On the Options Bar. The slash no longer displays through the equal symbol. indicating that the segments are now equal. and click to place the dimension. Dimensioning | 419 . click 12 Dimension the curved wall: ■ ■ . Create a radial dimension 10 On the Design Bar. Select the curved corner wall to display the radial dimension. click Dimension. and the are dimensions permanent and constrained to each other.

and place the dimension as shown in the following illustration. 17 Dimension the curved wall again: ■ ■ Move your cursor over the inside face of the wall until it highlights. 420 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . the default dimension option. Select the inside face of the wall.13 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. click Modify. and zoom in around the curved wall. 18 Enter ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing window. The dimension is snapped to the wall center. click Dimension. 16 On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. click and select Wall faces for Prefer. select the dimension line of the radial dimension. and press DELETE. 15 On the Design Bar.

and depends on the cursor tracking behavior.You can now view the radial dimension within the floor plan. click and verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. 22 Dimension the vertical wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the top point on the exterior face of the wall. Dimensioning | 421 . click . Create an angular dimension 19 On the Options Bar. Move your cursor to the left to size the dimension arc. Create a linear dimension 21 On the Options Bar. as shown in the following illustration. The dimension is always constrained to either the horizontal or vertical axis. and then select the inside face of the vertical wall above it. and click to place the dimension. and then select the bottom point of the exterior face. Notice that the Prefer and Pick options are no longer available on the Options Bar. You can override the cursor tracking by toggling with the spacebar. The linear dimension tool has a more restricted selection filter so that you can select only points. 20 Dimension the slanted wall at the top right in the floor plan: ■ ■ Select the inside face of the slanted wall. and click to place the dimension. Move your cursor to the right.

24 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 Alternate the cursor position over the inner and outer bottom wall face. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. click Modify. including the wall centerline. for a multi-segmented dimension. in some cases. When you place dimensions. you learn to add. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis.rvt. 5 Hover the cursor near the center of the bottom wall. and press TAB repeatedly. 2 On the Options Bar. a different wall selection choice highlights. 422 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . because the Prefer wall face option is selected instead of the Prefer wall centerline option. Controlling Witness Line Location. m_Dimensions. but do not select anything. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Controlling Witness Line Location In this exercise. and change the origin of dimension witness lines. For example.23 On the Design Bar. select it. Each time you press TAB. 3 Move the cursor over the bottom wall. delete. However. 6 When the outside face of the wall highlights. Notice that only the wall faces highlight when you move the cursor over them. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall. Override dimension defaults 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. verify that Wall faces is selected for Prefer. you specify their origin on the Options Bar.

and select it. The dimension highlights and control boxes display on each witness line. 9 Place the dimension as shown in the following illustration.7 Move the cursor over the middle horizontal wall. click Modify. Dimensioning | 423 . press TAB until the wall centerline highlights. 8 Move the cursor to the top horizontal wall and select the exterior face. Edit dimension witness lines 10 On the Design Bar. 11 Select the dimension line shown in the following illustration.

12 Click once on the control box on the lowest witness line. 424 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . The witness line moves to the wall centerline. The witness line moves to the inside wall face. but do not select it. 13 Click the control box again. 14 Move the cursor to the control box on the witness line at the top wall.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. If you right-click the control box. 17 Select the outside face of the top wall. IMPORTANT Be careful to right-click the witness line and not the control box on the witness line. you learn to modify the type parameters of dimensions. The witness line is deleted. Modifying Dimension Properties. Change the type parameters of the floor plan dimensions 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dimensioning | 425 . click in the drawing area away from the floor plan. and click Delete Witness Line. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. The full dimension string is displayed again. 16 Right-click the remaining dimension line and click Edit Witness Lines. Modifying Dimension Properties In this exercise. click Modify and select the dimension that you modified in the previous exercise.15 Right-click the control box. a shortcut menu with different options is displayed.rvt. 18 To end the editing command. m_Dimensions.

Aligning components is similar to dimensioning components with a value of zero. Under Text. 426 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 7 If you want to save your changes. enter 5 mm for the Text Size. click Edit/New. The dimensions update as shown in the following illustration. Working with Alignments and Constraints In this exercise. 5 Click OK twice. click Save As. As you create components. For example. you learn to align components and lock their alignment to better work with them in your drawings. and save the exercise file with a unique name. change the following type parameter values: ■ ■ Under Text. then Up for Read Convention.2 On the Options Bar. select Right. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. when sketching walls. Working with Alignments and Constraints. A locked alignment is a constraint that is maintained if any of the components is moved or modified. click Modify. 6 On the Design Bar. if two or more walls are colinear. allowing you to lock the alignment of the walls. on the File menu. alignments can be made and locked with minimal effort. a lock symbol immediately displays.

Align the two uppermost horizontal walls in the floor plan 1 On the Tools toolbar. The symbol changes to a closed lock. indicating that the Align command is active. the first component that you select remains fixed in position. indicating that the alignment of the two walls is now locked. The cursor displays two arrows at its tip.rvt located in the Metric folder. select Multiple Alignment. Align the three short horizontal walls below the two walls that you aligned 4 On the Tools toolbar. indicating the two walls are not constrained to each other. Open m_Alignment. 3 Click the lock.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The short horizontal wall on the left moves to align with the upper horizontal wall. Dimensioning | 427 . click . click the Training Files icon. Select the exterior face of the uppermost horizontal wall. When you align two components. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The lock symbol displays as unlocked. click 2 Align the walls: ■ ■ . 6 Select the lower center wall to define it as the fixed wall to which the other walls will align. and select Wall centerlines for Prefer. while the second component moves to complete the alignment. 5 On the Options Bar. click Open. Select the exterior face of the short horizontal wall on the left.

11 Select the middle wall and drag it downward. Do not lock this segment of the alignment. The wall on the left moves with the middle wall when you drag it. 428 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . 8 Click the lock to lock the alignment of the walls. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the short horizontal wall on the right.7 Select the short wall to the left. click Modify. but the wall on the right does not because the alignment between the two walls is not constrained (locked).

NOTE Because you are not aligning walls. Move the walls to verify the alignment. click . 13 Click the right wall. click once to undo the move. and then click the lock to align the wall with the middle wall. the Prefer wall faces or centerline option on the Options Bar does not apply to the doors. select Multiple Alignment. Align doors in the floor plan 14 On the Tools toolbar. Dimensioning | 429 .12 On the toolbar. 16 Select the centerline of Door 4 on the upper right side of the model. 15 On the Options bar.

21 On the Design Bar. 19 Select Door 2 and lock it to constrain it Doors 3 and 4. Door 3 aligns with Door 4. 22 Slide the door up or down the wall and notice how the other doors move with it. 430 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .17 Select the centerline of Door 3 to the left. 20 Select Door 1 and lock it to constrain it to the other doors. 18 Click the lock to constrain the movement of the doors. click Modify and select one of the aligned doors.

27 Select the far right window in the bottom wall. click Modify. A lock is displayed. Dimensioning | 431 . 31 On the Tools toolbar. 26 Select the window on the far left in the lower wall. clear Multiple Alignment. 30 Click the lock to unlock it. on the Design Bar. click and repeat steps 27 .Align the windows in the floor plan 23 On the Tools toolbar. The second window does not align because it is already constrained by a locked dimension. indicating the constraint.28 to align the windows. 24 On the Options Bar. click . and select the dimension between the second window and the right wall. The two windows align. 29 To view the constraint. 25 Select the window in the upper horizontal wall on the left side of the floor plan. 28 Select the far right window in the top wall.

32 Align the remaining windows. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. as shown in the following illustration. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions In this exercise. 432 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . instead of selecting the wall and all the openings as dimension references.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You want to dimension the wall so that the width of each window displays in the dimension string. you learn how to automatically dimension a linear wall with openings (windows) by selecting the wall. m_Alignment. Creating Automatic Linear Wall Dimensions. 1 View the lower horizontal wall and notice that it includes five windows.

The two vertical walls highlight. Verify Wall centerlines is selected for Prefer. 3 On the Options Bar. 7 Move your cursor below the lower horizontal wall and click to add the dimension. click Dimension. 8 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. select Openings.2 On the Design Bar. click Save As. indicating the start and end of the dimension string. Select Entire Walls for Pick. and that the window widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. the windows). Dimensioning | 433 . 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 5 Click OK. 6 Select the lower horizontal wall. Click Options. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings (in this case. 4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. on the File menu. and then Widths. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click .

Open c_Area. tag doors and windows. You learn how to create angular dimensions and how to use an equality constraint to space the windows equally. 3 On the Options Bar. you dimension the three windows on a floor plan. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. and double-click Level 1. click Open. Create angular dimensions 1 In the Project Browser.Annotating In this lesson. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. Creating Angular Dimensions In this exercise. expand Views (all). you how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Building. click Dimension. click . sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. rotate tags with building components. 434 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .rvt located in the Common folder. You learn how to: ■ ■ ■ ■ create angular dimensions. 4 Dimension the three windows near the east entrance by selecting the centerline of each window and placing the dimensions as shown in the following illustration.

you sequentially tag the rooms on the floor plan. Sequentially Tagging Rooms In this exercise. The enclosed area that represents the room highlights to indicate that it will be tagged.5 Click the equal sign associated with the angular dimension string to equally space the windows. and click to place the room tag. 6 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Sequentially Tagging Rooms. Annotating | 435 . Tag rooms sequentially 1 On the View menu. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. c_Area. click Room Tag. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

Move the cursor into the room below the one previously tagged. 7 Continue to place room tags. indicating that it can be edited. enter 101. click Modify. and select the room tag. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. The room tag number displays in blue. 436 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Room tag. 5 Zoom in on the tag number.4 On the Design Bar. 6 Place another room tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Sequential letters are also supported. Click to place the new tag. click it. ■ The second tag that you place displays the sequential number 102.

Place a door with a door tag and leader 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Type Selector. verify that Tag on placement is selected. Add a door and tag 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. as shown in the following illustration.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and select Leader. select a door type that you want to add to the floor plan. Tagging Doors and Windows. Annotating | 437 . 3 On the Options Bar. to add a tag with a leader. 6 On the Options Bar. and clear Leader. 4 Place the door with the tag in the room at the bottom left. c_Area.rvt. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. you learn how to place door and window tags. select Tag on Placement to add a tag when you place the door in the floor plan. click Door. click Door. You learn how to add a door to the floor plan that includes a tag. and to tag doors and windows that are not tagged. 7 Place the door as shown in the following illustration.

The door is tagged with a tag and leader. 16 Under Leader. 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. and click OK.Place a door without a tag 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Create. 438 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning . clear Create. 12 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. All of the windows that were not tagged are now tagged. and then click OK. verify that Door Tags is selected for Category. Tag the windows in the floor plan 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag All Not Tagged. 13 Under Leader. select Window Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged. under Category. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Place the door below Door 6. clear Tag on placement. click Door. Tag a door after placing it 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the door is placed without a tag.

on the File menu. Annotating | 439 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. or close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Save As.17 If you want to save your changes.

440 | Chapter 14 Annotating and Dimensioning .

More specifically. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. how to control fill pattern colors. 441 .Viewing 15 In this tutorial. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotation within views. you learn to create and customize views of building information models.

you learn how to access different views of the building model. expand Elevations. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. click Open. 442 | Chapter 15 Viewing . on the Standard toolbar. Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. scroll down and click the Training Files icon. 2 In the Project Browser. You create elevations. and three-dimensional (3D) views. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click . Exploring the Building Model In this exercise.rvt located in the Metric folder. Open m_Viewing_Exercise. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotation within building model views. locate the Project Browser. and double-click East. The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. sections. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotation within them. expand Views (all). TIP If the Project Browser does not display. including elevation and three-dimensional views. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.

the east elevation. Create a 3D view of the building model 9 On the View toolbar. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog box. click the Annotation Categories tab. This change is applied only to the active view. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. This change is applied only in this elevation view.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. click . 8 Click OK. Viewing a Building Model | 443 . click Visibility/Graphics. The default name of the view is {3D}. and click Hidden Line. click Model Graphics Style. 7 Under Visibility. 6 Select Include categories from all disciplines in the list above. scroll down and clear Window Tags. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu.

10 On the View toolbar. . 18 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. click X to close the view. 17 In the Rename View dialog box. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button while moving the mouse. and click OK. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. 11 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. . and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog box. The view follows the movement of the cursor. expand Views (all). and click Rename. 444 | Chapter 15 Viewing . Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. right-click {3D}. enter My 3D View. under 3D Views. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera. 19 In the Project Browser. zoom. 13 Press and hold CTRL. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. double-click My 3D View. Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. and expand 3D Views. click to reorient the view. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. Save the current 3D view 15 In the Project Browser. You can pan. 16 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. 14 View the Dynamic View dialog box in the lower left corner of the screen. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel.

right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown in the following illustration. After you specify the second point (the view target). the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. and distance from the target. Cameras define the eye point.rvt. and double-click Level 1. outside of the dimension lines. m_Viewing_Exercise. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. expand Views (all).Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. and click View. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Camera. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. expand Floor Plans. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. eye height. Viewing a Building Model | 445 . Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.

You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog box to move the camera position and change the view. 446 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and sideways to see how the view changes. Press and hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu.4 Select the blue grips that display on the crop region of the view and move them to resize the view so the view includes the entire building model. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog box. click Dynamically Modify View. Move the cursor up. down. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog box. 5 On the View menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. Press and hold the left mouse button.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit.10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. height. 13 On the View menu. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. Viewing a Building Model | 447 . Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. click Tile. and target 12 On the Window menu. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Change the camera position. Press and hold the left mouse button.

click 3D View 1. and click Show Camera. 16 Right-click. 15 In the Project Browser. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. 17 In My 3D View. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights.14 In the Project Browser. 448 | Chapter 15 Viewing . double-click Level 1. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. and move it to another location.

and click Shading. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. 20 On the View Control Bar. under Camera. Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. 21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. click to create a new 3D view. right-click. ■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View.3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. Viewing a Building Model | 449 . and click Properties. click Model Graphics Style. Click OK. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values.

25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model.22 On the View menu. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. select Section Box. A rotation tool is also displayed. as shown in the following illustration. and click OK. under Extents. 450 | Chapter 15 Viewing . A section box is displayed around the model. click View Properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. 24 Click the section box.

26 Click and hold the rotation tool and rotate the section box around the model. m_Viewing_Exercise. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. Creating a Section View.rvt. Creating a Section View In this exercise. and maximize this view. double-click Level 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Viewing a Building Model | 451 .

4 On the Design Bar. or in the Project Browser.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. right-click. 6 Select the section view. 7 In the Go To View dialog box. click Section. 3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. select Floor Plan: Level 1. and double-click Section 1. and click Open View. and click Find Referring Views. View the section 5 To view the section. 452 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. expand Sections (Callout 1). click Modify. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. 8 Select the section line. double-click the section head. and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line.

you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. double-click Level 1. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. double-click Level 1. 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. 12 Select the section line. under Floor Plans. click Modify. 14 On the Design Bar. Viewing a Building Model | 453 . 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Notice the change in section depth. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view.9 On the Design Bar. click Elevation. Creating Elevation Views.rvt. m_Viewing_Exercise. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Notice the change in the view direction. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser.

a by default. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. Elevation 1 . 7 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. double-click Elevation 1 .a. 4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . 454 | Chapter 15 Viewing . and click. double-click the elevation symbol arrow. indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. move the cursor around the building model. under Floor Plans. under Elevations. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. Do not select the arrow.b. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. click Modify. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes.3 Without clicking in the drawing area. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view.b. Elevation 1 .

Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 455 . You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. on the File menu. where each layer is assigned a different material. in a compound wall. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. such as Brick on CMU. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. and save the exercise file with a unique name. a shade of gray. in this case. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.11 If you want to save your changes. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. and applies to phasing override materials as well. such as the one below. roofs. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. In addition. click Save As. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. This includes walls. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. and the insulation color to pink. floors. and other families. For example.

3 In the Materials dialog box. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. expand Views (all). In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Color. 2 On the Settings menu. Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. select Masonry . A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog box. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser under Views. expand Sections (Section Head .Filled). 5 In the Color dialog box. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure.rvt located in the Common folder. expand 3D Views. and double-click 3D. The surface pattern of the brick is black. select red. and click OK twice. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. Open c_Showroom. 456 | Chapter 15 Viewing . scroll down and click the Training Files icon. 4 Under Cut Pattern.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu.Level 3.Brick for Name. click Materials. click Open. The brick cut pattern is displayed as red.

expand Views (all). select white. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Masonry . you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type. 10 Under Surface Pattern. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type.Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu.rvt. c_Showroom. click Materials. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. 11 In the Color dialog box. 9 In the Materials dialog box. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.Brick for Name. click Color. and click OK twice. and double-click Level 1. The floor plan in the view is displayed in the Coarse level of detail as indicated by the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 457 .

double-click Level 2.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 2 Select the south arced wall. and click Fine. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field. click Modify. click Detail Level. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. 11 Zoom in on the arced wall. under Graphics. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Graphics. 7 In the Fill Patterns dialog box under Name. View the arced wall in fine detail 9 In the Project Browser. 13 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and click OK. select a shade of gray. click the button in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. 5 In the Color dialog box. By default. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 10 On the View Control Bar. the Coarse Scale Fill Color parameter (under Graphics) is set to black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. and click OK three times. 8 On the Design Bar. and click . including the current view. select Solid fill. and click Properties. 12 If you want to save your changes. 458 | Chapter 15 Viewing . right-click. click Edit/New. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. under Floor Plans. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. on the File menu.

you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. refer to the online Help for more information. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Building. although they may have coincident edges. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. and you cannot control their visibility. or pattern. line type. line color. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Building files. the plan regions cannot overlap each other.Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. If you create more than one plan region in a file. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. Creating a View Plan Region | 459 .

460 | Chapter 15 Viewing . In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open m_Plan_Region. and double-click Level 1. View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. click Open. expand Floor Plans. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. the south elevation is also displayed.Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. right-click in the Design Bar. and click View. expand Views (all). scroll down and click the Training Files icon. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Plan Region.rvt located in the Metric folder. In the following illustration. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

as it is displayed with hidden lines in this view. 6 In the Element Properties dialog box. ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and then click OK twice. that is similar to the view range for plan views. view range. The plan region is no longer visible. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left.Plan regions have a single property. 10 On the Design Bar. 7 In the View Range dialog box. right-click. and the view depth plane. and enter 2800 for the Cut plane Offset. the plan region is displayed as a red dashed rectangle. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. 3 In the Level 1 view. under Extents. Creating a View Plan Region | 461 . By selecting Parent View’s Level. As the cursor moves across it. and click Properties. click Finish Sketch. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. click . click Lines. 9 Click Apply. This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. top and bottom clip planes. 5 Select the red dashed line. You use the view range property to control cut plane. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut plane. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. Press ESC to end the command. 4 Move the cursor across the area where you sketched the plan region. On the Options Bar. click Edit for View Range. click Modify. the top and bottom clip planes. 8 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. 462 | Chapter 15 Viewing . click Save As. on the File menu. 11 If you want to save your changes. 12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region.

to place and render decals to create signs. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Building that is used to produce rendered views. 463 .Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 16 In this tutorial. billboards. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Autodesk Revit Building to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. and posters.

you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. the floor. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. After you create the perspective view. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. In this exercise. you select a scene that defines the model environment. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. and create the perspective view that you want to render.Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. When you complete these changes. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model. 464 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open m_Cohouse. click .Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 4 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click Edit/New. and click the tab in the context menu. click Edit for Structure. View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed.Heavyweight block is displayed for Type. under Construction. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Open.rvt located in the Metric folder. click the Training Files icon. verify that Co-house . click Wall.Brick.Cavity Wall . Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . 3 On the Options Bar. Rendering an Exterior View | 465 . 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

18 In the Materials dialog box. 10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog box. 23 Under AccuRender. 466 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . expand Metals. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor. 27 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog box.Asphalt. A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. select the curtain wall mullion again. 8 In the Materials dialog box. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog box. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. 16 In the Type Properties dialog box. 25 Under Name. under _accurender. and click Aluminum. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar.200mm. expand Masonry and click Brick. . TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. under Name. for Layer 2. enter Aluminum. under Name.Running. select Masonry . under Construction. 22 In the New Material dialog box. 19 Click OK four times. select Polished.Plain. click Materials. click Edit/New. 26 Click OK twice. click Edit for Structure. under Name. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector.Brick. Polished and click OK. and click . click Materials. click Duplicate. select Site . When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. select Carib. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. under _accurender. 11 Under Name.Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu. 14 On the Options Bar. 12 Click OK twice. 9 Under AccuRender. click Modify. 24 In the Material Library. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu.

The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. floor. . under Materials and Finishes. select Exterior under Type. click . Polished. click Edit/New. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Region Raytrace. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. producing a photorealistic effect. verify that New is selected. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model.29 On the Options Bar. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. under Name. select Aluminum. floor. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. Rendering an Exterior View | 467 . 36 In the Scene Selection dialog box. click in the Material field. click No. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). 35 Move the cursor over the building model. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. and then click 32 In the Materials dialog box. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. 33 Click OK three times. and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes.

Cnst. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. Adding Trees to the Site.rvt. m_Cohouse. when you render an exterior view of the model. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. In a later exercise. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all).38 On the Design Bar. you place two different types of trees on the building site. 468 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1st Flr. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. and click Site. The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple. and click to place a tree. 4 In the Type Selector.9 Meters. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. select M_Tree . Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. right-click in the Design Bar. click Site Component. Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. Rendering an Exterior View | 469 .Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site.

and click Site Component. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Oak. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. enter Black Oak. Black. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. and click OK. and place two black oak trees.Create a new type of tree. 13 Under Name. select Black Oak for Type Comments. and click OK twice. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 470 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Name dialog box. as shown in the following illustration. 7 In the Type Selector. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. expand Trees and Shrubs. m_Cohouse. under accurender. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. and click OK. click in the Value field for Plant Name.rvt. and then click display the Plant Library. 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 15 Under Other. click Edit/New. and click Deciduous. under Other. 12 In the Plant Library. select any of the deciduous trees. 14 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. Creating a Perspective View. under Identity Data. click Modify. to . and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog box.

3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. The new perspective view is displayed. Cnst. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. click Camera. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera. Rendering an Exterior View | 471 . view open.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. on the View tab of the Design Bar.

The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. double-click 1st Flr. 5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click Show Camera.Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). Cnst. expand 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). Cnst. 472 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. view.

under 3D Views. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. right-click 3D View 1. m_Cohouse. date. and environment settings that you use to render the view. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise.7 In the Project Browser.rvt. enter Exterior. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View. you select a scene and specify time. and click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Rendering an Exterior View | 473 . place. double-click Exterior. and click Rename. lighting. You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. 9 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 In the Rename View dialog box.

Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. Time. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. 8 Under Time.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 6 Select By Date. 7 Under Date. 474 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Scene Settings. click Settings. click the Solar Angles tab. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. and click Sun. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view.

click Raytrace. 13 Enter . select Autumn for Plant Season.00 (many clouds.9 Click the Place tab. select Ground Plane. 26 On the Design Bar. MA. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. 17 Under Advanced. 11 Scroll down. and click OK. click . The Ground Plane tab displays. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Rendering an Exterior View | 475 . 18 Click Material. under Scene Settings. click Site. click Image Size. 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. click Environment.20 for Cloudiness. 12 Click the Settings Tab. and enter bo. and select Boston. under _accurender. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed.) 14 Click OK. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. under Background Color. Dark. 16 In the Environment dialog box. Rye. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. 20 In the Name list. 21 Click OK twice. USA. 19 In the Material Library. and click OK. 10 Click in the Cities list. select Grass. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene. under Scene Settings. select Good for Quality. click No.

expand Renderings. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. 476 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 30 On the Design Bar. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). click Save As. click Capture Rendering. and finally. on the File menu. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. Adding RPC People In this exercise. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. To create the rendered scene. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. and save the exercise file with a unique name. you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise.Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. define the view and render scene settings. 32 If you want to save this exercise. Rendering an Interior View.

and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). expand Floor Plans. select M_RPC Female: Cathy.rvt. and double-click 2nd Flr. 4 In the Type Selector. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). 5 On the Options Bar. Cnst.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest). 7 Repeat steps 4 . m_Cohouse. 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. select Rotate after placement. Rendering an Interior View | 477 . 2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. click Component. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson.8 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.rvt. Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. Creating the Interior Perspective View. m_Cohouse. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 478 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Camera.

3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. double-click 2nd Flr. 4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration.The interior perspective is displayed. Rendering an Interior View | 479 . 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Cnst. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view.

Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. enter 229 mm for Width. enter 178 mm for Height. click to display the 3D view of the building model. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. 12 On the View menu. 480 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click OK. 11 On the View menu. 14 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Grips are displayed on the section box. A section box is displayed around the building model. 9 In the Rename View dialog box. enter Interior. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. and click Rename. and click OK. click Modify. click the dimensions for Size. under Extents. click View Properties. under Size. and select the section box. right-click 3D View 1. select Section Box.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. place. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. you reduce the rendering time.15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. Rendering an Interior View | 481 . date. Creating a New Render Scene.rvt. you create a render scene to specify the time. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. By limiting the geometry. m_Cohouse. and environment settings used to render the view.

such as windows and doors. 13 Click the Settings tab. on the Main tab. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. under Background Color. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. 19 Click Material. 10 Click the Place tab. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. The Ground Plane tab displays. under Scene Settings. MA. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. and click OK. 12 Scroll down. select Grass. 20 In the Material Library. click Settings. 11 Click in the Cities list. m_Cohouse. 7 Select By Date. under Use View’s Section Box. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View. and enter bo. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog box. click the Solar Angles tab. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. USA. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. 14 Click Save. 9 Under Time. click Site. Dark. 4 Under Type. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog box.rvt. and select Boston. double-click {3D}. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 24 Under Scene Settings. and enter Interior Scene for Name. under Scene Settings. You can select families with transparent materials. select New. Rye. and click OK. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. 17 In the Environment dialog box. click Environment. 22 Click OK twice. 21 In the Name list. select {3D}. 482 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes. select Summer for Plant Season. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. under accurender. 18 Under Advanced.Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Ground Plane. as daylight sources. under 3D Views. and click Save. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog box. 8 Under Date. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. click OK. Time. select Interior. and click Sun. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

6 In the Radiosity Information dialog box. The radiosity process. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. which can take several minutes. begins. Curtain Wall 1). When radiate completes. the following rendered view is displayed. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. 8 On the Options Bar. click Raytrace. double-click Interior. click Radiate. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. . click Daylights. 7 On the Design Bar. The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps.2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click OK. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Rendering an Interior View | 483 . Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. 5 On the Design Bar.

The walkthrough path is a spline. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. or section view. 10 Close the exercise file. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. elevation. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. but you can also define it in a 3D. and save the exercise file with a unique name. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. on the File menu. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. In a plan view. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Building software. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building model in Autodesk Revit Building. click Save As. 484 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames.9 If you want to save your changes. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. you must select or define a scene.

Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. Open c_Townhouse.You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. proceeds through the dining room. and ends in the far corner of the living room. and change unit formats as desired. or the first key frame. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. of the walkthrough. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. click Walkthrough. 3 On the Options Bar.rvt located in the Common folder. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. click the Training Files icon. right-click in the Design Bar. click Settings ➤ Project Units. expand Floor Plans. click Open. and double-click 1st Floor. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 485 . and click to specify the start point. If you prefer to use Metric values. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. expand Views (all). and click the tab in the context menu.

If it is not. 9 On the Options Bar. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. 11 Under Change. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. expand Walkthroughs. and select the crop boundary. click . verify Field of view is selected. 486 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 12 On the View menu. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). and double-click Walkthrough 1. and click OK. select the crop boundary. on the Options Bar. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog box. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all).

The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. 16 On the Options Bar. proceed to the next exercise. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. 14 Click . enter 1 for Frame. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing.13 On the Options Bar. and click OK. c_Townhouse.rvt. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position. press ESC. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog box. click Edit Walkthrough. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 487 . The walkthrough plays. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 17 Click .

click Edit Walkthrough. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. select Path for Controls. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). 2 On the Options Bar. clear Far Clip Active. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. click .Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. You can move any camera target or key frame position. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. and click OK. 488 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 6 On the Options Bar. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. double-click 1st Floor. under Extents.

The AVI is recorded. shaded. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement.7 Click the third key frame position. click Edit Walkthrough. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. If you are unsure of what option to use. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. specifying the number of frames. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. double-click Walkthrough 1. shaded with edges. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. and save the exercise file with a unique name. When you export the walkthrough. 4 Under Format. to play the walkthrough. 9 On the Options Bar. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. 2 In the Save As dialog box. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. and click OK. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. on the File menu.rvt. or with AccuRender raytracing. 1 On the File menu. specify 10 for Frames per Second. Recording the Walkthrough. 3 Under Output Length. under Walkthroughs. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. reducing the size of the image. hidden line. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. click Export ➤ AVI. 5 In the Video Compression dialog box. 8 If you want to save this exercise. without opening Autodesk Revit Building. select <Shading> for Display mode. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and click Save. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. click Save As. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 489 . perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. c_Townhouse. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

490 | Chapter 16 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

" In Revit Building. elevations. an outside reviewer. sections.Presentation Views 17 In this tutorial. there are several options for expressing the architecture. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. the Linework Tool. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. Whether the audience is the general contractor. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. In this tutorial. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. 491 . Advanced Model Graphics." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. To express texture beyond material specifics. a consultant. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. For the realistic approach. you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. and details. or the client. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. type. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. In this series of exercises. Co-house. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Building can be found under Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs. you explore the stylistic approach. length. Using the pre-built building model. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. and Section Boxes. A majority of tools in Autodesk Revit Building are intended to describe number. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering.

change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. 492 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique.rvt located in the Metric folder. right-click 2nd Flr. you create a presentation floor plan. Cnst. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. expand Views (all). and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. click Open. and click Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open m_Cohouse. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. expand Floor Plans. click the Training Files icon.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create a copy of the plan. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique.

rvt. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. click Save As. this represents the view getting smaller. and Up Arrow. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. 8 Click OK. elevations. 10 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. navigate to the folder of your choice. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. and click Rename. 7 Under Visibility. Cnst. and click Save. UP Text. Using Advanced Model Graphics. click the Scale control and select 1: 100. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the frame. Down Arrow. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. dimensions. click Visibility/Graphics. and clear DOWN Text. This turns off the visibility of all tags. 11 In the Save As directory. and so on in this view.2 In the Project Browser. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 493 . enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog box. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Notice that no annotations display in this view. sections. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. expand the Stairs category. and click OK. click the Annotation Categories tab. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.

MA.rvt. Under Intensity. At that place. Under Shadows Properties. select Cast Shadows. 494 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click the Place tab. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. you can create. under Sunlight Settings. The higher the number. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Time and Place. ■ ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. USA for City. select By Date. click for Place. and click Advanced Model Graphics. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 5 Under Sunlight Settings. double-click it in the Project Browser. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype. 7 Select Boston. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Within a Project. modify. click .Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 2 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog box. the darker the shadows. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. specify 35 for Shadow.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. clear Ground Plane. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. however. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. click Save.NOTE For this step. be aware that if you enter a different city. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Cnst. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. click This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. under Sunlight Settings. 15 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 16 On the File menu. click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. specify 10/27/2004 for Date and 1:00:00 PM for Time. 9 Under Sunlight Settings. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. for At Level. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. . most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose. Turn off the ground plane shadows 12 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 10 Click OK. you can enter any city you wish. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. select Ground Plane and select 1st Flr. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 495 . click OK.

you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and notice a view title displays. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. select Arch Portrait. and click Add View to Sheet. click Modify. and click to place it. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. TIP If the View tab is not available. click Sheet. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. Notice the blank sheet is portrait oriented. and click OK. 6 On the Design Bar. click Add View. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. and click View. right-click the Design Bar. 4 In the Views dialog box. 496 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

click Edit/New. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 In the Name dialog box. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. 9 On the Options Bar. click Duplicate. and click OK. click OK. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 497 . you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. and click OK. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. To accomplish this. select No for Show Title. enter Presentation. click . 11 In the Type Properties dialog box. 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. For this analytique. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. under Graphics.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique.

and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. and select Chain. and draw a rectangle around the view as shown. fill properties. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. click Filled Region. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. If necessary. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. 18 On the Options Bar. click . and click Activate View. 498 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. 19 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and the boundary of the region. click . select Invisible Lines. 20 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. 17 In the Type Selector.Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport.

click the Fill Pattern value and the arrow that displays within it. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique. click Duplicate. under Graphics. 24 In the Name dialog box. under Name. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 34 Proceed with the next lesson. 29 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. Name the sheet 31 Right-click the edge of the sheet. 33 On the File menu. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 499 . click Edit/New. 21 On the Design Bar. 30 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. enter Solid Black. click Region Properties. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog box. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. select Solid Fill. 27 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Identity Data. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. click Save. and click Deactivate View. click Finish Sketch. select the entire chain (use TAB ) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. you create an elevation and add it to the Presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise.TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines. scroll down. and click Properties. and click OK. click OK. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. When you are finished drawing the chain. 23 In the Type Properties dialog box.

under Views (all).rvt. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. right-click South. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.Preparing the Elevation View for the Analytique In this exercise. expand Elevations. and click Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. 500 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

13 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. on the Model Categories tab. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. and clear Elevation Swing. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. select Cast Shadows. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. 14 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 7 Click the Annotation Categories tab.2 In the Project Browser. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box are applied only to the active view. click Duplicate. and click OK. under Visibility. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 501 . 6 Under Visibility. under Elevations. click Visibility/Graphics. right-click Copy of South. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. scroll up. specify 35 for Shadow. By changing the angle of the sun. expand the Doors category. under Sunlight Settings. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. scroll down. click . 11 Under Shadow Properties. 8 Click OK. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click OK. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. and click Rename. Apply advanced model graphics 9 On the View Control Bar. expand the Walls category. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. 3 In the Rename View dialog box. and click Advanced Model Graphics. enter Presentation South Elevation. and clear Surface Pattern. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 12 Under Intensity. and click OK. click OK. 15 In the Name dialog box. specify 2:30:00 PM for Time. click the Advanced Model Graphics control.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Add View.rvt. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet. 19 Proceed with the next exercise.Presentation. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adding a Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. under Views (all). expand Sheets. click Save.18 On the File menu. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add view to sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. and double-click A105 . 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. and click Add View to Sheet. 3 In the Views dialog box. 502 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

Notice the viewport displays a view title. select Viewport: Presentation. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique | 503 . Notice the view title no longer displays. 5 In the Type Selector.

Adding Section Views to the Analytique. click Modify. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. 7 On the Design Bar. 504 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. click Save. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. 8 On the File menu. 9 Proceed with the next lesson.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. double-click 1st Flr. select 1: 100 for Scale. under Floor Plans. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 505 . 3 On the Options Bar. Cnst. 4 Add the section shown below. and use the flip arrows if necessary. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. click Section. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall).

this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. click Callout. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser.Section 2 is added to the building model. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. select 1: 100 for Scale. To fit correctly in the analytique. expand Sections (Callout 1). 506 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . To accomplish this. 7 On the Options Bar. and double-click Section 2. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view.

enter Presentation Section 2. under Sections (Callout 1).Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. and click Rename. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog box. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 507 . expand the Walls category. under Sections (Callout 1). TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). click the Model Categories tab. scroll up. click Visibility/Graphics. 11 In the Rename View dialog box. click Modify. 16 Under Visibility. 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of Section 2. and clear Elevation Swing. 15 Under Visibility. double-click Presentation Section 2. expand the Doors category. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. scroll down. and clear Surface Pattern. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu.

23 On the File menu.17 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 18 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 24 Proceed with the next exercise. clear Crop Region Visible. under Extents. Notice the crop region no longer displays. Hide the crop boundary 20 Select the crop boundary. click Save. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 508 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 21 On the Options Bar. click . 19 Click OK. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View.

click Duplicate. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Under Shadows Properties. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. select Relative to View. Under Intensity. TIP You may need to move the dialog box off to the side in order to see the view. and click OK. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. Click Apply. under Sections (Callout 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. click . under Sunlight Settings. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section.rvt. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 2 On the View Control Bar. 5 In the Name dialog box. and click OK. In addition. select Directly. In the steps that follow.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. click Apply. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 509 . select Cast Shadows. specify 35 for Shadow. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. open the Project Browser and.

you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. and click OK. select Override Silhouettes. Apply silhouette edges 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. 510 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . NOTE The line style. You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu.TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. was added to this dataset for training purposes. 11 Proceed with the next exercise. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. Silhouette Edges. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. under Silhouette Edges. click Save. 10 On the File menu. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model.

5 In the Type Selector. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 511 . and click to place the selected view.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Viewport: Presentation. 6 On the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. The view title no longer displays. click Add View. double-click A105 . Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. under Sheets (all). 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.Presentation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. select Section: Presentation Section 2. 3 In the Views dialog box. and click Add View to Sheet.

Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. click . and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. and press ENTER. 512 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Using a clock as a reference. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Edit toolbar. In the steps that follow. double-click Section 2. and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. you click to specify the start radius. To rotate an object. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. under Sections (Callout 1).

12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. double-click A105 . the callout rotates 180 degrees. Notice that the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model.Presentation.After you enter the rotation value and press Enter. Notice the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. under Sheets (all). Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 513 . Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser.

514 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click Save. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise. 15 On the Design Bar. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. Working with a Presentation View Template. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. click Modify. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. After applying the view template to a new section view. 16 On the File menu.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. and drag it up and to the left as shown.

rvt. click Apply View Template. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 In the New View Template dialog box. Now. double-click Presentation Section 2. 4 In the View Templates dialog box. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK. enter Presentation. and click Duplicate. under Sections (Type 1). and click Rename. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. right-click Copy of Section 1. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. you can simply apply the presentation view template. enter Presentation Section 1. click Save as View Template. right-click Section 1.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. 7 In the Rename View dialog box. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 515 . under Sections (Type 1). Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. click OK. 2 On the View menu. under Sections (Callout 1).

16 On the View menu. 15 Right-click the viewport. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for View Rotation on Sheet. 18 Right-click the viewport. annotations. 516 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. select Presentation. Notice the furniture. click Add View. select Section: Presentation Section 1. under Sheets (all). click View Properties. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. double-click A105 . Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. and elevation swings no longer display. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. select Viewport: Presentation. and click OK. and click Activate View. 14 In the Type Selector. 12 In the Views dialog box.9 In the Select View Template dialog box. and click Deactivate View. under Graphics. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. lighting fixtures.Presentation. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser.

Working in a Callout Analytique. 21 Proceed with the next exercise.20 On the File menu. Working in a Callout Analytique Traditional analytiques typically contain a detail. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. such as a tracery window or column capital. In this exercise. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 517 . click Save.

enter Presentation Callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select the callout. 518 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. click Callout. under Sections (Type 1). and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. 4 In the Project Browser. After you add the callout.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.rvt. 5 In the Rename View dialog box. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. click Modify. right-click Callout of Section 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Section 1.

clear Crop Region Visible. 8 Right-click. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box.6 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. 7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 519 . under Extents. and click View Properties. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. double-click Presentation Callout.

18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. 14 In the Type Selector. 17 On the View menu. 15 On the Design Bar. select Custom for View Scale. and click OK. and click Activate View. click Add View. and click Deactivate View.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 .Presentation. click Modify. and move it into the position shown below. 520 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 12 In the Views dialog box. 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. select Viewport: Presentation. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). click View Properties. and click Add View to Sheet. select Section: Presentation Callout.

NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. click Filled Region. under Sections (Callout 1). You do not have to replicate the image exactly. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and make adjustments as necessary. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. double-click Presentation Callout. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. In the steps that follow. When finished. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog box. and click OK. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. 23 On the Design Bar. click Region Properties. activate the viewport. select Solid Black for Type. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 521 . Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast.

and sketch the rectangle shown below. under Sheets (all).26 On the Project Browser. click Filled Region. and click Activate View. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. 522 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . click . 29 On the Options Bar. double-click A105 . Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.

click Finish Sketch. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 523 . select Crop Region Visible. under Extents.30 On the Design Bar. 31 On the View menu. and click OK. click View Properties. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 33 Select the crop region. and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays.

36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. under Extents. 37 On the File menu. clear Crop Region Visible. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 35 In the Element Properties dialog box. 524 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and click Deactivate View. click View Properties. and click OK.34 On the View menu. click Save.

rvt. 2 On the View menu. Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser.s and apply shadows to the views. click Orient ➤ Southwest.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. click the Scale control. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. double-click Isometric. 3 On the View Control Bar. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and click 1: 200. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 525 . and click Advanced Model Graphics. you create three similar isometric views with different cutaway.

right-click Isometric 1. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. under Sunlight Settings. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. enter Isometric 1. Under Intensity. select Cast Shadows. Select 1st Flr. under Extents. Select Relative to View. right-click Isometric. and click OK. click . double-click Isometric 2. enter Isometric 2. specify 35 for Shadow. and click Duplicate. and click OK. and click Rename. under 3D Views. select Override Silhouettes. and click OK. 526 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 14 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. under 3D Views. Under Shadows Properties. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 On the View menu. click View Properties. 9 Click OK. under 3D Views. and click Rename. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 16 In the Rename View dialog box. Cnst. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. 13 In the Rename View dialog box. under 3D Views. Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. click Duplicate. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. and click OK. and click OK. for At Level. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. under Silhouette Edges. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. select Section Box.5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Select Ground Plane. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. 15 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Name dialog box.

TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 527 . You can use this to rotate the section box. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. When you are finished. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown.20 Select the section box. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar.

32 In the Element Properties dialog box. clear Crop Region Visible. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 528 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 31 On the View menu. 24 In the Rename View dialog box. right-click Isometric 2. 26 On the View menu. and click OK. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. Notice the section box no longer displays. either adjust the plane location. 25 In the Project Browser. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. under Extents. click View Properties. and click Rename. 27 In the Element Properties dialog box. click View Properties. and click OK. under Extents. under 3D Views. click Modify on the Design Bar. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 29 Select the section box. make a copy of the view. under 3D Views. 23 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. the stairs and railings may display. select Crop Region. double-click Isometric 2. and click Duplicate. When you are finished. select Crop Region. double-click Isometric 3. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. clear Crop Region Visible. enter Isometric 3. In such a case. and click OK.

in the Type Selector. 34 In the Project Browser. 36 In the Project Browser. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. select Viewport: Presentation. Notice the filled region partially covers the view. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser.Next. in the Type Selector. under Sheets (all). select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. in the Type Selector. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and. select Viewport: Presentation. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 529 . 35 In the Project Browser. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure. double-click A105 . under 3D Views.Presentation. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. under 3D Views. under 3D Views.

38 Select the poche filled region. click Region Properties. 43 On the Design Bar. This will make it easier to draw lines. and click Activate View. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. click Edit. 44 Using the drawing tools. 530 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. 39 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Element Properties dialog box. The image below shows the lines redrawn. and then click Edit/New. select Concrete for Type. click Lines. select Transparent for Background. 42 Click OK twice. under Graphics. and on the Options Bar. 41 In the Type Properties dialog box. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way.

45 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 531 . After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. click Region Properties. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views. 46 In the Element Properties dialog box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. you create the final view for the analytique. you add it to the presentation sheet. 49 On the File menu. a cutaway perspective view. click Save. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. and click Deactivate View. select Solid Black for Type. 47 On the Design Bar.

under Floor Plans. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. then you specify the eye direction and range. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 532 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. The view opens immediately. double-click 1st Flr. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. click Camera. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. Cnst.

click the Advanced Model Graphics control. under Silhouette Edges. Under Intensity. Under Shadows Properties. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. specify 35 for Shadow. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click . select Override Silhouettes.4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog box. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 533 . select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. and click OK. 5 On the View Control Bar. select Cast Shadows. 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog box. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

click View Properties. select Section Box.Add a section box 10 On the View menu. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice the controls that display on each plane. 534 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . 12 Select the section box. under Extents. 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image. A section box now cuts through the building model. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well.

you must specify the actual size of the image. and click OK. double-click A105 . After placing it. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. click View Properties.Presentation. 18 On the View menu. under Change. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 535 . under 3D Views. drag 3D View 2 onto the presentation sheet. enter 165 mm for Width. clear Crop Region Visible. go to the Type Selector and select Viewport: Presentation. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. under Sheets (all). 15 On the Options Bar.14 Select the crop boundary. 17 Under Size. click Size. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. select Scale (locked proportions). under Extents. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog box.

click Edit/New. specify a text size of 6 mm. select Title. click OK. specify a text size of 40 mm. and click OK. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Duplicate.rvt. 9 In the Name dialog box. select the same font as the title. under Text. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. enter Title. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Edit/New. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 536 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views . Annotating the Analytique. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box.22 On the File menu. and click OK. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. and click OK. click Save. select a font. enter Description. under Text. and click OK. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. click . 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 3 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. click Text. 2 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Name dialog box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. 4 In the Type Properties dialog box. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box.

15 In the Type Selector. click Modify. select Description.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 17 On the Design Bar. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 537 . 18 On the File menu. click Save. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.

538 | Chapter 17 Presentation Views .

Even though various types within a family can look completely different.About Families and the Family Editor 18 All elements in Autodesk Revit Building are “family based. each with a different size.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Building to help you manage your data and make changes easily. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date. 539 . they are still related and come from a single source. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. In this tutorial. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. shape. thus the term family. material set. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator.

if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. For example. while many more are stored in component libraries. and roofs are examples of these types of families. there is another type of family that allows you create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Building recognize it as a particular component type. Walls. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. The following dialog box shows how you can select a specific family template to start your family design project. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. foundation. and roofs. Using the Family Editor. floors. In this lesson. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. generic.Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Building is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. Revit Building has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Building and comprise principle building components such as walls. The basic walls system family. however. You also learn about the Family Editor. floors. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. In addition. and partition wall styles. exceptions to this rule. because there is only one file to track. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. for example. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an .rfa extension. but you cannot create new system families. and when and how to use it. There are. such as a dome roof. This makes file management much easier. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. has wall types that define interior. 540 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . exterior. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Building and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment.

You can load them into projects. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. and save them from a project file to your library if needed.Family templates are either host-based or standalone. custom wall treatments. and furniture. so they are useful for objects unique to that project.rfa extension. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. You create in-place families only within the current project. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . transfer them from one project to another. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. trees. Host-based families have components that require hosts. Using Families and the Family Editor | 541 . The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. Standalone families include columns. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. for example. and also a standalone furniture family component. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families.

you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. After the family has been loaded in the project. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. 4 Select the family file name and click Open. modify it as needed. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. how to access it. you learn about the Family Editor. you can drag it into the document window. you learned about the different types of Revit Building families and when to use them. In this exercise. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. 2 On the File menu. Load Family command on the File menu. In the final exercise. Within the Windows® environment. or 3D. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. 4 If you can’t find the component you require. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. In this section.Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. If you find a close match. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. elevation. and when to use it. To add a family to your project. if you change the original family. presume it is a bay window that you require. and click Open. However. navigate to a family file. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. consider checking the web library and other web resources. With Revit Building open. you learn when to use the Family Editor. and click Open. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. it is saved with the project. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. it opens within the Family Editor. To start a new family. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. open it in the Family Editor. such as newsgroups. it should be available within the Type Selector. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. such as plan. In this case. you can double-click any file with an .rfa extension and it will open Revit Building in the Family Editor. 542 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor . 5 Finally. When the family opens. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. 3 Next. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family. you can click File ➤ Open. select the appropriate template. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. if you have exhausted your external resources. and then load it into the project. or you can load it using the Load From Library. how to access it.

2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. 9 Save the newly-defined family. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior.General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. Using Families and the Family Editor | 543 . and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry.

544 | Chapter 18 About Families and the Family Editor .

In addition. and several annotation families. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. you learn how to create specific Autodesk Revit Building families.Creating Components in the Family Editor 19 In this tutorial. When you create an in-place family. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. not within the Family Editor. you create it within the project file. You create a furniture family. you create an in-place family. a lighting fixture. In each lesson. you learn how to create a different type of component. 545 . Using the installed templates.

Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion.Creating a Door Family In this lesson. 546 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. height. The door type has a variable height and width. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. and thickness.

9 In the Type Selector. 6 Maximize the window. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. 2 On the File menu. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. click New ➤ Family. 7 Enter ZF. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. Creating a Door Family | 547 . select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Labelled dimensions. click Tile.rft. Level. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click Symbolic Lines. and represent the door opening profile. 4 On the View menu. 5 On the Window menu. select Doors [projection]. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. are also displayed. Notice the four tiled views. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar.Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. Floor Plan: Ref. part of the door properties. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. click . 10 On the Options Bar. and click Open. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Select Metric Door.

click Dimension.Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown. 548 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

select Thickness for Label. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. Because labelled dimensions are parameters. select Width for Label. Creating a Door Family | 549 .Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. click Modify. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 On the Options Bar.

23 On the Options Bar. you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. as shown. click Symbolic Lines. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar. 550 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . along with the witness line controls. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. you first specify the arc center. 24 Enter SI. then you specify each end point. click the down arrow button. click . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. 21 On the Design Bar. When drawing an arc from center and end points. select Plan Swing [cut]. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. 22 In the Type selector. and select the command from the menu. In the image below. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry.

select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. double-click Exterior. 2 On the Design Bar. double-click Left. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click . 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Door Family | 551 . 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Elevations. 5 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. click Lines. and click OK.1 In the Project Browser. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. 3 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. click Finish Sketch. enter 50 mm for Depth.

10 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. click Modify and select the dimension. 552 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . then click to specify the dimension witness line. select Thickness for Label. click Dimension. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference. TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. double-click Ref. 14 In the Project Browser. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. Level. 12 On the Design Bar.

It also defines its appearance when rendered. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. 3 In the New Material dialog box. and click OK. select Panel for Subcategory. for Material. under Materials and Finishes. click Modify. 4 In the Materials dialog box. 7 In the Materials dialog box. Assigning Materials to the Door Components. and Fine are selected. click OK.No Gloss. click for Texture. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. Medium. click . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 12 In the Element Properties dialog box. 2 In the Materials dialog box.Red/Stained. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. 19 Under Detail Levels. click Materials. select Front/Back. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 13 On the Design Bar. select Oak Door. and click OK. Left/Right. verify that Coarse. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. click Visibility. 6 Click OK. under AccuRender. and clear Plan/RCP. and click OK. under Name. 20 On the Options Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. under View Specific Display. click . 5 In the Material Library dialog box. and When cut in Plan/RCP.16 Select the door leaf extrusion. click Duplicate. Creating a Door Family | 553 .Dark. enter Oak Door for Name. 9 On the Options Bar. you assign a material to the door leaf. click OK. click 11 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu.

The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. click . and click OK. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. 554 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 16 In the Element Properties dialog box. select Oak Door for Name. 21 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). 22 Zoom in on a door corner. double-click View 1. under 3D Views. for Material.15 On the Options Bar. click the Model Graphics Style control. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. click 17 In the Materials dialog box. and select Shading with Edges. click OK.

enter 2500 mm for Height. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. Click Apply. 24 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. enter 2000 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 27 Click OK. Under Other. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. Click Apply. By flexing the new component. Enter 1500 mm for Width. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog box and see how the new door reacts. Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. Enter 1000 mm for Width. Defining New Door Types Creating a Door Family | 555 . Try to move the dialog box off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. Under Other.

556 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Family Types. select it. enter 2134 mm for Height. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu.Defining New Door Types In this exercise. click New. Define the second new door type. Training Door. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. verify that DefaultMetric. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Name dialog box.rfa. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name. under Template file. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. click Wall. and click OK. and click OK. click New. Define the third new door type. Enter 1220 mm for Width. Training Door. click Door. 20 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. Click Apply. Enter 925 mm for Width. Click Apply. Click Apply. select Project. 12 On the File menu. and click OK. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. 8 Under Family Types. 11 Click OK. and click Open. and click OK. 5 Under Family Types. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. Enter 750 mm for Width.rte is the Template file. enter 2100 mm for Height. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. click New. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 10 In the Family Types dialog box. click Load. enter 2000 mm for Height. 6 In the Name dialog box. click Save. 15 In the New Project dialog box. 18 In the Open dialog box. Place new door types in the project 19 On the Design Bar. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Under Create new. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. navigate to the location where you saved the door family. 9 In the Name dialog box. click New ➤ Project.rfa. 17 On the Options Bar.

21 On the View toolbar. and select Shading with Edges. 26 In the Type Selector. Creating a Door Family | 557 . 25 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. 23 On the Design Bar. click . 24 In the Type Selector. click the Model Graphics Style control. click Door. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 22 On the View Control Bar. 27 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown.

and specify values for the window width. You create the window frame. height. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. 30 You can close all files without saving. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. This completes the lesson. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. Creating a Door Family. default sill height. Creating a Window Family In this lesson. you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. Finally. 29 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. and create the window sash as a sweep.28 In the Type Selector. 558 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . glazing and mullions as extrusions. and mullion offset.

The window opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. Four views are tiled on your display. The reference planes that display are part of the default window template and represent the window opening profile. are also displayed. 4 On the Window menu. 5 On the View menu. equally spaced vertical mullions. Labelled dimensions. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. 7 Enter ZF. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit.rft.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. The window type has a variable height and width. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable. click New ➤ Family 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 559 . 2 On the File menu. you specify the parameters for the new window family. Select Metric Window. and click Open. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. part of the window properties. click Tile. 6 Maximize the exterior elevation view.

Enter 1800 mm for Width. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window opening. When you add labels to dimensions. This process is called “flexing the model. Height and Default Sill Height. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. The label name. 560 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 10 In the Family Types dialog box. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. also one of the window properties. Change the height and width values again.8 Two dimension strings display with their labels. 11 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry. 12 Click OK. and click Apply.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. is one of the type parameters. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. Click Apply. then sketching the sweep profile. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. Modify the new window type height and width parameters 9 On the Design Bar. enter 1300 mm for Height. click Family Types. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. This is the starting point for the new window. and click Apply.

Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 7 On the Design Bar. click . The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. select Elevation: Right. and click Open View. click . click Sketch 2D Path. click the Scale control. 2 On the Design Bar.Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 9 On the View Control Bar. click Sketch Profile. click Lines. Creating a Window Family | 561 . Snap the cursor to each corner. 13 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 12 On the Options Bar. and specify an offset of 50 mm. 8 In the Go To View dialog box. click Finish Path. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 10 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. and select 1:10. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Design Bar.

21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 On the Options Bar. Sketch the window frame profile 22 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. and click OK. enter Sash for the Name. 18 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 24 Below the red dot. and select the reference plane. 23 On the Options Bar. click . 20 On the Options Bar. select Prefer: Wall faces. click Dimension. click Modify. under Identity Data. select Chain and click .14 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 16 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown. and select the dimension. 562 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. click Modify. the exact dimensions are not critical. However. and drag it to the interior face of the wall. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. 26 Select the right edge of the frame section. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. 25 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 563 . When the lock displays. When the lock displays. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. 27 Select the left edge of the frame section.

select the line you want to move. and specify the dimension value. 30 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. When the lock displays. as shown. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. click Modify. click Dimension.28 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. 564 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . TIP After adding the dimension. 29 On the Design Bar.

Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. and double-click View 1. 37 In the Project Browser. click the lock to constrain the present value. 36 On the Design Bar. Creating a Window Family | 565 . 34 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. zoom out until it displays. click the lock to constrain the present value. click Finish Profile. click . click Finish Sweep. If necessary. expand 3D Views. this is the top of the window opening. Next. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 31 Select the 40 mm dimension. 33 On the Tools toolbar. The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. 35 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 32 Select the 20 mm dimension.Modify each dimension if necessary. When the lock displays. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. When the lock displays. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame.

and click OK. 2 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. press TAB to cycle through the selection options. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. 566 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 39 Proceed to the next exercise. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. and select the option. under Specify a new Work Plane. under Elevations.45 mm for Depth. double-click Exterior. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Lines.38 In the Project Browser. click . 5 On the Options Bar. and enter . Chain of walls or lines. and select Lock.

■ Click . Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar. set the following options: ■ ■ Click . and lock icons display on each line.The entire sash outline is selected.50 mm for Offset. Creating a Window Family | 567 . 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. Enter .

568 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click Finish Sketch. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry. double-click View 1.9 On the Design Bar. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. The window sash extrusion is now complete. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Right. under 3D Views. 10 In the Project Browser. under Elevations.

under Elevations. double-click Right. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. and enter 30 mm for Offset.Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating a Window Family | 569 . as shown. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. click . Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser.

5 On the Design Bar. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. click Dimension. 570 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

15 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior. press TAB until the chain of lines is preselected. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane.7 On the Design Bar. and click to create the glass boundary. 16 On the Options Bar. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. and select Lock. click . click Set Work Plane. 8 Select the reference plane. enter 12 mm for Depth. 17 Place the cursor on one of the sash extrusion lines. click . and click OK. under Identity Data. click Lines. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Creating a Window Family | 571 . 14 In the Work Plane dialog box. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name.

under Elevations. 24 In the Project Browser. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog box. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. under 3D Views. click . sash. 20 Select the glass extrusion. double-click Right. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch.18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Identity Data. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. and click OK. After the family is loaded into a project. View the window model with frame. 572 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 23 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash. Enter 1500 mm for Width. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry. Move the Family Types dialog box off to the side so you can see the window model. Click Apply. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. For example. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. enter 1000 mm for Height. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Click OK. enter 1500 mm for Height. 26 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. Click Apply. Creating a Window Family | 573 . 27 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. NOTE After flexing the model. Under Other. Enter 2000 mm for Width.Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar.

double-click Exterior. click Dimension. 574 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions. 2 On the Design Bar. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. the exact location is not critical.Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. under Elevations. click Ref Plane. Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. After adding the dimension. 4 On the Design Bar.

> for Label. as shown.5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar.. 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. Do not be concerned with dimension values. Do not be concerned with dimension values. 8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. 9 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select <Add parameter. as shown.. Creating a Window Family | 575 .

11 On the Design Bar. Under Parameter Data. enter Mullion Offset for Name. Click OK. select Dimensions. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label.10 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Dimensions. Under Group parameter under. select Family parameter. 13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom. 14 Click the dimension value. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. and enter 350 mm as the new value. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. Select Instance. click Modify. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. and click OK. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. 12 In the Family Types dialog box. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. 15 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. 576 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. However. click Set Work Plane. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. After you complete the sketch. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. click Lines. 21 In the Work Plane dialog box. 22 On the Design Bar. enter 14 mm for Depth. click Modify. 18 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. Creating a Window Family | 577 . As you did before. 20 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Mullion Offset for Label. and click . Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.17 On the Options Bar. Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. move the dimension value as shown. under Specify a new Work Plane. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash.

click Dimension. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. select <Add parameter> for Label.26 On the Design Bar. 578 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 29 On the Design Bar. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. click Modify. Move the dimension values as shown. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 30 On the Options Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal.

33 On the Design Bar. select Dimensions. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges. click Finish Sketch. select Mullion Width for Label. This is changed in later steps. Under Group parameter under. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. and on the Options Bar. Under Parameter Data. Select the dimension. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. select Family parameter.31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Remember. enter Mullion Width for Name. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. Select Type. Click OK. Creating a Window Family | 579 . 32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. ■ ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width.

Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. and aligned with the sash edge. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog box. Move the dialog box off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. evenly spaced. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. and the mullions stretch with the new window height. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. 35 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. 580 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. In this case. Under Other. and click Apply.Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. enter 1500 mm for Height. or undoing the same. NOTE After flexing the model. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Click Apply. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Enter 1500 mm for Width.

43 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. click Lines. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Set Work Plane. click Dimension. enter 1000 mm for Height. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. as shown. and click OK. Enter 2000 mm for Width. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Creating a Window Family | 581 . Click OK. and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 41 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. Click Apply. 45 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. Under Other. 44 On the Design Bar. 42 On the Options Bar. Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 38 On the Design Bar. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. click Dimension.37 In the Family Types dialog box. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. 46 On the Design Bar. click . enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. 47 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. 39 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Work Plane dialog box.

Remember. click Finish Sketch. select Mullion Width for Label. Select the dimension. select Mullion Width for Label. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. click Modify. 50 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. 582 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .48 On the Design Bar. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. and on the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ 51 On the Design Bar. 49 On the Options Bar. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Move the dimension value as shown.

Flex the window model 55 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete. Creating a Window Family | 583 . you can still see the window. 54 In the Project Browser. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. click Join Geometry. Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. double-click View 1. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. and select the vertical mullions. If necessary. Join the mullion geometry 52 On the Tools menu. click Family Types. under 3D Views. 56 On the Design Bar. 53 Select the horizontal mullions.

Under Other. enter 800 mm for Default Sill Height. enter 1500 mm for Height. enter 1000 mm for Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Click Apply. Click Apply. Assigning Materials to the Window Components. return the window to its original dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. Enter 1500 mm for Width. sash. 58 In the Family Types dialog box. Under Other. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.57 In the Family Types dialog box. Enter 2000 mm for Width. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. Click OK. 584 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . you assign materials to the frame.

under Elevations. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. click Duplicate. Dark. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. click the Model Graphics Style control. 3 In the New Material dialog box. click OK. Yellow/.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. double-click Exterior. and click OK. and click OK. 8 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Materials dialog box. and select Shading with Edges. 9 Select the window frame sweep. under AccuRender. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. and the mullions. 5 In the Material Library dialog box. No Gloss. click Materials. the sash. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. select Stained. 4 In the Materials dialog box. click for Texture. enter Pine Frame for Name. 2 In the Materials dialog box. Creating a Window Family | 585 . sash. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions.

select Edit for Visibility. 18 On the Design Bar. Medium. 23 Under Detail Levels. 17 In the Element Properties dialog box. verify that Coarse. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 14 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. and click OK. 13 In the Materials dialog box. under 3D Views. 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. under Identity Data. and Fine are selected. and click OK. click OK. 21 On the Options Bar. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. 586 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. double-click View 1. under View Specific Display. click for Material. clear the other view options. and click OK. Medium. 12 Under Materials and Finishes. select Pine Frame for Name. and Fine are selected. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits).10 On the Options Bar. under Graphics. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. double-click Right. 20 Select the glass extrusion. under View Specific Display. verify that Coarse. 24 In the Project Browser. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. click Visibility. 16 Under Detail Levels.

25 Zoom in on a window corner. and glass display their assigned materials. mullions. sash. The window frame. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. Creating a Window Family | 587 . You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. Defining New Window Types.

enter 2000 mm for Height. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. and click OK. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. 588 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. and click Apply. In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog box. 2 On the Design Bar.

Creating a Window Family | 589 . enter 1000 mm for Height. click New. click New. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name. 10 In the Name dialog box. and click OK.The window height is doubled. under Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. 9 Under Family Types. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog box. 7 In the Name dialog box. but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. Click Apply. and click Apply. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. Enter 1250 mm for Height.

and click Open. 24 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Wall. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. Click Apply. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. 20 In the Open dialog box. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. 590 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . navigate to the location of your Training Window.rfa file. select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. click Save. 31 On the Design Bar. click Window. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. 19 On the Options Bar. click Load. Enter 1500 mm for Height. 23 On the Design Bar. 32 On the View menu. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. Click Apply. 33 Zoom in on the center window. select it. 27 In the Type Selector. 29 In the Type Selector. Click OK.rfa. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. clear Tag on Placement.11 In the Family Types dialog box. click Thin Lines. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. Enter 1300 mm for Height. click to start a new project based on your default template. 13 In the Name dialog box. click New. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 25 In the Type Selector. Notice the detail that displays. click Window. Training Window. 15 On the File menu.

Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. click the Model Graphics Style control.34 On the View toolbar. you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. rolltop. 35 On the View Control Bar. Creating a Furniture Family | 591 . You begin by creating the desktop. You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. click . You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. and select Shading with Edges. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. drawer base. Finally. and drawers as extrusions.

Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. 2 On the File menu. 8 Draw two vertical reference planes. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. 9 On the Design Bar. their exact location is not critical. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. Floor Plan: Ref. click Dimension. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. 6 On the Design Bar. 592 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 Maximize the view. Level. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog box. click Ref Plane. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. 5 On the View menu. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown.rft. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. and click Open. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. they represent the furniture centerline axes. Select Metric Furniture. click New ➤ Family.

and ending at the right reference plane. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. 13 Select the left reference plane. click Modify. Click the EQ icon to make the segments equal. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. Creating a Furniture Family | 593 . It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm.10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. 12 On the Design Bar. as shown.

and ending at the lower reference plane.15 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. 594 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . as shown. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created. as shown. add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area.

click Modify. Creating a Furniture Family | 595 . Afterwards. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed. click Modify.18 On the Design Bar. 22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. horizontal reference plane. 21 On the Design Bar. 19 Select the upper. TIP To do this.

Select Type..23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Under Parameter Data.> for Label. select Dimensions. select Family parameter. select Family parameter. Click OK. select Dimensions. 24 On the Options Bar.. 27 On the Options Bar.. Select Type. enter Depth for Name. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. select <Add parameter.> for Label. Click OK.. For Group parameter under. 596 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. enter Length for Name. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. For Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data. select <Add parameter.

Click OK. Creating a Furniture Family | 597 .These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. 30 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. Click Apply. 32 In the Family Types dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. enter 2000 mm for Length. Therefore. enter 3000 mm for Length. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters. it will also adapt to the same changes. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes. Click Apply. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. you can still see the model.

and enter 100 mm for Depth. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 7 On the Design Bar. and click to select all four symbolic lines. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. double-click Front. 11 In the Project Browser. click Symbolic Lines. NOTE In the image below. click . 598 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Level: Ref. click Lines. click Set Work Plane. 2 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. 5 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 4 On the Design Bar. click . Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box. 10 On the Design Bar. Level for Name. Your lines may have a lighter weight. under Elevations.

press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick.. 22 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. as shown. select <Add parameter. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. and select the bottom edge. 13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. Creating a Furniture Family | 599 . 18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. and select the top edge.> for Label. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar.. click Modify. click Modify. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. 12 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar.The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level.

. and click Apply. 31 In the Family Types dialog box. 27 On the Design Bar. Select Type. Click OK. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog box.> for Label. select <Add parameter. Under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. enter Height for Name. For Group parameter under. enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1200 mm for Height. click Family Types.23 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 30 In the Family Types dialog box. 29 On the Design Bar. you can still see the model. Select Type. click Modify. Under Parameter Data. and click Apply. 25 On the Options Bar. Enter 750 mm for Height. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. so when you open the Family Types dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. select Dimensions.. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Click Apply. select Dimensions. 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. Click OK. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. enter 4000 mm for Length. For Group parameter under. select Family parameter. enter Thickness for Name. 600 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Family parameter. and click Apply. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry. Click OK. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area.

Level. double-click Ref. 2 On the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. Click the lock icon as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. and enter 100 mm for Offset. 6 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. click Ref Plane. Creating a Furniture Family | 601 . and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. click . click Dimension.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

click . 13 On the Options Bar. click Set Work Plane. 12 On the Design Bar. as shown. under Specify a new Work Plane. Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar.8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. Level for Name. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. Lock the dimension as shown. select Level: Ref. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 11 In the Work Plane dialog box. 10 On the Design Bar. 602 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. and click OK. click Lines.

15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes. Creating a Furniture Family | 603 . two lock icons display. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. click Dimension.After you complete the rectangle. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar.

22 On the Tools toolbar. . 604 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 20 On the Tools toolbar. click the Mirror tool. click . 19 Select the four sketched lines. click Modify. 23 For the align-to reference. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. using the TAB key. TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down. A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base.18 On the Design Bar. You can also highlight the entire line chain. as shown below at the cursor. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top.

and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. click Dimension. ■ Creating a Furniture Family | 605 . 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. A lock icon displays. 26 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension.

click Modify.. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. 606 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Family parameter. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. 34 On the Design Bar. Under Parameter Data. select Dimensions.> for Label.. select Drawer Base Width for Label. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. 33 On the Options Bar. Select Type.28 Add two final dimensions. For Group parameter under. select <Add parameter. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 30 On the Options Bar. as shown.

After the alignment. 37 On the Tools toolbar. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. double-click Front. under Elevations. click . a lock icon displays. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Furniture Family | 607 .35 On the Design Bar. 39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. click it to lock the alignment.

you can still see the model. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. 41 On the View toolbar. and click Apply. notice that annotations display in this view. click . Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 47 On the Design Bar. enter 2000 mm for Length. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 42 On the View menu. Enter 750 mm for Height. 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. click Family Types. click Modify. However. and click Apply. click Visibility/Graphics. 48 In the Family Types dialog box. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry.40 On the Design Bar. Click OK. 45 On the View Control Bar. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. click the Scale control and select 1:20. and click OK. 608 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. enter 4000 mm for Length. 49 In the Family Types dialog box. and click Apply. Click Apply.

double-click Right. as shown. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. click Set Work Plane. under Elevations. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane.Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. click Lines. click . Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog box. 5 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. Creating a Furniture Family | 609 . under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. and click to specify the upper left corner. 6 On the Options Bar.

610 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . click Dimension. and lock it. and lock the alignment. 10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. 11 On the Design Bar. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. 9 Select the desk top. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. then the lower horizontal sketch line. and lock it. then select the right parallel sketch line.8 On the Tools toolbar.

Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. 16 On the Design Bar. .13 On the Design Bar. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. the upper sketch line. The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Furniture Family | 611 . 15 Select the left vertical sketch line. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below. 14 On the Options Bar. click Lines. click the Fillet arc tool. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button.

612 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 18 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock icon.Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. select the right edge of the rolltop. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base. and click the lock icon. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. under Elevations. double-click Front. click . select the left edge of the rolltop.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. 23 On the Design Bar. you can still see the model. and click Apply. and click Apply. and click Apply. and click Apply. 24 In the Family Types dialog box.21 On the View toolbar. You can also use dimension constraints. Creating a Furniture Family | 613 . Enter 1500 mm for Height. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. click Family Types. If not. click . enter 4000 mm for Length. The desk should adapt to all the changes. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Enter 200 mm for Thickness.

25 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

26 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry.

Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Create the desk drawer extrusions
1 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 2 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 3 In the Work Plane dialog box, under Specify a new Work Plane, select Pick a Plane, and click OK. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base.

5 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 6 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 7 On the Options Bar, click .

8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below.

614 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical. 9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. Lock each dimension as you add it. There should be four dimensions as shown.

NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width, these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions, zoom the view until you do.

11 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

12 On the Options Bar, select Multiple Alignment. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers, select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first, and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. After selecting the line of an upper drawer, click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. 14 On the Tools toolbar, click set on the left. 15 On the Tools toolbar, click , and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the drawer

, and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers.

These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Constraints, enter 20mm for Extrusion End, and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 20 On the View toolbar, click .

Creating a Furniture Family | 615

Apply material to the desk
21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 22 On the Options Bar, click . for Material.

23 In the Element Properties dialog box, under Materials and Finishes, click 24 In the Materials dialog box, click Duplicate. 25 In the New Material dialog box, enter Desk - Wood, Cherry, and click OK. 26 In the Materials dialog box, under AccuRender, click for Texture.

27 In the Material Library dialog box, navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained, Dark, Polished. 28 Click OK. 29 In the Materials dialog box, click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 31 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control, and select Shading with Edges.

Flex the design
32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog box, you can still see the model. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

616 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

34 In the Family Types dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 4000 mm for Length, and click Apply. Enter 1500 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Enter 200 mm for Thickness, and click Apply.

The desk should adapt to all the changes. If not, you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. You can also use dimension constraints. 35 In the Family Types dialog box, return the parameters to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Dimensions, enter 2000 mm for Length. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. Enter 750 mm for Height. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. Click Apply. Click OK.

36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson, Defining New Furniture Types.

Defining New Furniture Types
In this exercise, you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created.

Dataset
Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.

Creating a Furniture Family | 617

Define new furniture types with various widths and depths
1 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog box, under Family Types, click New. 3 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name, and click OK. 4 In the Family Types dialog box, verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm, and click Apply. 5 Under Family Types, click New. 6 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth, and click Apply. 8 Under Family Types, click New. 9 In the Name dialog box, enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name, and click OK. 10 In the Family Types dialog box, enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth, click Apply, and click OK. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 11 On the File menu, click Save. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name, Training Furniture.rfa.

Load the new window family into a new project

13 On the Standard toolbar, click 14 On the View toolbar, click .

to start a new project based on your default template.

15 On the View Control Bar, click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Component. 17 On the Options Bar, click Load. 18 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Furniture.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 19 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 200 x 100mm. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk.

21 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk, and add the second desk.

618 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

23 In the Type Selector, select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. 24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks, and click to add the third desk.

You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson.

Creating a Baluster Family
In this lesson, you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Drawing a Baluster
In this exercise, you draw a baluster with an extrusion.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select Metric Baluster.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 Expand the left elevation view. 2 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

Creating a Baluster Family | 619

The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed.

Draw the baluster plan profile
3 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Ref. Level.

4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Set Work Plane. 6 In the Work Plane dialog box, select Ref. Level for Name, and click OK. 7 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations, double-click Front.

620 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

By default, the extrusion has a height of 250mm. 11 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 14 Click the lock icon.

15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster.rfa. The new custom baluster is now complete.

Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run
In this exercise, you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run.

Load the new baluster family into a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rtefile, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a straight stair run
3 On the Design Bar, click the Modelling tab. 4 On the Design Bar, click Stairs. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown.

Creating a Baluster Family | 621

6 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 7 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 8 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of your Training Baluster.rfa file, select it, and click Open. 9 On the View toolbar, click .

10 On the View menu, click Orient ➤ Southwest. 11 On the View menu, click Shading with Edges.

Apply the custom baluster to the stair run
12 On the Design Bar, click Modify and select the existing railing. 13 On the Options Bar, click .

14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, click Edit for Baluster Placement. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog box, under Baluster Family, select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster.

17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster. 19 Click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog box, click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.

622 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.

Creating Profile Families
A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings, balusters, soffits, cornices, and other sweep-defined objects. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. In this lesson, you create five different profiles: a sweep, a railing, a stair nosing, a reveal, and a host sweep. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.

Drawing a Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you draw a sweep profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default profile template
1 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown.

3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Sweep.rfa. The new sweep profile is now complete.

Creating Profile Families | 623

Drawing a Rail Profile
In this exercise, you create a rail profile.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Rail.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default rail profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top.

Draw the rail profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the rail profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Rail.rfa. The new rail profile is now complete.

Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile
In this exercise, you create a stair nosing profile.

624 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft, and click Open.

Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template
1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing.

Draw the stair nosing profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs, their exact location is not critical. However, you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. In addition, the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Stair Nosing.rfa. The new stair nosing profile is now complete.

Drawing a Reveal Profile
In this exercise, you create a reveal profile. Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Reveal.rft, and click Open.

Creating Profile Families | 625

Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face, and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal.

Draw the reveal profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Reveal.rfa. The new reveal profile is now complete.

Drawing a Host Sweep Profile
In this exercise, you create a host sweep profile. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface, which may be any vertical surface.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Family. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select Metric Profile-Hosted.rft, and click Open.

626 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, verify that Ref. Level is open. The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template, with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile.

Draw the host sweep profile
2 On the Design Bar, click Lines. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines, their exact location is not critical. However, the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane, and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane). 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection, draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown.

4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile - Host Sweep.rfa. The new host sweep profile is now complete.

Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path
In this exercise, you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Creating Profile Families | 627

Specify the family category
3 On the Modelling menu, click Create. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box, select Generic Models for Family Category, and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog box, enter Sweep for Name, and click OK.

Sketch the 2D sweep path
6 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Sweep. 7 On the Design Bar, click Sketch 2D Path. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path, the exact location of the path is not critical. 8 On the Design Bar, click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown.

9 On the Design Bar, click Finish Path.

Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path
10 On the Options Bar, click Load Profiles. 11 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 12 In the Type Selector, beside Load Profiles, select Profile - Sweep. 13 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sweep. 14 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family. 15 On the View toolbar, click .

Modify the sweep profile configuration
16 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations, and double-click South.

628 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

17 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep.

18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Ref Plane. 19 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown.

20 Select the sweep profile and, on the Options Bar, click Edit. 21 Select the sweep profile again and, on the Options Bar, click 22 In the Element Properties dialog box, do the following:
■ ■ ■

.

Under Constraints, enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. Enter 25 degrees for Angle. Under Other, select Profile Is Flipped.

23 Click OK. 24 On the Design Bar, click Finish Family.

25 On the View toolbar, click

.

The sweep profile application is now complete.

Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls
In this exercise, you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls.

Create a new project
1 On the File menu, click New ➤ Project.

Creating Profile Families | 629

2 In the New Project dialog box, click Browse, and in the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Select the DefaultMetric.rte file, and click Open. In the New Project Dialog box, click OK.

Draw a wall group
3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Wall. NOTE When you draw the walls, their exact location is not critical. 4 Draw four walls as shown.

5 On the View toolbar, click

.

6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar, click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep. 7 On the Options Bar, verify that Horizontal is selected. 8 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep.

9 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep.

630 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

10 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep
11 On the File menu, click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 In the Open dialog box, navigate to the location of Profile - Host Sweep.rfa, select it, and click Open. 13 Select the wall sweep and, on the Options Bar, click 14 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 15 In the Type Properties dialog box, under Construction, select Profile - Host Sweep : Profile - Host Sweep for Profile, and click OK. 16 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK. 17 On the View toolbar, click . .

18 In the Dynamic View dialog box, click Spin [Shift]. 19 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.

The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson.

Creating a Room Tag
In this lesson, you create a room tag which displays room name, floor and ceiling finish, and area with labels added to extract project data.

Specifying Room Tag Parameters
In this exercise, you specify the room tag parameters.

Dataset
■ ■

On the File menu, click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. In the left pane of the New dialog box, select Training Files, and navigate to the Metric ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates folder. Select M_Room Tag.rft, and click Open.

Creating a Room Tag | 631

Create a new tag based on the default room tag template
1 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit.

The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

Edit the 3mm label
2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar, click Label. 3 On the Options Bar, click .

4 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 5 In the Type Properties dialog box, select Underline, and click OK.

Add a 2mm label
6 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 7 In the Type properties dialog box, click Duplicate. 8 In the Name dialog box, enter 2mm for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog box, enter 2 for the Text Size parameter, clear Underline, and click OK. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box, click OK.

Combine labels into a room tag
11 On the Design Bar, click Label. 12 In the Type Selector, verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 13 On the Options Bar, verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown.

15 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Name, and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label.

The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 17 In the Type Selector, select Label : 2mm. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog box, select Floor Finish, and click OK.

632 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor

This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson.rft. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. notice that there is only one view available. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. and click OK. select Training Files. Select Generic Annotation. The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF. and click OK. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. select Ceiling Finish. and click Open. The new room tag is now ready for use. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag.rfa. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines. and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 633 . In the left pane of the New dialog box. Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters.20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. select Area.

3 On the Options Bar. 634 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. click . click Lines. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. 6 On the Options Bar. click . 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point.

The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. under Modify Subcategories. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. select 3 for Line Weight. click New. 14 In the Object Styles dialog box. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog box. click Modify. 12 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. click Modify. in the North Line row. 10 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. and select the upper vertical line. and click OK. and click OK. select North Line. Creating an Annotation Symbol | 635 . enter North Line for Name. click Object Styles.9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle.

4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu.rfa. This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. and click Open.rfa. Training North Arrow. select it. click New ➤ Project. select A1 metric. select Training Files. 2 In the New Project dialog box. Select the DefaultMetric. 636 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. 11 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. In the New Project Dialog box. 8 In the Open dialog box. select Training North Arrow. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow. 5 Click OK. click Modify.rte file. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. and click Open. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 12 On the Design Bar. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. click Browse. 7 On the File menu. 10 In the Type Selector. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. click Sheet. click Symbol. click OK. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 6 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete.

and your project data. text. In the left pane of the New dialog box. Select A0 metric. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. graphics. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and labels. and enter -25 for Offset. click . Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet.The titleblock has linework. and click Open.rft. click Lines. 3 On the Options Bar. click New ➤ Titleblock. select Training Files and navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. Creating a Titleblock Family | 637 .

11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. 638 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. and click to draw a new vertical line. click . 7 On the Options Bar. and click . click 8 Enter 0 for Offset.Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. . and enter 140 for Offset.

18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. enter 30 for Offset. 21 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 13 In the Type Selector. and enter 20 for Offset. 15 On the Design Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. press CTRL. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. select Title Blocks.12 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. 17 On the Options Bar. select Wide Lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. click . click Modify. Creating a Titleblock Family | 639 . and select the second and third horizontal lines. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line.

26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. 2 In the Open dialog box. select Company Logo. The titleblock linework is now complete. click Import/Link ➤ Image. and click Open. click Modify. 640 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu.jpg.25 On the Design Bar. navigate to Training Files/Common. text notes. you add a company logo. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. and labels to your titleblock.

under Text. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. and select Bold. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 11 Click OK twice. enter 10 for Text Size. click Edit/New. click Text. 6 On the Options Bar. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. click Duplicate. Creating a Titleblock Family | 641 . 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. enter 10mm Bold for Name.4 Zoom in on the logo. in the text box. click . 9 In the Name dialog box.

and select the last text note. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line. Add consultant name. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. and drag the text note down as shown. 18 Select the drag handle. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 642 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Text : 8mm. 17 On the Design Bar. and add an address and phone number as shown. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. address.Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector. 19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. click Text. click Modify.

and select the consultant text note. click Modify. Creating a Titleblock Family | 643 . click . 26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. 23 On the Edit toolbar.22 On the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. select Constrain and Multiple. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group.

644 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor .27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.

and click OK. 41 On the Options Bar. click Text. select Text : 5mm. 31 In the Type Properties dialog box. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. and enter Drawn By:.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. and enter Checked By:. Creating a Titleblock Family | 645 . and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 29 On the Options Bar. 32 In the Name dialog box. click Label. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click Duplicate. select Project Issue Date. enter 5 for Text Size. 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. click . select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. enter 5mm for Name. 34 Click OK twice. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. click Edit/New. 33 In the Type Properties dialog box. under Text. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. and enter Date:. and enter Sheet Number:. Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar.

45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. select Checked By and click OK. 646 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.44 Select the left drag handle on the label. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog box. select Drawn By. and click OK. 48 In the Select Parameter dialog box.

62 Select the left drag handle on the label. 52 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click to specify the label location. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog box.NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog box. click . enter 15mm Label for Name. select Sheet Number. enter 15 for Text Size. 59 On the Options Bar. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. 54 In the Type Properties dialog box. select Label : 15mm Label. 53 In the Name dialog box. under Text. and click OK. click Label. Creating a Titleblock Family | 647 . and click OK. 51 In the Element Properties dialog box. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. 50 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Center and Middle. click Duplicate. select Project Number. and click to specify the label location. 55 Click OK twice.

63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. 73 In the Name dialog box. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. click Duplicate. select Client Name. and click to specify the label location. click . enter 4 for Text Size. click Edit/New. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. 75 Click OK twice. select Project Name. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog box. and click OK. 70 On the Options Bar. 648 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. enter 4mm Label. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog box. 72 In the Type Properties dialog box. and click OK. under Text. and click OK. and click to specify the label location. 74 In the Type Properties dialog box. 71 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Label.

click Load. click Sheet. text. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. select it. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Templates folder. click OK.Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. 77 On the Options Bar. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog box. Creating a Titleblock Family | 649 . click New ➤ Project.rte file. and labels are now complete. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. select File Path. and click to specify the label location. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box. 80 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Open dialog box. select 4mm Label. select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. click Modify. select Training Files. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Select the DefaultMetric. 7 Click OK. click Browse. 2 In the New Project dialog box. click Left and Middle. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. and click OK. The titleblock graphics.rfa file. In the New Project Dialog box. and click Open.rfa. and click Open. and in the left pane of the New dialog box. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. 4 In the Select a Titleblock dialog box.

Enter Office Building for Project Name. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. 13 In the Type Properties dialog box. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. 11 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box. 650 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. enter Name for Drawn By. click . This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson.Modify titleblock properties 8 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Settings menu. click Modify and select the titleblock. Enter In Progress for Project Status. Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 14 Click OK. click Project Information. under Other. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. 2005 for Project Issue Date. 9 On the Options Bar. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon.

and double-click South. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. click Open. Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. click Orient ➤ Southeast. click Project Units. Set the Length units to millimeters. select Training Files and navigate to the Common folder. expand Elevations. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. on the Settings menu.NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. Next. Creating In-Place Families | 651 . set the Area to Square meters. format the Area to use 2 decimal places. 2 In the Project Browser. and click Open. expand Views (all). you create the dome roof with a revolved form. Select c_Pantheon. and set the suffix to None. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model.rvt. To change the units of measurement to meters.

and click OK. click .Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. and click Open View. 7 On the Design Bar. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. select Roofs for Family Category. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 8 In the Work Plane dialog box. Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. 5 In the Name dialog box. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. click Create. select Pick a Plane. and click OK.Center. click Axis. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. select Section: Wall Section . and click OK. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. enter Dome for Name. 10 In the Go To View dialog box. 652 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Set Work Plane. The center wall section view is displayed.

Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. 17 Move the cursor out. 15 On the Options Bar. click Lines. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. click . Creating In-Place Families | 653 .

21 Snap to reference plane intersections. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. click . and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown.The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. and select Chain. 654 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. 19 On the Options Bar.

Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. click Lines. Creating In-Place Families | 655 . click . 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 23 On the Options Bar. select Delete Inner Segment.Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 27 On the Options Bar. click . 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown.

32 On the Options Bar. click and select Chain. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. 656 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. click Lines. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint.

38 In the Materials dialog box. click . click Finish Family. under Materials and Finishes. click Revolution Properties. click Finish Sketch.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. 41 On the Design Bar. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. select Concrete . Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. click OK. click . The dome roof closed profile is now complete. 42 On the View toolbar. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. click for Material. Creating In-Place Families | 657 . 35 Select the interior face of the wall. 39 In the Element Properties dialog box.Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. 40 On the Design Bar. and click OK.

Center. and click OK. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. double-click South. select Floors for Family Category. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. select Section: Wall Section .Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. 7 In the Work Plane dialog box. 11 On the Options Bar. enter Concave Floor for Name. 9 In the Go To View dialog box. and click OK. click Solid Form  ➤  Solid Revolve. click Create. select Pick a Plane. and click Open View. click Set Work Plane. 658 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 6 On the Design Bar. click Axis. and click OK. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog box. click . 3 In the Name dialog box.

Creating In-Place Families | 659 . click .12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis.O. and select Chain. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. 14 On the Options Bar. for the start point of the floor profile as shown. Footing level line and the axis. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. click Lines.

Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. double-click 3D Section View. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. and click OK. 22 In the Materials dialog box.O. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Family.18 Specify the intersection of the T. 660 | Chapter 19 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 25 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Element Properties dialog box. 24 On the Design Bar. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. select Cobblestone for Name.O. click Finish Sketch. click Revolution Properties. This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. click for Material. click OK.

you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. At the end of this tutorial. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. In this case. not specifically how to make a floor truss. During this tutorial. In exercises that become increasingly complex.Parametric Component Design Techniques 20 In this tutorial. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. and detail level controls. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. The truss also has multiple types. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. assigned subcatecories. you will understand the process. methodology. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Autodesk Revit Building. This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. formula-based parameters. 661 . The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open-joist wood floor truss.

imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. In this case. and also works intuitively with them. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. For every complexity added to a family.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. it is not the best solution. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. In addition. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. a generic floor-based component might work. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. you should avoid over-designing the component. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require. this must be a structural beam component. the design spec requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 662 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. NOTE When creating a new family. It should also be an available option within a beam system. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. In this lesson. Although this solution is possible. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes. Two types should be created. For training purposes. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. In the next exercise. beams. you determine the requirements of the new component. and structural walls. In this case. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. Take this into consideration during your design planning.

■ What materials need the most control? These materials. the means in which to gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. These materiails can be applied using Object Styles. What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ You have completed the planning stage for the new family. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. In addition. How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. such as wood type. Selecting the Family Template. Planning a Parametric Component Family | 663 . you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. What types are most commonly used? In this training case. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. In the previous exercise. 4 Continue with the next exercise. the planning stage and questions may differ. would require Instance or Type parameters. Depending on the family you are designing. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required.

This template is the best starting point for the new family. Notice that most of the template names include the component type. The New dialog box opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog box. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. ■ Metric Structural Framing . and display functions required by structural beams. navigate to it. ■ Metric Structural Framing . 664 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template.Beams and Braces. If you are not in this folder. this template resides within the training folders and should be opened from there. spacing. for example: wall based or floor based. scroll through the various template options. 4 In the New dialog box. Notice this template offers three horizontal planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. On the right side of the New dialog box. Select it so that the preview displays. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. notice the preview. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it. These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. scroll to the structural framing templates. Because of its simplicity. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion.Complex and Trusses. For training purposes. 5 In the New dialog box. 6 Select Metric Structural Framing .Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. NOTE Although this is the template you use to start the tutorial. and notice the preview.rft.Complex and Trusses. 3 In the New dialog box.rft and notice the preview. There are two structural framing templates provided.rft This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).Beams and Braces. do not open this template. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . In addition. Like most generic family templates. select Metric Generic Model floor based.rft. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back).rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses.

double-click Front. Floor Plan: Ref. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line.Open the family template 8 In the left pane of the New dialog box. Like many templates. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. 9 Open Metric Structural Framing . Floor Plan: Ref. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. Level In this view. Level. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. you add the reference planes. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. under 3D Views. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family.rft located in the Metric  ➤ Metric Families and Templates ➤ Templates ➤  folder. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. 10 Maximize the view. under Elevations. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. Therefore. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. Creating the Component Skeleton | 665 . Creating the Component Skeleton. lines. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. 12 In the Project Browser. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson.Beams and Braces. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. however. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. click the Training Files icon. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. 3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. Reference Plane: Left. These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. you add reference planes to the beam design. double-click Ref. notice the location of the beam extents. under Floor Plans. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. In the project plan view image below. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. In the image below.Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. 666 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Level. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to.

7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). click Ref Plane.■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. Before adding new reference planes. you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. click . Creating the Component Skeleton | 667 . NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. In a later exercise. 5 On the Edit Toolbar. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion.

You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back).8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. and select the Level: Ref. double-click Front. Add ref. 10 On the Design Bar. Level as the mirror axis. click Ref Plane. under Elevations. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. select the lower horizontal reference plane. Level. To do this. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. Level. 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. click on the Edit toolbar. 668 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. click to place it as shown. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton.These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. click to place it. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. click to place it as shown. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. click Ref Plane. click . click to place it as shown. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. 14 On the Options Bar. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. 13 On the Design Bar. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. 16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. Creating the Component Skeleton | 669 . and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it.

Level. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. 670 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view. cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. click to place it as shown. 24 In the Project Browser. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. 19 On the Options Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 200 mm.You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. 20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Before you move on to the next exercise. Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. which you do in the next exercise. double-click Ref. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. specify an Offset of 238 mm.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. 2 On the Options Bar. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure.rfa. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. Creating the Component Skeleton | 671 . 29 Proceed to the next exercise.25 On the Design Bar. 28 In the Save As dialog box. It allows you to dimension between parallel lines. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown. and click Save. Make sure you remember where you saved it. click Modify. click Dimension. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. navigate to the folder of your choice. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. Adding Dimensions and Constraints. After adding the dimension. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. click . that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Wood Floor Truss. you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it.

click Dimension. double-click Front. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. 7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. Place the dimension as shown. 672 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. 6 On the Design Bar. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. click Modify. click Dimension. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. place the dimension to the left as shown. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. Level. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane. 9 On the Design Bar. and the lower horizontal reference plane. under Elevations. 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. the Center reference plane.4 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint.

11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. and place it below the dimension you added previously. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. add two dimensions as shown. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. Creating the Component Skeleton | 673 .

consider making it an instance parameter. Throughout the tutorial. When you design a new family. Level. consider making it a type parameter. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.15 Add four dimensions as shown. you will add additional reference planes. under Floor Plans. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. and constraints as needed. 674 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. In addition. You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. Creating New Length Parameters. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. consider making it a type parameter. it becomes a parameter. If the component has material that varies per component. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. double-click Ref. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. ■ ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. dimensions.rfa. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. Wood Floor Truss. Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. In the next exercise. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. In this exercise. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter.

select Family parameter. select Add parameter for Label. double-click Front. enter Depth for Name. select Family parameter. Select Type.2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. Creating the Component Skeleton | 675 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. select Add parameter for Label. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Elevations. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 7 On the Options Bar. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. ■ Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Click OK. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data. enter Chord Width for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data. Click OK. Select Type.

Click OK. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Create chord thickness parameter 12 On the right side of the model. enter Chord Thickness for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type.Create center chase width parameter 9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior. select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown. Click OK. select Add parameter for Label. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Under Parameter Data. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Select Type. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. enter Center Chase Width for Name. 676 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 13 On the Options Bar. select Add parameter for Label. select Family parameter. select Family parameter. 10 On the Options Bar. Select Type. Under Parameter Data.

select Chord Thickness for Label.TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions 15 On the right side of the model. 17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown. Creating the Component Skeleton | 677 . select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord.

Flexing the Component Model. Wood Floor Truss. thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. In this exercise. or Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you flex a family. When you load this family into a project. You should flex a new family after: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Adding or modifying an element. it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. Flexing the model means to change parameter values. This is not limited to length parameters. you should always do it from the Family Types dialog box. Preparing the family for flexing 1 When flexing the model.rfa. you can drag it to the opposing corner. you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog box for the beam. When you change a parameter value and apply the change. After you verify this. Adding or modifying a parameter. If you add a new material parameter.18 On the Design Bar. this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project. When you open the Family Types dialog. click Save. You should flex the model after any major change to the design. Adding a new constraint. you can drag it off the Revit window as shown. you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. Dimensions. Nesting a component. In the Family Types dialog box. Flexing the Component Model One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Adding or modifying a parameter formula. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family. When you open the Family Types dialog box. rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. 20 On the File menu. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 19 Click Cancel. ■ 678 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group. Dataset Continue to use the dataset. you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog box: ■ Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. click Family Types.

and click Apply. Level. 4 Enter 450 mm for Depth. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes. 800 mm for Center Chase Width. Flex the truss depth 3 In the Family Types dialog box. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. under Dimensions. Creating the Component Skeleton | 679 . and drag the dialog box so that you can view the model. In addition.Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog box. enter 600 mm for Depth. and click Apply. 2 On the Design Bar. 80 mm for Chord Thickness. notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. click Family Types.

Wood Floor Truss. When working within the Family Editor. click Save. Click OK. Adding Solid Geometry. Adding Solid Geometry In this lesson. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design. Add chord extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. double-click Left. Click Apply. you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After creating the extrusions. you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. After adding the chords. you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width.rfa. you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed. Creating Solid Extrusions In this exercise. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 680 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After flexing the design. 6 On the File menu. reset the parameters back to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 300 mm for Depth. 7 Proceed to the next lesson. you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset.Reset parameters 5 In the Family Types dialog box. under Elevations.

4 In the Work Plane dialog box. and click OK. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. select Reference Plane: Member Left.3 On the Design Bar. Adding Solid Geometry | 681 . 5 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. click . click . and verify that Lock is selected. click Lines. click . 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown. Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. the lines will no longer overlap. 10 On the Design Bar. click Name. When using the Trim tool. 11 On the Options Bar. and select Lock. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. click the part of the line you want to keep.

Dataset Continue to use the dataset.13 On the Tools toolbar. 2 Enter SD. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. double-click Front. under 3D Views. Wood Floor Truss. under Elevations. Constrain the extrusion ends 1 In the Project Browser. you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. 16 In the Project Browser. double-click View 1. click Finish Sketch. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry In this exercise. this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Select the chord extrusions. Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry. 682 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .rfa. 17 On the File menu. click . click Save. 15 On the Design Bar.

This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes. click Dimension. and click OK. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. click Family Types. enter 6000 for Length. enter 3000 for Length. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog box is open.4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right. click Apply. not the member right or member left reference planes. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. 5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Flex the design 6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Add a new dimension and constraint 9 On the Design Bar. Adding Solid Geometry | 683 . Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. On the Design Bar. and click Apply. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. as shown. you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. as shown. Therefore.

14 Click OK. Therefore. you add the web members. flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 684 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 13 In the Family Types dialog box. enter 6000 for Length. adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value. use the Align tool and add the constraint. Later in this lesson. you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value. TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected. click Family Types. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working. depth. and thickness 15 In the Project Browser. In this particular case. In a later exercise.11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. Flex the length 12 On the Design Bar. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. double-click View 1. Flex the chord width. under 3D Views. Afterwards. and click Apply. you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

click Save. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. ■ The chords should adjust to each of the new values. that allows you to easily return to the original values. and click OK. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 19 Specify the beam values shown below: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase. Creating Additional Solid Geometry In this exercise. it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. such as doubling. try picking a method. 18 In the Family Types dialog box. TIP When flexing. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Click Apply. 17 On the Design Bar. Wood Floor Truss. 20 On the File menu. 21 Proceed to the next exercise.16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges. Adding Solid Geometry | 685 . Therefore. Creating Additional Solid Geometry.rfa. click Family Types. Click Apply. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Dataset Continue to use the dataset.

8 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Ref. and verify that Lock is selected. the lines will no longer overlap. vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown. click . 6 On the Options Bar. 14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 3 On the View Control Bar. vertical member of the center chase as shown. click Lines. 5 On the Design Bar. click Lines. vertical member of the center chase as shown. 686 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. click . You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left. 10 On the Design Bar. Level. 4 On the Design Bar. click the Hide/Isolate control. under Floor Plans. click .Add the center chase extrusions 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that Lock is selected. 7 Select the four reference planes that border the left. and click Hide Object. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 12 Select the four reference planes that border the right. 11 On the Options Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click . This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines.

You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options. and lock the alignment as shown. click the lock symbol to lock the alignment. and after the alignment. This next process is very important. double-click Front. click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser. 21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. under Elevations. select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. click Align. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion. Align and lock the new extrusions 18 On the Tools menu. 19 For the align-to reference. Adding Solid Geometry | 687 . 17 Zoom in on the center chase. 20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions. it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes.15 On the Design Bar.

redo any problematic alignments and constraints. Add the truss end extrusions 28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown. Click Apply. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 688 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Flex the center chase 23 On the Design Bar.22 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Family Types dialog box. 27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. 29 On the Options Bar. select Add Parameter for Label. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. 24 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. and click OK. This will make subsequent work much easier. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. If it does not. click Modify. click Family Types. Clean up the view 26 Zoom to Fit.

on the lower chord. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. and click OK. click Lines. Sketch the right end extrusion 35 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Family Types dialog box. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. 37 On the Design Bar. and verify that Lock is selected. 39 On the Design Bar. Adding Solid Geometry | 689 . double-click Right. click Apply. Select Instance. click . 40 On the Options Bar. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 33 On the Design Bar. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. 38 In the Work Plane dialog box. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 42 On the Options Bar. and click OK. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. 31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. click Family Types. 32 On the Options Bar. select Trimmable End Length for Label. select the upper horizontal reference plane. under Elevations. Click OK. select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name. enter19mm for Offset. enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. under Parameter Data. under Dimensions. 41 On the upper chord.30 In the Parameter Properties dialog box.

click Extrusion Properties. select the upper horizontal reference plane. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown. select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name. 47 In the Element Properties dialog box. on the lower chord. click . 690 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 52 In the Work Plane dialog box. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. and verify that Lock is selected. click . 56 On the Options Bar. 48 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value. 55 On the upper chord. click Lines. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown. and click OK. Sketch the left end extrusion 49 In the Project Browser. 51 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. and click OK. click Finish Sketch. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 54 On the Options Bar. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. enter 19mm for Offset. 46 On the Design Bar. double-click Left. 53 On the Design Bar.44 On the Tools toolbar.

NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends. Add alignment constraints 63 In the Project Browser. 60 On the Design Bar. Adding Solid Geometry | 691 . 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point. they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 61 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Finish Sketch. under Constraints. click Align. double-click Front. click Extrusion Properties. specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value. under Elevations. and click OK. 65 On the Tools menu. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar. click .58 On the Tools toolbar. 59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion. click Modify. Click Apply.67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 71 On the Design Bar. this is the align-to point. double-click View 1. 75 In the Project Browser. if you select the end extrusion. Make adjustments to account for the right side. under 3D Views. Flex the design 72 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion. and lock the alignment. and lock the alignment. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply. and click OK. 692 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . TIP When you finish the alignments. 73 In the Family Types dialog box. 74 In the Family Types dialog box. If it does not.

you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way. and a rim joist. you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls. you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. Datasets Open the truss family ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 77 Proceed to the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Testing the Family in a Project | 693 . Testing the Family in a Project In this lesson. you can continue using it in the next lesson. a sill. Testing the Family in a Project. Although you could continue using the previous family.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. If you are comfortable with your design. click Open. Open the m_Wood Floor Truss_1. After you load it into the project.76 Save the Family. click the Training Files icon. you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt. NOTE Close any open families or projects. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Loading a Family into a Project In this exercise.

Load the truss family into the project 1 On the Window menu. you add several instances of the truss family to the project.Open the project file ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. expand Families. 4 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. expand Structural Framing. click Open. Open the m_WWF1. a dialog box would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active.rfa. click m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Testing a Family Instance in a Project. and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. If you had multiple projects or families open. 2 On the Design Bar. and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. click the Training Files icon. Testing a Family Instance in a Project In this exercise.rvt file located in the Metric folder. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Project Browser. click Load into Projects. 694 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques .

The rim joist was added as a beam. a wood sill.Southeast Isometric. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. and double-click 3D .Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser.Southeast Isometric. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 5 Using point-to-point insertion. expand Views. double-click 3D . and a wood rim joist. expand 3D Views. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end. 2 In the Project Browser. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown. a slab. Testing the Family in a Project | 695 . the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. double-click Level 1. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 6 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. therefore. NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams. click Beam. This project consists of foundation walls.

7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. You do not need to be precise. not the wall or rim joist.Southeast Isometric. 696 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . under 3D Views. 8 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. double-click 3D .Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. double-click Level 1.

16 Proceed to the next lesson. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. Edit a family from within a project 13 Select one of the wooden truss components. In the next lesson. 12 In the Save as dialog box. This should return the project to its original dimension. Working with Nested Subcomponents. 15 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. Because the family is already open. click Save as.Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 697 . The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. click Edit Family. The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. click Undo Drag. 14 On the Options Bar. click Yes. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. 10 On the Edit menu. 11 On the File menu.

This family is a single extrusion as shown. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array.rfa is the active file. 7 In the Type Selector. under Floor Plans. click Hide/Isolate. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. ■ ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog box. This will make aligning the wood web easier. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. click Component.rfa file located in the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families folder. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss. Open the m_Wood_Web. Level. click the Training Files icon. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. 5 On the File menu. verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. 698 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. and click Hide Object.Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. double-click Ref. This will aid in the placement of the wood web. 4 On the View Control Bar.

Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. You will align the left web component first. 10 In the Project Browser. In the following steps.9 On the Design Bar. double-click Front. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. 13 For the align-to point. click Modify. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 699 . 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. under Elevations. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. Do not select it. 14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. Align the nested web components 12 Enter . IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown.

Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. 19 On the Tools menu. click Align. 21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. In the steps that follow. 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. click Ref Plane. click Modify. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component.Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. 700 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 16 On the Design Bar. In addition.

Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. click Dimension.23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. Place the dimension as shown. ■ ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. ■ Working with Nested Subcomponents | 701 . 25 Add the following two dimensions: ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Place the dimension as shown.

Select Common for Discipline. length. 12 On the Design Bar. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. 28 In the Save As dialog box. Click OK. click Modify. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog box to facilitate typing within the formula field. select WebDepth. under Other. In the Type Parameter dialog box. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 2 In the Family Types dialog box.In the next exercise. and click OK. you add new parameters to control the web components. 5 Click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters. 27 On the File menu. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. and click Properties. you label these dimensions. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. under Constraints. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. click Add. 702 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . enter Depth . 11 In the Element Properties dialog box. under Parameter Data. click Edit/New. Select Length for Type. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. 26 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Type. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. under Parameters. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. click OK. click Save As. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. 10 In the Type Properties dialog box. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name. or the width of the center chase.

click Add. Select Instance. Click OK. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends. After you enter the formula. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field. This parameter is primarily for convenience. which must remain at least 150mm long. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords. do the following: ■ Enter CC for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Length for Type. click Add. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Other for Group parameter under. In addition. enter (Length .(CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. Click OK. under Parameters. under Parameter Data. Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter 20 In the Family Types dialog box. click Family Types. under Parameters.Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. Select Length for Type. Select Common for Discipline. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 703 . notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. Select Common for Discipline. Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter 17 In the Family Types dialog box. under Parameter Data. click Add. Select Instance. Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase 13 On the Design Bar. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 14 In the Family Types dialog box. 16 Under Other. under Parameters. enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. 19 Under Constraints.

Select Instance. enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. Add formula for Webhalflength 30 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 25 On the Options Bar. 23 Click OK.21 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. Select Integer for Type. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. under Parameter Data. under Parameter Data. select Webhalflength for Label. Select Common for Discipline. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula. 29 On the Design Bar. Click OK. enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. Select Instance. 22 Under Constraints. Add parameter to anchor web array 24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Click OK. 704 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 31 Under Constraints. 32 Click OK. 28 On the Options Bar. select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Webhalflength for Name. 27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. click Family Types.

select WebArrayLength. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems. click Family Types. and click OK. 40 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. click Modify. Flex the design 41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog box. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. 37 In the Type Properties dialog box. 38 In the Element Properties dialog box.Associate web component parameters 33 Right-click the left web component. click Edit/New. click OK. 35 In the Type Properties dialog box. Because you have added and constrained new components. it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. Click Apply. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 705 . 34 In the Element Properties dialog box. click OK. The truss should adapt to all the changes. double-click View 1. the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. under 3D Views. under Other. 42 On the Design Bar. In the Type Properties dialog box. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. If it does not. click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 39 On the Design Bar.

and click OK. Click Apply. First. and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. click Array. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. add alignment constraints.44 In the Family Types dialog box. Arraying Nested Subcomponents In this exercise. double-click Front. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. then you specify the move end point. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. When picking the corner. Select Constrain. Creating an array requires two basic steps. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. under Elevations. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. click Save. 5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. Select 2nd for Move to. you array the nested web components. Arraying Nested Subcomponents. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase. Array the left web component 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. 45 On the File menu. 706 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you specify the move start point. 3 On the Edit menu.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. click Align. 18 On the Tools menu. Align and lock the arrays 17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 10 On the Edit menu. When picking the corner. 15 On the Design Bar. Select Constrain. place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights. click Array. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 707 . 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. 16 Zoom out to view the truss. then select the line twice.6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. Enter 3 for Number. 19 In the left array. Select 2nd for Move to. 12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner. Array the right nested web component 9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. When picking the corner. 7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify. use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Group and Associate is selected. click Modify. 8 On the Design Bar.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location. 21 Within the left array. NOTE This step is very important. 708 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. select WebArrayNum for Label. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. 22 Within the right array. 29 On the Design Bar. Label the arrays 23 Select the middle web component of the left array. the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss. select WebArrayNum for Label. click Modify. you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it. align and lock the two right web components. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges. NOTE Do not select the array value. 30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. If you do not lock the edges of the array. 25 On the Options Bar. 28 On the Options Bar. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value.

33 Delete the dimension. Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. 36 Select the reference plane. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. Left. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown. This is because earlier in the tutorial. Member Left. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 709 .Notice the arrays appear to be too long. 35 Select the reference plane. click Align. and lock the alignment as shown. 34 On the Tools menu. as the align-to point.

44 Click Apply. double-click View 1. you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. 43 In the Family Types dialog box. Click Apply. enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. under Dimensions. 41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right. however. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends. Change trimmable end length value 42 On the Design Bar. fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 710 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. click Modify. click Family Types. Flex the design 45 In the Project Browser. Enter 12000mm for Length. this solution has little.NOTE With most beam families. 46 On the Design Bar. and prepare the view for flexing. Therefore. click Family Types. If it does not. significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar. under 3D Views. The truss should adapt to all the changes. 47 In the Family Types dialog box. if any. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 686mm for Depth. in this case. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. and click OK.

click Load into Projects. select Override parameter values of existing types. 49 On the File menu. and click OK. should be open. the project. 2 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. 3 In the Reload Family dialog box. Reloading a Family into a Project. Enter 6000mm for Length. reset the values as follows: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 286mm for Depth. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. you reload the truss family into the project. 48 In the Family Types dialog box.TIP When flexing a complex model such as this. displays. Reload the truss into the project. m_WWF1. In addition to the truss family. these steps have been reduced. and click Yes.rvt. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length. you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes. however. for training and time purposes. Reloading a Family into a Project In this exercise. 1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View. View 1. click Save. You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. Working with Nested Subcomponents | 711 . Click Apply.

Notice the truss has adapted to the changes. Materials. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. Materials. In the next lesson. 6 In the Project Browser. you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files.4 In the Project Browser. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application. and Parameters. double-click 3D . and Parameters In this lesson. Applying Subcategories. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. under 3D Views.Southeast Isometric. you create and apply subcategories and materials. under Floor Plans. Applying Subcategories. 7 On the Edit menu. double-click Level 1. click Undo Drag. 712 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 9 Proceed to the next lesson.

Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Apply Object Styles 1 Zoom in around beam system. click the Training Files icon. you create new subcategories within the truss family. Within the family. the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Applying Subcategories.rvt file located in the Metric folder. four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.Creating and Applying Subcategories In this exercise. click Open. the material values were set to By Category by default. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. In addition. Materials. In this dataset. and Parameters | 713 . Open the m_WWF2.

13 In the Object Styles dialog box. and expand the category Structural Framing.Timber for Name. click Undo Object Styles. click in the material field until the button displays as shown. click Wood . and click OK. verify that the Model Objects tab is selected. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog box. Notice the Wood . 7 In the Object Styles dialog box.2 On the Settings menu. it would also have the wood material applied to it. 6 In the Materials dialog box. you have more control over component visibility within a project. 10 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Structural Framing category line. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor. 12 On the Settings menu. When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category. click New. all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. under Modify Subcategories.Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components. click Edit Family. click Object Styles. click Object Styles. If there was a metal beam in this building model. 5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 714 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 8 On the Edit menu. In addition. click OK. Create subcategories within the truss family 9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 3 In the Object Styles dialog box. and click OK. enter Wood Floor Truss for Name.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components 28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components. click Modify. 25 On the Options Bar. click . under AccuRender. click Duplicate. click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. click . 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click Check None. Apply the subcategory to the truss components 22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. and click OK. and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. 24 In the Filter dialog box. 29 On the Options Bar. select Other. 19 In the Material Library dialog box. 20 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. select Natural. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. and click OK. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. Materials. click . select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory. click OK. under Identity Data. and click OK. click Edit Family. Yellow.Apply material to subcategory 15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory. 17 In the New Material dialog box. 18 In the Materials dialog box.No Gloss for Name. 16 In the Materials dialog box. and Parameters | 715 . The web component family opens in a 3D view. press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. enter Wood Floor Truss. 23 On the Options Bar. Applying Subcategories. 21 In the Object Styles dialog box.

click New.31 On the Settings menu.rvt. click Object Styles. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components. click Duplicate. Reload web component into truss family 44 On the Design Bar. select Wood Floor Truss . 39 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. and click OK. 34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss . and click the button to open the Materials dialog box. you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.Webs.Webs subcategory. click OK. select Natural. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog box. under Identity Data. 38 In the Material Library dialog box. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog box.rfa. and click Yes. 32 In the Object Styles dialog box. click Load into Projects. select Override parameter values of existing types. 46 In the Reload Family dialog box. and click OK. and click OK.No Gloss for Name. 41 Select the web extrusion. and click OK. click Load into Projects. select m_WWF2. under AccuRender. navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine. under Modify Subcategories. Reload truss into project 47 On the Design Bar. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog box. enter Wood Floor Truss . 43 In the Element Properties dialog box. enter Wood Floor Truss . 36 In the New Material dialog box. 40 In the Object Styles dialog box. click . 42 On the Options Bar. click . 35 In the Materials dialog box.Webs for Name.Webs for Subcategory. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. Yellow. 716 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog box. click OK.

click Undo Visibility/Graphics. Applying Subcategories. 58 Proceed to the next exercise. click Visibility/Graphics. Open truss family for editing 1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. click Save As. 52 Click OK. Notice the web extrusions not longer display. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise. and click OK. 2 On the Options Bar. Creating Material Parameters. 51 In the Object Styles dialog box. clear Wood Floor Truss Webs.49 In the Reload Family dialog box. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. Notice the two new subcategories are listed. Materials. 56 On the File menu. click Edit Family. under Visibility. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog box. however. and click Yes. 53 On the View menu. the stick symbols continue to display. Creating Material Parameters In this exercise. expand Structural Framing. expand Structural Framing. navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. and Parameters | 717 . click Object Styles. 55 On the Edit menu. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components. select Override parameter values of existing types. 50 On the Settings menu. you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. under Categories. 57 In the Save as dialog box.

14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog box. In this case. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar. under Parameters. click Modify. click . 27 On the Options Bar. click . select m_WWF2. 30 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Family Types. press TAB. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. notice the default material is By Category. click the button to the right of the Material value field. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. click . do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. 718 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and click OK.Steel for Name. click Check None. 11 In the Filter dialog box. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog box. 28 In the Element Properties dialog box. Link truss extrusions to material parameter 9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 17 On the Options Bar. and select the component. 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog box. 19 In the Type Properties dialog box. 12 On the Options Bar. select Metal . 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. 21 Click OK twice. click OK. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. select Floor Truss Material. under Materials and Finishes. 22 On the Design Bar. under Other. click Add. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Click OK. select Floor Truss Material. click OK.Create material parameter 4 On the Design Bar. select Structural Framing (Wood Floor Truss). 5 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. do not assign a material to the parameter. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. and click Yes. 29 In the Materials dialog box. this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. and click OK. click Load into Projects. click Edit/New. 8 Click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. When reloaded into a project. click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. click .rvt. under Parameter Data. click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. select Override parameter values of existing types.

rvt file located in the Metric folder. you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.31 On the Design Bar. In the next lesson. Open the m_WWF3. click Modify. However. 34 Close any open files. click Save. click Open. Assigning Detail Level and View Controls In this exercise. you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels. a new dataset is supplied. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. Controlling Component Visibility. because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Controlling Component Visibility In this lesson. Datasets ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Notice the rim joist no longer displays. 35 Proceed to the next lesson. 32 On the File menu. 33 On the File menu. Controlling Component Visibility | 719 . Currently within the truss. click Detail Level. You can save the open files if you wish. and click Coarse. click the Training Files icon. click Close. notice the floor truss has not changed appearance. Change detail levels 1 On the View Control Bar. all elements display at all times in all views. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

12 In the Load into Projects dialog box. click Edit Family. and click OK. select Override parameter values of existing types. 18 On the Options Bar. clear Coarse. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Under Detail Levels.rfa. clear Coarse. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing. clear Coarse. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. Click OK. clear Plan/RCP. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. clear Plan/RCP. click Visibility. Click OK. click Edit Family. 3 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 In the Reload Family dialog box. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. clear Plan/RCP. 6 On the Options Bar. 720 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Clear Left/Right. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Visibility. click Visibility. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels. Assign detail level to center chase extrusions 14 Select the center chase extrusions. click Load into Projects. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. Click OK. 8 Select the web extrusion. 15 On the Options Bar. Assign detail level to truss ends 17 Select the end extrusions. 11 On the Design Bar. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. and click Yes. Under Detail Levels. Apply detail level controls to web components 5 Select a web component.2 Select a floor truss.

double-click Level 1. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed.Assign detail level to truss chords 20 Select the truss chords. and click Coarse. 28 On the View Control Bar. and click Yes. under Floor Plans. Controlling Component Visibility | 721 . 26 On the View Control Bar. Click OK. Notice the symbolic representation of the beams. 27 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog box. click Detail Level. and click Medium. select m_WWF3. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog box. 25 In the Reload Family dialog box. click Load into Projects. select Override parameter values of existing types. clear Coarse. 21 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ Under Detail Levels. click Detail Level. and click OK. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed. Reload truss into project 23 On the Design Bar.rvt. click Visibility.

Creating Component Types In this lesson. 2 On the Options Bar. enter 64mm for Chord Width. you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Notice the chord changes width. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 7 In the Family Types dialog box. TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. 6 In the New dialog box. NOTE When creating new components. 5 In the Family Types dialog box. click New. creating predefined types can speed up the design process.29 On the File menu. Open the truss family for editing 1 Select a floor truss. and click Apply. and click OK. 722 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 8 In the New dialog box. click New. 10 Select 89x38 for Name. under Dimensions. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project. you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. Creating Multiple Component Types In this exercise. and click OK. enter 64x38 for Name. and click Apply. 9 In the Family Types dialog box. under Family Types. click Edit Family. enter 89x38 for Name. click Save As. click Family Types. 11 Click OK. 30 In the Save As dialog box. In the final exercise. you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length. Create new types 4 On the Design Bar. 31 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating Component Types. create types for those most frequently used in your projects. under Family Types. navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. The truss returns to its original designed value.

double-click 3D . 23 Proceed to the final exercise. <result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog box. 8 In the Family Types dialog box. Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog box. Notice the truss depth increases. if(Length < 9000. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Type Selector. 350. 400))) 6 Click Apply. 22 On the File menu. Creating Component Types | 723 . 400. 20 On the Design Bar. and click Apply.Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. click Beam. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. Notice the two beam types. <result-if-true>. click Family Types.rvt. enter 6000 for length. Creating Conditional Formulas. and click OK. 14 In the Reload Family dialog box. click Edit Family. click Load into Projects. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. and click Yes. 286. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. click Modify. 16 In the Type Selector. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. select 64x38. enter 8000 for length. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. click Apply. select Override parameter values of existing types.Southeast Isometric. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog box. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. if(Length < 7500. select m_WWF3. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. select 89x38. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space. under Dimensions. click Save.

and click Yes. click Save. 16 On the File menu. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog box. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under 3D Views. double-click 3D .Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. 724 | Chapter 20 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. click Load into Projects. 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Close any open files. You have completed this tutorial. double-click Level 1.Southeast Isometric. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. and click OK. 11 In the Reload Family dialog box. select m_WWF3. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint.rvt. select Override parameter values of existing types. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change.

725 . You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships.Area Analysis 21 In this tutorial. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Finally. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans.

726 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . expand Floor Plans. If you are using metric units. there are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. your values will be different. 4 In the Project Units dialog box. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. select Millimeters. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. For Unit Suffix. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. For Rounding. select mm. under Length. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. Open the c_Area. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. 2 In the Project Units dialog box. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. select Square meters. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. click Area Settings. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. In the final exercise. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. You add and modify the area boundaries and apply area tags. right-click in the Design Bar. 6 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 3 Under Area.rvt file located in the Common folder. In the Area Settings dialog box. Click OK. it is not necessary in this exercise. click OK. click Project Units. These schemes define spatial relationships. TIP If the Area Settings tab is not visible. click the Training Files icon. expand Views (all). select m2 Click OK. and click Area Analysis. For Unit Suffix. select 2 decimal places.

click the Room Calculations tab. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. 10 In the New Area Plan dialog box. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). Using Area Analysis Tools | 727 . 12 In the Project Browser. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Click OK. ■ At System Computed Height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. ■ 11 When the informational dialog box displays. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. At Specified Height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. the system-computed height defaults to the level. or 0. forming a closed loop. click Area Plan. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan.7 In the Area Setting dialog box. Create a gross building area plan 9 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. under Views (all). 13 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. ■ 8 Click Cancel. you must manually add these boundary lines. If you select No. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). click Area Tag. When you select Yes in this dialog box. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. 14 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag.

18 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. and store area. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the exterior face of room-defining walls. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. 17 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 15 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. common areas. click Area Boundary. Click OK. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. 728 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. 16 In the New Area Plan dialog box. Next. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. click Area Plan.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. Add area boundary lines 19 On the Design Bar. you create a new area plan for rentable space.

click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. 24 On the Design Bar. 25 Select the area tag you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. click . click Area Tag. Using Area Analysis Tools | 729 . 21 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time.20 On the Options Bar. you can either draw them or pick them. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. 22 On the Design Bar. When you add area boundary lines. When you pick the walls. 26 On the Options Bar. If you do not select this option. click Modify. 23 In the upper left corner of the building model.

730 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 32 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Office area for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name.27 In the Element Properties dialog box. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. add a tag in the common area to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. click Area Tag. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 28 On the Design Bar. 31 On the Options Bar. 33 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. In the Element Properties dialog box. Click OK. 29 Add the tag to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. Select Office area for Area Type. Click OK. click Modify and select the tag. Click OK. 30 On the Design Bar. click .

and select Store Area for Area Type. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. 35 Add the last two area tags to the two areas on the right side of the building model. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. Using Area Analysis Tools | 731 . enter Core for Name. Notice that within the two store areas. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type.34 Add an area tag to the building model core. and Tenant 4 in the lower right.

You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and when the color legend displays. Create a color fill plan 1 On the Area Analysis tab of the Design Bar. click Save. In this exercise. 732 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis . 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. and click Save. click Color Fill. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. 37 Navigate to your preferred directory. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. name the project Area-in progress. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. In the next exercise.36 On the File menu. click to place it.rvt.

under Category. click the Fields tab. 7 Under Available fields.3 When the dialog box displays. and click OK. select Areas (Rentable). click Schedule/Quantities. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Using Area Analysis Tools | 733 . select Area Type and click Add. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. 5 In the New Schedule dialog box. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog box.

734 | Chapter 21 Area Analysis .9 Click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog box are displayed as column headings within the schedule.

and roofs. building elements. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. 735 . or both. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. In this tutorial. you can specify the view to display massing elements. you then need to update the building face. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. floors.Massing 22 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. After you make building elements. If you modify a massing face. curtain systems. At any time.

floor. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. click Create Mass. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. 3 Click OK in the Name dialog box to accept the default name Mass 1. Open the m_Massing_Start. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. and click 6 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. 4 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. roofs. 736 | Chapter 22 Massing . and floors. and cutting geometry. click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. on the Options Bar.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. You assign the default wall. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. 5 On the Sketch Design Bar. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. under Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click the Training Files icon. and click Massing. click Open. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. sweeps. under Floor Plans.

enter 1550 mm for the Offset. 21 In the Materials dialog box. and click OK. Create next extrusion form 13 In the Project Browser. Using Massing Tools | 737 . under Constraints. and click 16 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click . This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. click Finish Sketch. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. 12 On the View toolbar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Materials and Finishes. and click OK. 23 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). click Lines. 17 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 10 In the Element Properties dialog box.7 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. on the Options Bar. and then click . enter 25000 for Extrusion End. click the Value for Material. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Reference. double-click Level 1. 19 On the Design Bar. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. click Finish Sketch. 20 In the Element Properties dialog box. 11 On the Design Bar. under Constraints. Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 9 In the Materials dialog box. click Extrusion Properties. 15 On the Sketch Design Bar. and click OK. 18 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click the Value for Material. click Extrusion Properties. 22 In the Element Properties dialog box. 14 On the Design Bar. and then click . under Materials and Finishes.

24 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). under Views (all). click Lines. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. and click on the Options Bar. and click OK. press TAB to highlight the entire face. select Pick a plane. 29 Click to select the face. Continue creation of next massing form 25 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to see the results. highlight the larger form. under Views (all). Sketch the blend base 31 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 30 On the Sketch Design Bar. double-click West. 26 On the Design Bar. 738 | Chapter 22 Massing . 28 In the drawing area. TIP If necessary. 27 In the Work Plane dialog box. The second form is on top of the first form.

39 On the Edit toolbar. and delete the vertical construction line. and click to select the line start point. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click Modify. Using Massing Tools | 739 . Next. 34 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. 36 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. click . 37 On the Design Bar. TIP If you do not see this option. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 38 Select the arc and the horizontal line. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. 33 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc.32 On the Options Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. click . click .

click . click Blend Properties. 43 In the Project Browser. click 47 Create an arc as shown. click Finish Sketch. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 48 On the Design Bar. and click OK. . click 45 Sketch the horizontal line as shown.40 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. double-click East. 50 On the Design Bar. Sketching the blend top 42 On the Design Bar. . under Views (all). on the Options Bar. 46 On the Options Bar. 44 On the Design Bar. 41 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown. 740 | Chapter 22 Massing . 49 In the Element Properties dialog box. 51 On the View toolbar. click Edit Top. click Lines and. under Elevations (Building Elevation).

2 In the drawing area. click Ref Plane. select the mass. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. In this exercise. 7 Using the same technique. In the next exercise. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. under Views (all). 4 On the Options bar. Using Massing Tools | 741 .52 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. click and enter 15000 for Offset. as shown. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. double-click Level 1. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model.rvt. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 1 In the Project Browser. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. m_Massing_Start.

14 Under Constraints. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. click Finish Mass. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click Save As. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. 18 On the Mass Design Bar. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 On the File menu. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. 17 On the View toolbar. snap the corners to the intersections. In this exercise.When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. click Lines and. on the View Control Bar. 13 In the Element Properties dialog box. specify Mass (Transparent) for Material. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. click and select Chain. and then click Hidden Line. 15 Click OK. click Extrusion Properties. and 0 for Extrusion Start. click Finish Sketch. When sketching each extrusion. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. 12 On the Design Bar. 20 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. 742 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Void Form ➤  Void Extrusion.rvt. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. click .

click Save As. and click OK. Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. Finally. 2 In the Family Types dialog box. and click OK. 5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name.Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you create new family types from a mass family file.rfa. 3 In the Name dialog box. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. click the Training Files icon. and click Apply. and 9000 mm for Depth. under Other. 9 Click OK. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. Open Box. click Open. and click Apply. Dataset ■ ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. enter 15000 mm for Width. click New. 11000 mm for Height. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. click Family Types. and 18000 mm for Depth. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. In this exercise. 4 In the Family Types dialog box. 12000 mm for Height. and 6000 mm for Depth. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 743 .rfa. and click Apply. 18000 mm for Height. and click OK. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. 10 On the File menu.

and Triangle. 9 In the Type Selector. 6 Navigate to the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Massing folder. You also load other existing mass families and place them.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. 1 If not already selected. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. Arc Dome. click the Training Files icon. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all).rfa family files. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. click the Training Files icon. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog box.rvt file located in the Metric folder.rfa. click Place Mass. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 7 Open the Box-Training. double-click Site. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 4 On the File menu. click Open. under Floor Plans. Semi Barrel Vault.rfa. Open the m_Massing_In-place. 2 In the Project Browser.rfa. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 10 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. 744 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 3 On the View Control Bar.

select the 3 boxes. 15 In the Type Selector. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 745 . 12 Select the box. and click . 23 Place the cursor in the drawing area. 21 In the Type Selector. select Rotate after placement. enter 90 for Angle. 18 Press CTRL.11 On the Design Bar. 13 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. 26 In the drawing area. click Place Mass. 20 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Options Bar. select the triangle. click Modify. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. click Place Mass. and click . 14 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. and click to place the mass. 25 On the Design Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. 17 On the Design Bar. 16 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. and click OK twice. 19 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify. and click OK twice. click Modify.

you join these mass elements. 33 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. 35 On the View menu. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model.27 Select the triangle. 28 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. and click . In this exercise. 31 Place the box mass family as shown. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 746 | Chapter 22 Massing . and click OK twice. 29 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 30 In the Type Selector. Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. click . click Place Mass. 34 On the View toolbar. In the next exercise. 32 Select the box and click .

Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. and then press ESC to see the result. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. 4 Select the triangle. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 747 .rvt file. . NOTE When you join geometry. click . Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place.

under Floor Plans. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. enter SM. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. under Views (all). click 8 On the Options Bar. 748 | Chapter 22 Massing .Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. on the Edit toolbar. double-click Site. click for Axis.

17 Press ESC to see the result. 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. click . click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. In this exercise. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 749 . Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. you joined mass elements together. and then select the triangle. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. .12 Click to mirror the existing massing element.

5 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 2 On the Window menu. 7 In the Type Selector. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box. 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. 750 | Chapter 22 Massing . select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. under Floor Plans. under Views (all). 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. click . select Sloped (primary). You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson.rvt. select Rotate after placement. clear Curved. and select the triangle mass element. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. enter 90 degrees for Angle. double-click Site. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. click Place Mass. 3 On the Design Options toolbar. 10 On the Options Bar. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. and then click OK. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options.

click . 24 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). 14 In the drawing area. 23 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Type Selector. click Modify. and click Wireframe. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. under Elevations. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. select the three arc domes. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. click . 21 In the drawing area. and click Wireframe. click Place Mass. 16 On the View Control Bar. 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 20 On the Design Bar. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. double-click North. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. click Modify. Using Mass Elements with Design Options | 751 . and click . TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. and click . and click OK twice.13 On the Design Bar.

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. click Make Primary. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. 36 On the File menu. you can make it the primary option. clear Sloped. 29 In the Project Browser. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. 30 On the View menu. select Curved and. 35 Click Close and close the warning that displays. 32 Click the value for Design Option. In this exercise. under Option. and click OK. click . 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 752 | Chapter 22 Massing . Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes.Create a Design Option set 26 Select the three arc domes and the two semi barrel vaults. double-click {3D}. under Views (all).rvt. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. you placed mass elements into Design Options. select Curved. click . click Visibility/Graphics. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. select Curved from the Design Option menu. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog box.

under Views (all). you pick massing faces to create walls. select Basic Wall: Exterior . click to show the massing model. Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. click . click Orient ➤ Southeast. 2 On the View toolbar. click Open. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 753 . 6 On the Options Bar. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click the Training Files icon.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. click Wall by Face. Open the m_Massing_Building_Components. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. 3 On the View menu.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU.Brick on CMU.

under Floor Plans. 9 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Project Browser. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. 16 In the Type Selector. Click Wall by Face. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). under Views (all). 15 On the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. NOTE If a Warning dialog box is displayed. 12 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 5. double-click Level 3. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. under Floor Plans.8 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 754 | Chapter 22 Massing . 10 Select all the faces shown in red. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces.

Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. If desired. In this exercise. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. under Views (all). click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. click . you pick massing faces to create floors. 19 In the Project Browser. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. and click Wireframe. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. double-click Level 9. 20 On the View Control Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 755 . You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping.

756 | Chapter 22 Massing .Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. select all levels. click Visibility/Graphics. 2 On the View menu. under Views (all). 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. 3 On the Model Categories tab.rvt. 4 Click OK. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. Curtain Systems. double-click {3D}. clear Curtain Panels. 1 In the Project Browser. and Walls. click Floor Area Faces. 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK.

clear Exclude Options. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 757 . and click OK. 10 On the Options Bar. click Orient ➤ Northeast. 9 Press CTRL. 11 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box.8 On the View menu. click Floor Area Faces. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. select Levels 1-4. 12 On the Options Bar.

20 On the Options Bar. 22 In the Project Browser. 19 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces. click Floor by Face. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass. under Schedules/Quantities. click . double-click Level 1. 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Create Floors. select Level 1. 18 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 16 In the Project Browser.13 Press CTRL. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 758 | Chapter 22 Massing . under Views (all). 21 On the View toolbar. 14 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Mass Schedule. 15 In the Floor Area Faces dialog box. verify that Select Multiple is selected. click Floor Area Faces.

In this exercise.rvt. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. you pick massing faces to create roofs. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. under Views (all). click Roof by Face. You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 759 . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors.

and then click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. Curtain Systems. select Basic Roof : Generic . 11 On the View menu. 760 | Chapter 22 Massing . 5 On the Options Bar. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. select Curtain Panels. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. and Walls. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof.400mm. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family.4 In the Type Selector. 9 On the Options Bar. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. click Create Roof. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected.

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 761 . 3 In the Type Selector. be sure that Select Multiple is selected. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise.In this exercise. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. double-click {3D}. click Curtain System by Face. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 5 Press CTRL.rvt. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. under Views (all).

click Create System. 7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes. 762 | Chapter 22 Massing .6 On the Options Bar.

9 On the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 763 . Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. click Create System.8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. In this exercise. select the blended form on the in-place mass.

2 On the View menu. under Floor Plans. and then click OK. and click OK. enter 30000 for Width. and click OK. Floors. clear Curtain Panels. under Views (all). double-click Site. click Visibility/Graphics. 5 In the Element Properties dialog box. 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Edit/New. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 764 | Chapter 22 Massing . click OK.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Roofs. Curtain Systems. and Walls. Next. 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. 8 In the Type Properties dialog box. 6 In the Type Properties dialog box. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements.rvt. click Duplicate.

14 Open the 3D view to see the result. 11 On the Options Bar. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 765 .10 On the Design Bar. clear Exclude Options. click Modify. 12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown.

In the next steps. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. 17 On the Options Bar. 15 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog box. click OK. 766 | Chapter 22 Massing . click Remake. 19 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. Also. under Views (all). you want to select the smaller one. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown.The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. under Floor Plans. click . TIP To select the curtain wall. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here.

Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 767 . 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Select the roof as shown. click Remake.TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. you will notice that Revit Building resized the floors.

and click Remake. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. you changed the size of an existing mass family. 768 | Chapter 22 Massing . Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. In this exercise. 1 Open the 3D view. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.rvt.

9 Select Mass. If desired.Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. and click Duplicate. to the building shell. click All to select all categories.Massing only. You might create the model shown. click Visibility/Graphics. In this exercise. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 769 . 5 On the View menu. This concludes the massing tutorial. right-click on the 3D view. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 6 On the Model Categories tab. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. such as columns and an extruded roof. 3 In the Project Browser. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. and click OK. 4 Rename the view 3D .

770 | Chapter 22 Massing .

Site 23 In this tutorial. you use the site tools in Autodesk Revit Building to add and modify site components within a project. 771 .

You add property lines manually. 772 | Chapter 23 Site . right-click in the Design Bar. and click Site. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. convert the data to a table. you add a building pad to the site. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. This project file was created using the default metric template.rvt file located in the Metric folder. In the second part of this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. islands. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. click the Training Files icon. and walkways. 4 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. 3 On the Design Bar. click Toposurface. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. click Open. Using the first method. click Point. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. and double-click Site. you create a toposurface using two different methods. and then modify the data. Open the m_First_Project. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. In the final exercises.Using Site Tools In this lesson. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order.

enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm.6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. Using Site Tools | 773 . Use the following illustration as a reference. 8 On the Options Bar. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour.

click Model Graphics Style. 12000 mm. 15 On the View Control Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Settings menu. 14 On the View toolbar. and click OK. Use the following illustration as a reference. under Increment. 15000 mm. click Site Settings. and click Shading with Edges. click . under Additional Contours. 13 In the Site Settings dialog box.10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 774 | Chapter 23 Site . This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. enter 1500 mm. click Finish Surface.

Under Layer/Level Colors. under Views (all). under Views (all). 28 On the Design Bar. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. Under Import or Link. click Yes. 24 In the Project Browser. Before importing the contour data. Click Open. modify the level names and elevations. and double-click South. click the Training Files icon. Using Site Tools | 775 . click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Modify. and click OK. on the Standard toolbar. 29 Select the imported topography. DGN. click Modify. 25 On the File menu.16 On the View toolbar. Until it is exploded. under Floor Plans. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. DXF. rename the level Base Site Elevation. and press ENTER. select Preserve colors. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. 19 On the Design Bar. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. click to delete it. double-click Site. it is considered an import symbol. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and press ENTER. 23 Click the Level 1 text. 26 In the Import/Link dialog box: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 21 Click the Level 2 text. SAT. enter 1000 mm. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. rename the level Basement. and press ENTER. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. 18 In the Project Browser. select Current view only and choose Select for Layers. click the elevation value. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog box.

clear C_INDX. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. select it. when the edges highlight. click Toposurface. 776 | Chapter 23 Site . 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog box. The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. click Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. and then click OK. click Pin Position. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 32 On the View menu. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. When you select the import symbol. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. 31 On the Design Bar.30 On the Edit menu. click the Annotations Categories tab. 34 Under Visibility. clear Elevations. 36 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. Using Site Tools | 777 . name the project Site-in progress. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. click . you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. and click Save.rvt. click Finish Surface. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 42 On the View toolbar. Adding Property Lines. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. 43 On the File menu. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. this project file is required in its current state. 40 On the View toolbar. you add property lines using two methods. click Save As. Using the second method. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor.39 On the Design Bar. Using the first method.

and click OK. double-click Site. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. select Create property lines by sketching. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. click Property Line. If you have not completed the previous exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. do so before continuing. under Floor Plans. Site-in progress. Click Modify. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. add an arc line on the right. 778 | Chapter 23 Site . sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. Using the 3-point Arc tool. 4 On the Design Bar. click Lines. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes.rvt.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. On the Design Bar. Select and delete the right vertical line. click Finish Sketch. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. to delete them. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog box. A warning dialog box is displayed. 14 In the Property Lines dialog box. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog box depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Using Site Tools | 779 . 15 Starting in Row #1. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. on the Standard toolbar. click OK. when they highlight. click OK. 9 In the warning dialog box. select Edit Table. click 12 On the Design Bar. click Property Line. 10 In the Property Lines dialog box.7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. 8 On the Options Bar. select the lines. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings.

Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 16 Click OK. 28 On the Options Bar. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 20 Click Load. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. clear Leader. click Training Files. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. open the Metric\Metric Families and Templates\Families\Annotations folder.dwg and click OK. and click OK. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. and click Shading with Edges. click to place it. and open the folder. click Model Graphics Style. If the gap is not closed. The tags display more prominently in this view. and click Drafting. 24 On the View menu. 26 Under Visibility. click Tag. 23 In the Tags dialog box. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. click Visibility/Graphics. 780 | Chapter 23 Site . 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 27 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 30 Tag the three remaining property lines. Before adding property line segment tags. 22 Select M_Property Line Tag. click to place the property lines. right-click in the Design Bar. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. click the Imported Categories tab. 31 On the View Control Bar. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. 19 In the Tags dialog box. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. This means there is no gap in the property lines.Notice that after you complete the last line. 29 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line.rfa and click Open.

you modify site settings and contour line visibility. click Object Styles. this project file is required in its current state. you created two sets of property lines. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. click Save. click Model Graphics Style. enter the name Working Contour. and click OK. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. In the next exercise. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog box. In this exercise. 2 On the Settings menu.32 On the File menu. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings. click New. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. Using Site Tools | 781 . You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.rvt. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. verify that it is a subcategory of Topography. In the Object Styles dialog box. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. and click Wireframe. In the final step. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog box. Site-in progress. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar.

specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. 9 In the Site Settings dialog box. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. select Dash dot. select Single Value. 12 On the File menu. enter 1000. 782 | Chapter 23 Site . Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. click Close.6 In the Object Styles dialog box. 10 Under Additional Contours. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. under Contour Line Display. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Range Type. Under Line Color. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Under Subcategory. In this exercise. 7 Click OK.0 mm. Creating Topographic Subregions. select Working Contour. 11 Click OK. you created a new object style subcategory for topography. The object style subcategory. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. Working Contour. The next exercise requires a new dataset. click Site Settings. select a shade of Brown. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. Under Line Pattern.

and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. click the Training Files icon.rvt file located in the Metric folder. such as material. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. click Lines. parking areas. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you create topographic subregions to define roads. 2 On the Design Bar. click Subregion. Although the exact dimensions are not important. try to replicate the location and proportion. Open the m_Site. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. and islands. Using Site Tools | 783 . TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. parking areas. and islands.In the next exercise. NOTE In the Metric dataset. click Open.

5 In the Element Properties dialog box. expand Schedules/Quantities. 7 In the Element Properties dialog box.Tarmacadam for Name. click Properties. 9 On the View menu. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. select Site .Tarmacadam. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. click the Value for Material. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. and double-click Topography Schedule. under Materials and Finishes. click Shading with Edges. under Identity Data. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. 6 In the Materials dialog box. enter Parking for Name. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Design Bar. 784 | Chapter 23 Site . click Finish Sketch.Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. When you finish the sketch in a later step. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box. and click OK. and click OK.

Using Site Tools | 785 . click Subregion. click Model Graphics Style. double-click Topography Schedule. 22 In the upper-right parking area. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. under Floor Plans. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 14 On the Options Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Edit Boundary. they display within this schedule. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 18 In the Project Browser. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Within each subregion. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. click Finish Sketch. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 21 On the Design Bar.NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. As you create new subregions. click Model Graphics Style. double-click Site. Notice that the project area has increased. under Schedules/Quantities. 20 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. and click Hidden Line. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Delete overlapping lines. 16 On the Design Bar. In this training project. click Lines. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. and click Shading with Edges.

25 In the Materials dialog box.Grass for Name. 786 | Chapter 23 Site . click the Value for Material. 27 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data.23 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. 28 In the Project Browser. 29 In the Project Browser. Name each region Island . click Properties.Grass. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. enter Island . under Floor Plans. and click OK. double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. You must sketch each region separately. 24 In the Element Properties dialog box. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. click Finish Sketch.Grass. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click OK. double-click Topography Schedule. select Site . and apply the material Site .Grass for Name. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog box.

32 On the Design Bar. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. under Floor Plans. under Schedules/Quantities. click Lines. 33 On the Design Bar.30 In the Project Browser. Using Site Tools | 787 .walkway. Add the concrete walkway 31 In the Project Browser.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . double-click Site. 34 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. and apply the material Concrete . click Subregion. Notice that the schedule has been updated. Name the subregion Walkway. WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. 35 On the Design Bar.

36 In the Project Browser.NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. Site tutorial-in progress. under Schedules/Quantities. Grading the Toposurface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Notice that the schedule has been updated. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. When you use the grading tool. 788 | Chapter 23 Site .rvt. double-click Topography Schedule.rvt. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. there is still only one toposurface. and click Save. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise. 37 On the File menu. this project file is required in its current state. 38 Navigate to your preferred folder. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. click Save As.

and click Select and Edit. 3 On the Options Bar. select Copy Internal Points. 5 On the Design Bar. Using Phasing. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 7 In the Graded Region dialog box. 2 Select the toposurface. see the tutorial. double-click Site. select Existing for Phase Created. under Floor Plans. click . A warning dialog box is displayed. click Graded Region. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 8 Select the topographic surface. click Modify. and click OK. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. under Phasing.Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. 6 On the Design Bar. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. Using Site Tools | 789 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog box.

Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. 790 | Chapter 23 Site . demolished. 10 Press DELETE. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. and new. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area.

Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style.11 On the View Control Bar. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. click Point. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 15 On the Options Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. and click Hidden Line. Using Site Tools | 791 . 13 Press DELETE. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration.

Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click . and click Shading with Edges. The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. click Finish Surface. click View Properties. click .17 On the Design Bar. 20 On the View toolbar. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. 19 On the View Control Bar. 18 On the View toolbar. 792 | Chapter 23 Site . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Model Graphics Style.

specify Existing for Phase. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. When you add a building pad. 25 In the Element Properties dialog box. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. only the original toposurface displays. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. 24 On the View menu. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. under Phasing. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. 23 Select the toposurface. 3 On the Design Bar. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. double-click Site. and click OK. click Save. Using Site Tools | 793 .22 In the Element Properties dialog box. Site tutorial-in progress. this project file is required in its current state. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element.rvt. NOTE By default. Therefore. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Only the graded topography displays. you create a building pad. click Lines. under Floor Plans. 26 On the File menu. 4 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. Adding a Building Pad. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. you can delete it. and click OK. click View Properties. the Pick Walls command is active. and delete it. click Pad. under Phasing. If you have an existing building model. specify New Construction for Phase.

5 On the Design Bar. click 8 On the View toolbar. . click pad. . and click Shading with Edges. 7 On the View toolbar. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style. Notice the new building 794 | Chapter 23 Site . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles.

Adding Site Components. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.90 deg. this project file is required in its current state. double-click Site. click Modify. under Floor Plans. you add parking and planting components to the site surface. Adding Site Components In this exercise. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. click Parking Component. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. click Save.9 On the File menu. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. and select the parking space. 10 Proceed to the next exercise.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Using Site Tools | 795 . 5 On the Design Bar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 3 In the Type Selector. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser.

12 In the Type Selector. Notice the new parking Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. double-click Site.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. . . 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. 8 On the View toolbar. click 9 On the View toolbar. 796 | Chapter 23 Site . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. under Floor Plans. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below. choose any tree type. click Site Component. click spaces.

15 On the View toolbar. click . 14 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Using Site Tools | 797 . click .13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface.

NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. under Floor Plans. click Apply. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. and click Apply. click Save. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Site. this project file is required in its current state. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Hidden Line. Tagging Site and Parking Components. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. 798 | Chapter 23 Site . Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Tag All Not Tagged. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. and click OK. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. In the following illustration. In the following exercise. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. 16 On the File menu.rvt. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. 5 On the View menu. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. Site tutorial-in progress.

Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. enter Size.NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 5 Under Available fields. and under Heading. Creating Parking Space Schedules. Site tutorial-in progress. this project file is required in its current state. and click Add. and click Add. select Parking for Category. 4 Under Available fields. select Mark. select Type. select Mark. select Type. click Save. 7 On the File menu. and click OK. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. enter Space. click Schedule/Quantities. If necessary. 7 Under Fields. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Using Site Tools | 799 . 8 Under Fields. and under Heading. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog box. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.rvt. click the Fields tab. 2 In the New Schedule dialog box. 6 Click the Formatting tab. The parking schedule is displayed. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges. you create a parking schedule.

finish numbering the remaining spaces. double-click Site. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 On the Window menu. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. under Floor Plans. number the first three spaces consecutively.9 On the Window menu. under Space. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. 12 In the Site plan. under Views (all). 15 On the File menu. 14 In the Parking Schedule. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. under Space. Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. click Close Hidden Windows. click Save. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. click Tile. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 800 | Chapter 23 Site .

when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. you not only simplify their placement. For example. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. you also simplify the modification process. By grouping objects. you create a model group for a typical hotel guest room. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. or with those working on a different project. all instances in the building model are updated. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. You can also nest groups within other groups.Grouping 24 Using the grouping functionality in Autodesk Revit Building. and then you create a group for a typical toilet room that is nested within the guest room group. and modify repetitive units. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. place. In this tutorial. 801 . creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create.

rvt. You zoom in so that you can select objects in the room accurately. and click Save. name the file Grouping-in progress. 10 Navigate to your preferred directory. and select the bed. Open the m_Grouping. expand Groups. and two nightstands. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. 9 On the File menu. After you create a model group.Creating Groups In this lesson. desk. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. and double-click Level 2. expand Floor Plans. Specify a view 1 In the Project Browser. Placing a Group. expand Views (all). Create a group from drawing objects 4 Press and hold CTRL.rvt file located in the Metric folder. 7 Right-click Group 1. click the Training Files icon. The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. chair. classrooms. 6 In the Project Browser. 802 | Chapter 24 Grouping . You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. click . click Save As. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include hotel rooms. Creating a Group In this exercise. and expand Model. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 Enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 8 Enter Typical guest room. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. click Open. and press ENTER. 5 On the Edit toolbar. you create a model group for a typical hotel room. and click Rename. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. The view is zoomed in to the selected room. 3 Draw a rectangle around the populated room. and typical office layouts.

Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Creating Groups | 803 . A second instance of the group is added to the drawing. select Typical guest room and drag it to the room below the original instance of the group. 7 On the Edit toolbar. Modify the origin of a group 1 In the drawing area. 4 Snap the origin to the wall intersection below the entry door. Drag a group into position 3 In the Project Browser. 2 Drag the group origin to the wall intersection directly below the entry door. you use drag and drop functionality to place a new instance of a group in the floor plan. as shown. You also mirror an existing instance of a group.Placing a Group In this exercise. using an adjacent wall as the axis of reflection. click . click Finish. 8 Select the wall abutted by the desk and tub of the original instance as the axis of reflection. Grouping-in progress. select the group. select the original instance of the group. 5 On the Options Bar. Mirror a group 6 In the drawing area.rvt.

Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Modifying a Group In this exercise. When you finish the editing routine.rvt. click Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying a Group.You should now have three instances of the Typical guest room group in your model: two with the original orientation and one mirrored. select the mirrored instance of the Typical guest room group. Grouping-in progress. 9 On the File menu. you make changes to a single instance of a group. click Edit Group. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. 2 On the Options Bar. as shown. 804 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 1 In the drawing area.

click Finish Group. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Creating Nested Groups. 6 Click the exterior wall as the move end point. Creating Nested Groups | 805 . Creating Nested Groups In this lesson. This ensures that the modifications are propagated when each new instance of the host group is added to the building model and also when each stand-alone instance of the nested group is added. All other elements in the model are grayed out. 5 Click near the left edge of the desk as the move start point. The new group is considered nested within the host group. you create a group that you add to a previously created group. and select the desk and chair. The edge of the desk is aligned with the exterior wall. 8 On the File menu. 7 On the Design Bar.The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. click . When you make changes to a nested group. the host group is also updated. and is contained in every new instance of the host group that you place in the building model. All instances of the Typical guest room are updated to reflect the change. 3 Press and hold CTRL. click Save. 9 Proceed to the next lesson.

Create a group 1 In the original instance of the Typical guest room group.Creating a Nested Group In this exercise. Grouping-in progress. The new group is then nested within the original group. 4 Enter Typical toilet room. make sure you also include both doors and their host walls. Change the origin of a group 5 Select the original instance of Typical guest room. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. right-click Group 1. and click Rename. In the selection. and the wall separating the bathroom and closet. expand Groups. click . you create a group for a toilet room that you add to the guest room group. 6 Drag the origin of the group to the intersection of the corridor wall and the guest room wall nearest the tub. 3 In the Project Browser. When you nest the toilet room in the guest room. expand Model. select all the elements that make up the toilet room and closet. and press ENTER. 806 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 2 On the Edit toolbar.rvt. which acts as the host. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson.

all instances of the nested group are updated in the building model. you add a component to a single instance of the nested toilet room group. verify that Multiple is clear. select m_Pedestal_Sink-3D. place the cursor over one of the toilet rooms and press the spacebar three times to rotate the sink to the orientation shown. Modifying a Nested Group In this exercise. Because the modified group is nested. everything else is available for selection. Add a component to the model 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. The Typical toilet room group is nested in the Typical guest room group. 10 In the drawing area. 3 In the drawing area. and all instances are updated to include the nested group. 9 On the Options Bar. the host group is also updated so that new instances of either group contain the new component. select the Typical toilet room group. click Add To Group. click Edit Group. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 2 In the Type Selector. click Finish Group. When you edit the group to add the component. 12 On the File menu.rvt. 11 On the Design Bar. Modifying a Nested Group. 8 On the Design Bar. click Save. click Component. Creating Nested Groups | 807 . The elements of the group are grayed out in every instance. Grouping-in progress.Create a nested group 7 On the Options Bar.

select the sink. 11 On the Design Bar. 808 | Chapter 24 Grouping . 8 On the Options Bar. and select the nested toilet room group. click Edit Group.4 Place the sink on the wall with the toilet in any instance of the Typical toilet room. click Finish Group. click Add To Group. 5 On the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Edit a nested group 6 Move the cursor over the same instance of the toilet room group in which you placed the sink. 7 Press TAB. 10 In the drawing area.

and press ENTER. Duplicating a Group In this exercise. You create a group based on an existing group by using the Duplicate command. Lastly. but automatically create a new group as part of the process to fix the group. You also create a detail group in the level 2 floor plan that you add to the building model in a different floor plan view. and customize it so that it fits in the available space and has the correct group nested within it. When you load the group from the library into a new project. you draw an axis of reflection at the midpoint of the building model so that the group is mirrored from its location at the top of the building model to a location at the bottom. and click Rename. Working with Groups In this lesson. Working with Groups | 809 . You use functionality that allows you to not only fix inconsistencies among instances of a group. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. Working with Groups. You then place the new group in the building model. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups. you save it to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. In subsequent exercises. You then customize the new group for use in the current building model.All instances of the nested group are updated with the change. under Groups. Grouping-in progress. 3 Enter Corner guest room. click Save. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. A new group definition (Typical guest room 2) is displayed in the Project Browser. 12 On the File menu. you add door tags to a group. Use Project Browser to duplicate a group 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. right-click Typical guest room. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. and click Duplicate. After you finish the modified group. you use the Duplicate command to create a group based on an existing group. 2 Right-click Typical guest room 2. and then save the tags as an attached detail group. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. having created a group that represents a typical layout.

to specify the group origin. select Corner toilet room. click Finish Group. 6 On the Options Bar. 12 Move the desk and chair so that they are within the room. 13 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Edit toolbar. click Remove From Group. Notice that the desk overlaps the exterior wall. 14 Select the toilet room. click . and select the desk and chair. and drag it into the corner guest room. Edit a duplicated group 8 In the drawing area. 7 After a warning message displays. click OK. select the Corner guest room group. 9 On the Options Bar. 5 Click at the upper-right corner of the room. 810 | Chapter 24 Grouping . Nest a group 17 In the Project Browser. and press DELETE. click Finish. 16 Select the same toilet room group.Place a duplicated group 4 Drag Corner guest room from the Project Browser to the vacant room in the northwest corner of the building. 15 On the Design Bar. 10 Press and hold CTRL. This is because the corner room is smaller than the interior rooms. click Edit Group. where the corridor wall and the exterior wall intersect.

select the Corner guest room group. click 26 On the Options Bar. staying perpendicular to the corridor wall. 27 Click the midpoint of the corridor wall as the start point of the axis of reflection as shown. click Save. 21 On the Design Bar. click Edit Group. 29 On the File menu. 25 On the Edit toolbar. Creating a Detail Group. 18 On the Options Bar. 19 In the drawing area. click Unjoin Elements to resolve the errors. click Finish Group. 23 On the Design Bar. TIP If a warning appears indicating that there are errors that cannot be ignored. select the Corner guest room group. 22 In the drawing area. 28 Drag the cursor to the left. 30 Proceed to the next exercise.Use the inside corner of the exterior wall and the corridor wall as the origin of the group. past the exterior wall. and click to specify the end point. click Finish to finish placing the group. select the Corner toilet room group. TIP To help find the midpoint of the wall. Working with Groups | 811 . enter SM on your keyboard to limit snaps to midpoints. Mirror along a drawn axis of reflection 24 In the drawing area. 20 On the Options Bar. for Axis. click Add To Group. click . A new instance of the Corner guest room group is added to the southwest corner of the building model.

you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 5 On the Design Bar. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. Add a text note 6 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. click to add an arc leader. click to draw a rectangular region. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 10 Enter Tile. 3 Click the lower-left endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. 2 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. and select a point on the interior of the vertical wall. click Filled Region. and click Modify on the Design Bar. 9 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 4 Move the cursor down and to the right. 812 | Chapter 24 Grouping .Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. click Text. 7 On the Options Bar. 8 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click Finish Sketch. Grouping-in progress. Draw a filled region 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rvt.

21 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Because the detail group contains variables. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar. you must manually attach it to each instance of the Typical toilet room group. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. click Save. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Using Attached Detail Groups. as shown. click Tag. expand Groups. double-click Level 2. and select the note and the filled region. and press ENTER. 20 On the File menu. Working with Groups | 813 . you add door tags to the Typical toilet room group. 19 Drag an instance of the Elevator lobby tile group from the Project Browser into the level 3 view. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. and expand Detail.rvt. click . 4 Place two door tags in the original instance of the Typical toilet room. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft.Create a detail group 11 Press and hold CTRL. Grouping-in progress. 13 In the Project Browser. as shown. clear Leader. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. double-click Level 3. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 18 In the Project Browser. 15 Enter Elevator lobby tile. Modify a group origin 16 In the drawing area. 12 On the Edit toolbar. 14 Right-click Group 1.

click Place Detail. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 12 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Edit toolbar. 814 | Chapter 24 Grouping . and select the two door tags. click . press and hold CTRL. (this group is just below the original instance of the Typical guest room group). Place a detail group in another group instance 11 Move the cursor over the Typical toilet room group. 9 Right-click Group 1. and click Rename. and expand Typical toilet room. expand Groups. 13 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog box. informing you that an attached detail group has been created for the Typical toilet room group.5 On the Design Bar. click Modify. press TAB. A warning dialog box is displayed. expand Attached Detail. 8 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. The new instance of the attached detail group is added at the same relative position and orientation as in the original instance of the model group. 10 Enter Door tags. select Door tags. and select the nested Typical toilet room group. and click OK.

the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group.rte file located in the Metric folder. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous lesson. therefore.NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog box. 2 In the Save Group dialog box. click New ➤ Project. navigate to the directory where you saved the group. Saving and Loading Groups. click the Training Files icon. expand Groups. select Typical toilet room for Group To Save. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog box. Save a group to a library 1 On the File menu. click to specify the start point of the square. 3 Click Save. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. Select the m_Tutorial_Default. 11 In the drawing area. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. select Typical toilet room.rvt. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. Sketch walls 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Browse. under Template file. click OK. click Save. 7 In the Load Group dialog box. as shown. and then drag the cursor so that all the walls in the square are 6000 mm long. NOTE Groups containing nested groups cannot be saved. and expand Model. click Load from Library ➤ Load Group. click Wall. and place it in the upper-right corner of the square. 5 In the New Project dialog box. drag it into the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar.rvg. Grouping-in progress. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. ■ ■ ■ In the New Project dialog box. click to draw a square. click Save to Library ➤ Save Group. and click Open. 14 On the File menu. Working with Groups | 815 . click OK. 6 On the File menu. 13 Select Typical toilet room. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. and click Open. Place an instance of the loaded group 12 In the Project Browser.

except for the wall-hosted component for which there is no wall. Automatically Creating a Group. so it is important to place the group accurately in order to use the walls you sketched. 16 Enter Loaded_Group for File name. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. Loaded_Group. you mirror the instance of the Typical toilet room group you added to the new project in the previous exercise. click Save. 14 On the Options Bar. 816 | Chapter 24 Grouping . click Finish. and click Save. The new group is created automatically and contains the same components as the existing group. The toilet and the tub are wall-hosted components whose hosts are not part of the group. The Typical toilet room model group is added to the new project. 3 Select the wall shared by the toilet and the sink as the axis of reflection. select the instance of Typical toilet room. Because one of the wall-hosted components in the group does not have a wall in the mirrored group.IMPORTANT Be sure to line up the outline of the group with the exterior surface of the walls. 15 On the File menu. 2 On the Edit toolbar. the software gives you the option of fixing the inconsistency by creating a new group. Automatically Creating a Group In this exercise. click . 1 In the drawing area. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise.

5 In the Fix Inconsistent Groups dialog box. The Typical toilet room model group is mirrored. click Modify. Click Yes when prompted to save the drawing. and a new group (Typical toilet room 2) is created. Working with Groups | 817 . and click OK. click Close. 6 On the Design Bar.Because there is no wall to host the tub in the mirrored instance. a warning dialog box is displayed. The tub component is not included in the new group because there is no wall to host it. click Create new group types. 7 On the File menu. 4 In the warning dialog box. click Fix Groups.

818 | Chapter 24 Grouping .

After completing level 1.Structural 25 In this tutorial. and beams to Level 1. columns. In the final lesson. 819 . you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model. You begin by adding the structural walls. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. you use the structural tools in Autodesk Revit Building to create a building model skeleton.

Open the m_Structural. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 820 | Chapter 25 Structural .Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. click Open. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. click the Training Files icon. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls.rvt file located in the Metric folder. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise.

Sketching Structural Walls. go to the Project Browser. to trace the initial set of structural walls. expand Views (all). click Save As. select Automatically place. SAT. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. 2 On the File menu. If necessary. 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog box. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open. DXF. 7 Click Open. and select Origin to origin. click the Training Files icon. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. In this exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Link (instead of import). Select Current view only. 4 In the Import/Link dialog box. 8 On the File menu. click Import/Link ➤ DWG. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. and double-click Level 2. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. select Invert colors. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial. and select m_wall-import. expand Floor Plans. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. This file is used in the next exercise. Adding Structural Walls | 821 .dwg from the Metric folder. After you trace the walls. under Import or Link. DGN. Select All for Layers.Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. 6 Under Positioning. you imported a DWG file.rvt.

First. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the Structural tab already displays on the Design Bar. rather than the height. Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways. and click Structural. you can add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In addition. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. Right-click the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector.200mm. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. 822 | Chapter 25 Structural . 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. select Basic Wall: Generic . This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. click Structural Wall. Structural_tutorial. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. proceed to Step 2.Dataset This exercise requires the project file.

and click the next line intersection. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. and click to specify the next wall endpoint. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Click . Adding Structural Walls | 823 . and click to specify the wall endpoint.6 On the Options Bar. In the steps that follow. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. 8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Depth. Specify Level 1. 9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection.

824 | Chapter 25 Structural . expand Views (all). Use the tools to modify 14 In the Project Browser. 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines.11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. and click to complete the chain of walls. in the View toolbar. 12 On the Design Bar. click Modify to finish the sketch. and double-click Level 2. 13 On the View toolbar. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking the 3D view. TIP If necessary. click . expand Floor Plans.

■ ■ 18 On the Design Bar. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. click Modify to end the wall chain. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. click . ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. 19 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Walls | 825 . you may want to zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. click Structural Wall. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. On the Options Bar.16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. select Basic Wall: Generic . click Structural Wall. clear m_wall-import. 26 On the Options Bar.200mm. specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. This is the left extent of the arc. click the Imported Categories tab. Click to create a three-point arc. double-click Level 2. ■ 27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 25 In the Type Selector. 23 Under Visibility. click . 28 On the Options Bar. 826 | Chapter 25 Structural .dwg. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. click Visibility/Graphics.Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click OK. 21 On the View menu. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. This is the right extent of the arc.

Adding Structural Walls | 827 .29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. enter 1500. click the value. 31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. 32 On the Design Bar. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. and press ENTER. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. click Modify. If it is not.

35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 36 On the Design Bar.34 Select the lower horizontal wall. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. enter 1500. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint shown in the illustration below. and press ENTER. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. you create the final structural walls for the project. clear Chain. 828 | Chapter 25 Structural . In the steps that follow. Both walls are 1200 mm long.

40 On the Design Bar. 39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. click . 41 On the View toolbar. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps.38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown. Adding Structural Walls | 829 . click Modify.

You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. double-click Level 2. click Dimension. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. 830 | Chapter 25 Structural . In the next exercise. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls. in its current state. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. In this exercise.42 On the File menu. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. You then make minor modifications to their position. Structural_tutorial. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. This project file is required. click Save.

the Options button becomes available. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . Adding Structural Walls | 831 . In the Auto Dimension Options dialog box. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. and when it highlights. select it. On the Options Bar. click Modify. Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. 8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. select Intersecting Walls. 6 Move the cursor to the left. Select Entire Walls for Pick. and click OK. ■ ■ 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. After you select Entire Walls. click Options to specify the wall pick options. and click to place the dimension as shown.4 On the Options Bar.

11 Click the temporary dimension value. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. 832 | Chapter 25 Structural . Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal.

and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. 13 On the File menu. several different beam types. Adding Structural Columns and Beams. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. you add structural columns. In the next lesson. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design.Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. This project file is required. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 833 . Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. click Save. click Undo Edit dimension length. 12 On the Edit menu. In this exercise. in its current state. joists.

In addition. you use the grid intersection tool. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. If necessary. 5 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. and you place a column outside of the grids. TIP When adding the column. 4 In the Type Selector. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. click Structural Column. Structural_tutorial. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. 2 On the View menu. and Level 2. 834 | Chapter 25 Structural .rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. select Height.Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. zoom in to place the column.

and select grids 1-5. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. C3. and C5. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. click Grid Intersection. TIP To create the crossing selection. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. 9 Use a crossing selection.7 Add similar columns to C2. and A. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 835 . and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below.

Columns A3-5 are shown below. 14 If necessary. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. zoom out until you can see all the grids.10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. 836 | Chapter 25 Structural . All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids. This completes this set of columns. 15 On the Options Bar. click Finish. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A.

17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 Select column A5 and delete it. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it.Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar. you could not have rotated them independently of each other. click Modify. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. click Finish. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 837 . 19 On the Options Bar. click Modify. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. B3-5 are shown below. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. click Grid Intersection. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. 24 On the Design Bar. click Structural Column.

expand Views (all). Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. 2 On the View menu. Adding Structural Beams and Girders. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you learn how to work with these varied conditions. Start the beam at the column and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. As you use the beam tool. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 2.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Beam. This project file is required. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.25 On the View toolbar. you used various methods to add structural columns. 838 | Chapter 25 Structural . you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. in its current state. In this exercise. In the next exercise. click . expand Floor Plans. Structural_tutorial. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. click Save. 26 On the File menu. you add beams manually. you add structural beams to the building model. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.

and then move the cursor up to grid A. click Modify. 10 In the Type Selector. select Girder for Usage.7.7 On the Design Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. 11 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 839 . 9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Beam. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A.

14 On the Options Bar. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. 840 | Chapter 25 Structural .Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. click Grid. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. For example. if a beam is joined column-to-column. Column Brace Ho o tal riz n Bracing Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. When you use the grid tool to place beams. Use the following table for other conditions.

press and hold CTRL. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. click Grid. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. click Modify. 24 Select grid 3. 23 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. enter 8200. click Finish.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. 22 In the Type Selector. 18 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. click Beam. click the temporary dimension value. 21 On the Design Bar. and select grid C. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 841 .

notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. 27 Using point-to-point insertion. select Girder for Usage. select Girder. 842 | Chapter 25 Structural . Press ESC to end the chain. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. 28 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. Click column B5 to add the first beam. 25 On the Options Bar.Notice beams are added between columns. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. select Chain. In addition. and for Usage. click Finish. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar.

click Finish. Press ESC to end the chain. 34 On the Options Bar. SI. select Girder for Usage. to snap only to intersections. Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. You can also use the shortcut key. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. 33 Select grid A. connecting the column at B4.29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 843 . NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. click Grid. 30 On the Options Bar. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this. Press ESC to end the chain. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines.

click .The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32.7 beam had crossed grid A. 39 On the View toolbar. click Grid. 38 On the Options Bar. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first. 844 | Chapter 25 Structural . click Finish. If the W310x32.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. 37 Select grid B. 36 On the Options Bar.

48 On the View toolbar. select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints). 43 In the Type Selector. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. select Girder for Usage. 45 Specify the beam start point at the centerline and endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5. click Modify. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grids 4 and 5. click Beam. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 845 .Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 47 On the Design Bar. 46 Move the cursor to the right. click . In the steps that follow. 44 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 2. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. 53 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. click Beam. In the steps that follow. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region. 52 In the Type Selector. and select Chain. 846 | Chapter 25 Structural . 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall centerline and grid 3.Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step. 55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall and grid A. select Girder. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. for Usage. and click when it intersects grid 2. double-click Level 2.

and click when it intersects grid 1. 57 On the View toolbar. Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 847 .56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. click .

while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method. In the next exercise. and purlins to the building model. double-click Level 2. 2 Zoom around the A1 . Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid 1. You then create a joist array. 4 In the Project Browser. M_W-Wide Flange. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. For example. 848 | Chapter 25 Structural . You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams.58 On the File menu. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. in its current state. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. under Floor Plans. click W310x32. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. under Families. You also add joists and purlins to the building model. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. In this exercise. Adding Joists and Purlins. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.7. click Beam. 5 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it.B3 quadrants.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save. you replace some of the existing girders with trusses. Structural_tutorial. you add joists. Structural Framing. This project file is required.

click Modify. 10 Click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog box. In addition. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 849 . 7 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. the Automatic option was selected by default in the Options Bar.6 On the Design Bar. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. 8 With the beam selected. notice that the Structural Usage parameter value is Joist. according to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson. click on the Options Bar. Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. click Array. Create a joist array 11 On the Edit menu.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . Clear Group and Associate.12 On the Options Bar. Enter 14 for Number. 850 | Chapter 25 Structural . 13 Enter SI to snap only to intersections. Make sure the cursor is over grid A. Select 2nd for Move to. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. Once the direction is set. enter 1250 and press ENTER. 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A.

click Beam.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 851 . 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. 17 Add a W310x32.7 beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown.

style. Clear Group and Associate. 21 On the Options Bar. and click. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. and purlins. and color within the Object Styles dialog box.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. click Array. Enter 7 for Number. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. 852 | Chapter 25 Structural . Select 2nd for Move to. joists. Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage value. This is the array start point. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click . 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown. 20 On the Edit menu.

Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. 27 On the Options Bar. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. and click OK. Adding Structural Columns and Beams | 853 . click . clear all options except Structural Framing. click . 26 In the Filter dialog box.The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. 25 On the Options Bar.

854 | Chapter 25 Structural . in its current state. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. click Modify. 31 On the File menu. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. change the following instance parameters: ■ ■ ■ Select Moment Connection Last Select Moment Connection First Click OK. In the next lesson. In this exercise. click Save. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. you create new levels. 29 On the Design Bar. and notice the connection symbols display. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model.28 In the Element Properties dialog box. click . This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. This project file is required. 30 On the View toolbar. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.

click Level. and double-click Building Elevation. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. Structural_tutorial. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels.Defining New Levels In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Make Plan View.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 5 On the Options Bar. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Select grid 1. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 855 . Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2. Click to add Level 3. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. under Views (all). you create several new levels. expand Elevations. You need at least 3 meters of space.

In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. 8 On the File menu. Each level is 3000 mm high. Duplicating the Existing Design. click Save. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. 856 | Chapter 25 Structural . This project file is required. you created three new levels.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. These levels that are required in the next exercise. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. click . where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels.In the Project Browser. in its current state. Structural_tutorial.

click Modify. click Copy to Clipboard. 5 On the Edit menu. 8 On the Design Bar. select Level 2. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels | 857 . Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Design Bar. Make sure the entire building model is included.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. click OK. 7 In the Select Levels dialog box. press and hold CTRL. and select Levels 3 and 4. 6 In the Select Levels dialog box. click Modify. 3 On the Edit menu.

you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. 10 On the File menu. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. In the next lesson. you create a framing elevation. click Save. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. You copied the Level 1 structure elements and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. double-click Building Elevation. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation. 858 | Chapter 25 Structural . in its current state. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. This project file is required. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. In this exercise.9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial.

Elevation 1-a. double-click Level 2. 6 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. click Modify. in the Project Browser. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. You can now view the new elevation. 4 Place the cursor over grid C. Structural_tutorial. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. click Framing Elevation. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. make sure Attach to Grid is selected.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 859 .

you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Save. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. you add structural braces to the building model. In this exercise. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial. 860 | Chapter 25 Structural . Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. In the next exercise. 7 On the File menu. in its current state. You are ready to add the structural braces. Adding Structural Braces.Notice the stick framing representation. This project file is required.

Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. click Brace. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 861 . you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable.4. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. select the grids and drag the grid heads above level 5. When adding the braces. you use point-to-point insertion. select the view crop box. and using the shape grips. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. NOTE If necessary. 3 In the Type Selector. select M_C-Channel: C75x7. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. Enter 4 for Number.The brace displays. click Array. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. The second brace is displayed. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. 862 | Chapter 25 Structural . Clear Group and Associate. Select Constrain. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. 7 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint at the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. Select 2nd for Move to. 11 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Edit menu. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click .

14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click . 15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog box. Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation | 863 . and click OK. 16 On the View toolbar. select Structural Framing Tags. click Tag All Not Tagged.

17 On the File menu. click Save. 864 | Chapter 25 Structural . In this exercise. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array.

Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. Using Worksharing. and so on. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. A workset is a collection of building elements. such as walls. they cannot make changes to it. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. floors. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. however. 865 . architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area.Sharing Projects 26 When working with large building projects. In this tutorial. called Worksharing. doors. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Autodesk Revit Building®. You can enable Worksharing for any project. stairs. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. All other team members can view this workset.

Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. select the desired workset. 866 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog box. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. such as a tenant interior. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. The first time you activate worksets within a project. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. go to the Worksets dialog box. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Building by opening only those worksets required for your work. and click Editable. After learning the fundamentals. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. such as annotations and dimensions. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Working in a shared project In a shared project. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. To make a workset editable. you must first enable Worksharing. In the next exercise. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog box for that element. After the project is shared. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Instead. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. use Element Borrowing. a dialog box displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. ■ Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. you specify an active workset. In the lessons and exercises that follow. you can select which worksets are open or closed. In a multi-story structure. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. Elements specific to a view. When setting up Worksharing.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. When you are working on a shared project.

Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. with each assigned a specific functional task. Shared Levels and Grids. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. designers work in teams. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. the file is saved as the central file. Step 2: Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. This allows Revit Building to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. Therefore. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. When creating the new worksets. and View worksets. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. In most projects. Experience has shown that. Using Worksharing in a Project | 867 . If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. When you create a new workset.■ Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. if a workset named Interior was created. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. You should have at least one workset for each person. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. for a typical project. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. ■ Team member roles Typically. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. Generally. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. On this tab. ■ Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. Regardless of the default setting. each team member has control over a portion of the design. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. For example. As new members create worksets for their own use. not including the Project Standards.

save to the central file. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. When you save to the central file. and then save the local file. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. This is called “Selective Open. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you work no differently then you would in the office. On the Options Bar. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. your changes are saved. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. When you save locally (to your local file). you should use it only when: ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. After saving to the central file. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. proceeds as usual. When working remotely. you can select which workset is active. within the local file. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you make that workset editable by you. you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. In this situation. you should then save to your local file. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost.Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. However. make any required worksets editable.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. When finished or at regular intervals. As you work. When you save to the central file. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. your changes propagate to the entire team. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. however. In this instance. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. This makes them available to other team members. or 868 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. Step 9: Work on the project Work on the project. if you know who checked out the required workset. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file.

Alternatively. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Building. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. for instance." Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to default worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File.rvt file located in the Common folder. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. The Worksets dialog box is displayed. click Worksets. you should check out the Materials workset. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. In this conceptual exercise. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. To do this. click Open. and make that workset editable. using VPN. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. Open the c_Worksets. click the Training Files icon. In the left pane of the Open dialog box.■ You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. In the next exercise. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. reload the latest changes from the central file. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. A dialog box displays suggesting that any user new to Worksharing should complete this training. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. Using Worksharing in a Project | 869 .

The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. and Views. click New. currently named Workset1. and notice all are editable by you. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Project Standards. 4 In the Worksets dialog box. imagine four users including yourself. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. Therefore. Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog box. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. 12 In the Worksets dialog box. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. In this case. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. 6 Under Show. 870 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. you can rename the default workset. select Workset1. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. clear Visible by default in all views. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout.3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. For training purposes. 10 Click New. another is assigned the interior layout. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. Your username displays as the present owner. 13 Click Rename. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 9 Click OK. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Only User-Created worksets should display. turn off Families. it is better to make them visible by default. In this simple training project. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. under Show. Because the interior walls appear in many views. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. and click OK. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views.

under Identity Data. 24 Select all of the interior elements. type the name Exterior Shell. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. and walls. Using Worksharing in a Project | 871 . and click OK. 22 On the Options Bar. including the interior doors. In this training file. You do. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. stairs. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. under Identity Data. however. expand Views (all). 20 Click OK. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. select Interior Layout for Workset. expand Floor Plans. 23 In the Element Properties dialog box. 18 On the Options Bar. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. When you initially activate Worksharing. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 17 In the drawing area. click . 19 In the Element Properties dialog box. 15 In the Worksets dialog box. click OK. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default.14 In the Rename dialog box. 21 Select one of the interior walls. and double-click Level 1. click . Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. 872 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . click .25 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. select Interior Layout for Workset. and click OK. under Identity Data. click Save As. 34 In the Project Browser. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click the Worksets tab. under Identity Data. click the Worksets tab. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. 27 On the View menu. select Interior Layout for Workset. 37 In the Element Properties dialog box. click Visibility/Graphics. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. click . 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 33 Select Interior Layout. and click OK. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. 26 In the Element Properties dialog box. 35 In the drawing area. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 36 On the Options Bar. 30 Click OK. select all of the interior elements of the building model. If any interior elements remain. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. under Views (all). double-click Level 2. 31 On the View menu.

Using Worksharing in a Project | 873 . This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. click Save As. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. check out worksets. 4 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. click Worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets. you enabled Worksharing on a project. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Non Editable. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. select all the User-Created worksets. 3 Click Open. 45 On the File menu.Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. 43 On the right side of the dialog box. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. In addition. Now that you have created the central file. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. select the central file and. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click Save. 2 In the Open dialog box. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. In this exercise. please do so before continuing. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. If you have not yet completed the exercise. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 42 In the Worksets dialog box. 44 Click OK. select Specify. Next. and click OK. 40 Click Save. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 7 In the File Save Options dialog box. under Open Worksets. click Worksets. 6 In the Save As dialog box. make modifications to the building model. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 5 On the File menu. 39 In the Save As dialog box. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. click Options. you create your local file. click Close. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click OK. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. click Open. make sure you remember the location of this central file.

you can still edit this wall. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 23 Click OK. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. 17 On the Options Bar.The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. select Interior Layout for Name. Because this element is not owned by another user. click Modify. and select Yes for Editable. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. 10 In the Worksets dialog box. 22 On the File menu. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. select Interior Layout. 18 In the Element Properties dialog box. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. Revit Building borrows it for you and applies your changes. 12 On the Window menu. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. however. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. 20 On the Options Bar. Before working on the model. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. 19 Under Constraints. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 11 Click OK. If it was owned by another user. 874 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. expand Views (all). click . 13 On the Worksets toolbar. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. notice the Editable Only option. Verify that it is cleared. In this case. 14 In the Project Browser. If this is selected. click . In this case. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. under Identity Data. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. 21 Click OK. click Worksets. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. and click OK. In the Worksets dialog box.

27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. click Door. click Modify. select Basic Wall: Interior . The precise location is not important. 28 In the Type Selector. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door. 25 Delete the door. click Wall. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Using Worksharing in a Project | 875 .126mm Partition (2-hr). 33 In the Type Selector. 30 On the Design Bar.Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner.

34 Using the following illustration as a guide. 876 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. In addition. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. In this exercise. which matches the information in the Status Bar. 36 In the Save to Central dialog box. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. checked out worksets. For training purposes. add two door openings into the rooms you created. a tooltip. it is recommended. and reload the latest changes. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. At the end of a work session. Borrowed Elements is selected. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. and proceed to Creating a local copy. you should relinquish all worksets. displays the workset as well as the element type. In the following section of this exercise. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. leave this file open in its current state. By default. save to central. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. Whenever you save. When working in your local file. and save locally immediately afterward. please do so before continuing. each user must check out worksets. In this particular case. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. skip the following section. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. you created your local file. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 37 Click OK. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. two users access the central file through a network connection. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. The Save to Central dialog box is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. make elements editable. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. You modified the building model. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. you should perform regular saves. If you have not yet completed these exercises. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. click Save to Central. Throughout the process.

and click OK. select the central file and. enter User 2. and click OK. This file is for your use only. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. under Open Worksets. 16 Click OK. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. 8 Click Open. Using Worksharing in a Project | 877 . return to the Settings dialog box. one user has already created a local file. User 2: Create a local file. 7 In the Open dialog box. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. and select Yes for Editable.Using a second Revit Building session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Building window. 14 On the File menu. 10 On the File menu. click Open. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. click Options. click Options. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. and reset the Username to your computer login name. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Save As. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. 12 In the File Save Options dialog box. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog box. and click OK. 4 Click the General Tab and. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. click Worksets. and click Save. You are now the owner of that workset. 11 In the Save As dialog box. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. In addition. select Specify. 2 Start a new Revit Building session by double-clicking the Revit Building icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise.rvt. select all the User-Created worksets. instructions are staggered. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. For training purposes. under Username. consider that person to be User 1. 3 On the Settings menu. This is a system setting. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. specifically sequenced. You now have a local copy of the project. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. Regardless of which central file you choose to use.

20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog box. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. modify the building model. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. If it is not open. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 878 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. and select Yes for Editable. and double-click Level 1. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. click Save to Central. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. 23 In the Project Browser. it becomes the active workset. select the lower exterior wall. and double-click Level 1. 27 In the Save to Central dialog box.User 1: Check out worksets. open it now. click Worksets. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. expand Views (all). expand Floor Plans. 22 Click OK. expand Views (all). A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 28 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. 18 On the File menu. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. If you only have one workset checked out. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. 26 On the File menu.

32 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 37 In the Save to Central dialog box. Click Yes. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. click Reload Latest. and click inside any room. 42 On the Project Browser. select Yes for Editable. and click OK. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. 48 On the Design Bar. the Visible by default option was not selected. click Modify. Therefore. User 1: Reload latest worksets. 40 On the File menu. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. right-click Copy of Level 1. However. 34 Click OK. 41 Select Furniture Layout. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. you should create a furniture plan view. right-click Level 1. 44 In the Rename View dialog box. 45 On the Project Browser. and click OK. 33 In the Save to Central dialog box. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. 36 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. The changes User 2 made are apparent. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. and click Duplicate. 49 On the View menu. 43 On the Project Browser. 38 Click OK. 47 In the Type Selector. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. and click OK. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Worksets. Before adding any furniture. When you save to central. Using Worksharing in a Project | 879 . and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. click the Worksets tab. choose any desk. click Component. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. click Save to Central. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. under Views (all). click Save to Central. click Visibility/Graphics. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog box. and click Rename.

enter Exterior Wall . under Show. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. select the following. click Edit/New. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. and click OK. click Rename. Checking out worksets. click Save to Central.200mm. 57 In the Element Properties dialog box. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. click Save to Central. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 67 Click OK. In the final exercise of this tutorial. select the option to save the local file after the central file is saved. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. select Project Standards. leave this file open in its current state. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully In this exercise. 70 In the Save to Central dialog box.52 On the File menu. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users. and published their changes back to the central file. 60 Click OK twice. leave this file open in its current state. and save 68 On the File menu. 54 Click OK. 66 In the Save to Central dialog box. and click Properties. 64 Click OK. select Reload Latest. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. Each user checked out worksets. 62 In the Worksets dialog box. 65 On the File menu. User 1: Reload latest. 61 On the File menu. click Reload Latest. click Worksets. 880 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 53 In the Save to Central dialog box. 59 In the Rename dialog box. 58 In the Type Properties dialog box. 69 On the File menu. select Save to Central. modified the building model. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. and click OK. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset.

In subsequent steps. you save the dataset as a central file. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. and click OK. As each of you work. 4 In the File Save Options dialog box. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Building by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. click Open. and click OK. and click OK. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. 7 On the File menu. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. throughout this training. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Building and setting the username to User 2. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). two users are working on the same project with separate local files. 10 In the File Save Options dialog box. 5 Click Save. click Save As. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. you need to set up your central and local files. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location. There are specific instructions for each user. This exercise requires two users and. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. 9 In the Save As dialog box. and these problems are rectified. This is the local file for User 1. Open the c_Worksets Project-Central. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. click Options.Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. click the Training Files icon. and click Save. click Save As. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). and still have your local files open. At the appropriate point in this exercise. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. Click the General tab of the Options dialog box. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. select Make this the Central location after save. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. 3 In the Save As dialog box.rvt file located in the Common folder. click Options. User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. ■ ■ ■ Using Worksharing in a Project | 881 . instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. On the Settings menu. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. click Options. finished the previous workset exercises. Set the Username to User 2. The central file should still be open. Each user must have network access to the central file.

28 Under Active Workset. 19 In the File Save Options dialog box. select Exterior Shell. select the second window from the top. select the central file and under Open Worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. 23 In the Worksets dialog box. 31 On the left exterior wall. click Options. click Worksets. if any User-Created worksets are not open. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. click Save As. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. click Open. In addition. 13 On the File menu. and then click OK.This Revit Building session is now set up for User 2. 24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. and click OK. and select Yes for Editable. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. Afterwards. and select Yes for Editable. 14 In the Open dialog box. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. 30 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Worksets dialog box. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. 18 In the Save As dialog box. You are now the owner of that workset. under Floor Plans. and click OK. You have created a local file which is for your use only. verify that Editable Only is cleared. return to the Settings dialog box. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. double-click Level 1. and reset the Username to your computer login name. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. You are now the owner of that workset. 15 Click Open. 25 Under Active Workset. verify that Make this the Central location after save is not selected. select them. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. select Specify. Next. select the Interior Layout workset. click Worksets. 17 On the File menu. and click Save. This is a system setting. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select Interior Layout. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and then click OK. and click Open. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. 882 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . 16 Select all the User-Created worksets.

35 In the Editing Requests dialog box. 39 Click OK. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. 36 Click Grant. Using Worksharing in a Project | 883 . User 2: Check for editability grant 38 In the Check Editability Grants dialog box. click Check Now. 37 Click Close. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. click the File menu. At this point. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. select the request submitted by User 2. After you submit the request. and click Editing Requests.A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 34 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. Leave this dialog box open until User 1 grants permission. and notice the window is in the new location. A message informs you that your request has been granted.

User 1 and 2: Save to Central. 41 In the Save to Central dialog box. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the local file after “Save to Central” completes successfully 42 On the File menu. select the following. select Save to Central. In this case. and close 40 On the File menu. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. and the other user granted it. to Local. and click OK. click Close. In this multi-user exercise. 884 | Chapter 26 Sharing Projects . you requested permission to edit the element.

you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In this tutorial. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. 885 .Creating Multiple Design Options 27 When working with a building model. Using design options.

886 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. In this particular case. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. each with multiple design options. click New. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes. you set up multiple design option sets. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set. you design each of the structural options. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. In the left pane of the Open dialog box. you can edit it. At any time in the design process. and each option set can have multiple schemes. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. Open the m_Urban_House. make your final design decision. In the first exercise in this lesson. click the Training Files icon. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. you learn how to manage and organize the design options. Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise.rvt file located in the Metric folder. After you and the client agree on the final design. With the second option. For example. 2 In the Design Options dialog box. the only available command is to create a new option set. Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). In addition. under Option Set. and delete the unwanted options from the project. In the second exercise.Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options. In the final exercise of this lesson. After you create a design option. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you can have multiple sets of design options. The client has asked you to create various options. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. click Open. The first time you open the Design Options dialog box within a project. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.

and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. and the third column centered between the two. click Column. click 12 On the Options Bar. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click Close. TIP To center the middle column. 4 In the Project Browser. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls.TIP In this exercise. 5 On the View menu. In the following illustration. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. 7 In the Type Selector. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. or add a dimension string between the columns. You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 9 On the Design Bar. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. each is constructed for interchangeability. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. add three columns. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. expand Views (all). By selecting Multiple. therefore. click Modify. the roof and structure systems must work together. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 887 . In this case. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. select: ■ ■ ■ . the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). click Edit Selected. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. expand Floor Plans. select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. 11 On the Edit toolbar. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click).

17 Zoom out and. using the same technique. When you are finished.15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. Because of the size of the columns. A copy of the three selected columns is added. 18 On the View toolbar. they are difficult to see in this view. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. 888 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click . Notice the 12 columns that you added. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch.

Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. and click at its center to set the beam start point. click Modify. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click TOP OF CORE. you add the beams that span the columns. 24 Select the Beam you added previously. select Round Bar : 50mm. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. 23 On the Design Bar.Next. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam. The second click specifies the end of the beam. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 889 . and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 19 In the Project Browser. Zoom in on the upper right column. under Floor Plans. 25 On the Edit toolbar. 21 In the Type Selector. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. click . Use the following illustration as a guide. The first click specifies the beam start point. In it. Adding a beam is a two-click process. click Beam.

select: ■ ■ ■ Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. and click the center point. Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. 28 Zoom out. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies. zoom into the left column. 890 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . click .26 On the Options Bar. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. move down to the next set of columns. 30 On the View toolbar.

and click OK. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 32 In the Design Options dialog box. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option.Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. click New. click Rename. click Rename. 37 Select Option 2 and. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. under Option. 40 In the Rename dialog box. click Rename. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. not a new option set. and click OK. and click OK. 38 In the Rename dialog box. 33 Click Finish Editing. enter Structure for New. enter Brackets for New. under Option. under Option. under Option Set. 34 In the Design Options dialog box. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. enter Beam for New. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 891 . 36 In the Rename dialog box.

notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. you create the second design option. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. select Beam. 48 Under Option. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. This allows you to more easily manage the project. click Rename. and click OK. click Rename. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. name the option Sunscreen. name the option Louvers. 46 Under Option. 41 Under Option Set. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. under Option. 50 In the Design Options dialog box. it will resemble the following illustration. and click OK. click New. There should now be two roofing design options. Under Now Editing. When finished. 45 Under Roofing. select Edit Selected. 43 In the Rename dialog box. 892 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . under Option Set. select Option 1 (primary). click New. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. enter Roofing for New. and click OK. 52 Click Close. 51 Under Edit.Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 47 Under Roofing. click Rename. select Option 2. under Structure.

The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. 58 On the Tools menu. The second click represents the plane that is moved. select M_Roof Beam. click Align. 56 In the Type Selector. Refer to the following illustration. click Component. Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project | 893 .53 In the Project Browser. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. 55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click ROOF TERRACE. under Floor Plans.

on the Edit toolbar. Click to indicate the end point of the move. 894 | Chapter 27 Creating Multiple Design Options . Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. The first click sets the move start point. click Modify. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown. Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. 62 Select the beam and. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 61 On the Design Bar. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. The second click represents the move end point.60 After aligning the beam.

you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than